105105162

DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES
Prof. Damodar Maiti

Civil Engineering
IIT Kharagpur
INDEX
S.No. Topic Page No.

WEEK- 1
1 Introduction to Limit State Design of Steel Structures 01
2 Steel as Structural Material 15
3 Limit State Design 29
4 Introduction to Connections 49
5 Introduction to Bolt Connection 63
WEEK- 2
6 Design of Ordinary Black Bolts 76

Worked Out Examples on Design of Ordinary Black
7 90
Bolts
8 Design of High Strength Friction Grip Bolts 104
9 Weld Connection 119
10 Design of Fillet welds 142
WEEK- 3
11 Design of Butt welds 154

12 Design of Plug and Slot Weld 169
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in Plane of Bolted
13 184
Joint)
Design of Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in
14 198
Plane of Bolted Joint)
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in Plane of
15 211
Welded Joint).
WEEK – 4
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to

16 222
Plane of Bolted Joint)
Design of Eccentric Connection (Load Lying
17 231
Perpendicular to Plane of Bolted Joint)
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to
18 242
Plane of Welded Joint)
19 Tension Members and Net Area 256
20 Calculation of Net Area in Tension Member 268
WEEK- 5
21 Design Strength of Tension Member 274

22 Strength Calculation of Tension Member 282
23 Strength of Tension Members and Weld Connection 296
24 Steps for Design of Tension Members 306
25 Design Calculation of Tension Members 329
WEEK- 6
26 Design of Gusset Plate 343

27 Lug Angles 353
28 Splices in Tension Members 365
29 Compression Members 372
30 Design Strength of Compressive Member 390
WEEK – 7
31 Compressive Strength 403

32 Compressive strength of angle struts 416
33 Compressive strength of double angles 429
34 Design of Compression Members 438
35 Design of Built up Compression Member 457
WEEK – 8
36 Lacing Systems 473
37 Design of Lacing Systems 489
38 Connection Design of Lacing System 507
39 Design of Double Lacing System 523
40 Batten Plates 537
WEEK- 9
41 Design of Batten using Bolt Connection 547

42 Design of Batten Plates using Weld Connection. 563
43 Design of Column Splice. 579
44 Design of Column Splice due to Shear. 592
45 Introduction to Flexural Member. 603
WEEK – 10
46 Failure Modes of Flexural Members 614

47 Laterally Supported Beams 630
48 Design of Laterally Supported Beams 641
49 Laterally Supported Beams with High Shear 653
50 Laterally Unsupported Beams 660
Strength Calculation of Laterally Unsupported
51 666
Beams
WEEK – 11
52 Design of Laterally Unsupported Beams 678

53 Calculation of Plastic Section Modulus 692
54 Purlins 702
55 Design of Purlins 712
56 Introduction to Gantry Girders 719
57 Design of Gantry Girder 728
WEEK – 12
58 Worked Out Example for Gantry Girder 733

59 Slab Base 744
60 Design of Slab Base 753
61 Eccentrically Loaded Base Plate 762
62 Gusset Base 769
63 Design of Gusset Base 777
Course on Design of Steel Structures
Prof. Damodar Maity
Department of Civil Engineering
Indian Institute of Technology Kharagpur
Mod01 lecture 01
Introduction to Limit State Design of Steel Structures
I welcome to the limit state design of steel structure class. The limit state design of steel
structure has been introduced in our Indian code in 2007. Before that, we used to design the
steel structure by the use of Working Stress Method and from 2007 onwards, the codel
provision has been changed and in 2007, the IS 800-2007 has been published where the entire
code has been discussed based on Limit State Design method.
Now coming to this course, today I will discuss about the probable content of the course,
which I am going to cover in next 60 lectures. I will inform what are the books you can
follow and what are the codes required for learning this course, and I will show you some
steel rolled section. What are their properties, how the parameters vary, how the parameters
are considered? Which parameters are considered? Which are given in the IS handbook SP-
6, I will just give you touch on that.
Now coming to the Limit State Design of steel structure, one thing we can say that now a
days, in every city or every country, wherever you see some skyscrapers, these are mostly
built with the steel. Steel has lot of advantages, which I will come later, and because of its
advantageous properties, we, the designer prefer for designing the structure with the steel.
Steel sections are massively used particularly in bridge structure and in transmission tower,
refinery well structure. Sometimes some water tanks, some high rise buildings, many
industrial buildings, sheds are made of steels. Steel is much stronger than the conventional
construction material like concrete, its strength to weight ratio is very high i.e. its weight is
very less and strength is very high. It is much ductile compared to concrete and, because of
its advantages designer prefers steel structure, though it is costly.
So if we design properly in a cost effective way, the cost can be minimized without
compromising the safety. Therefore, we need to know the design procedure properly and
may be in later, by knowing the design procedure we can make a computer code, we can
generate some computer algorithm, by the use of matlab or any other standard language like
C language, C++, java or we can use excel sheet also. In steel design, we need to iterate the
design process. We will assume certain member with certain dimensions and we will check
1
from limit state point of view, from ultimate strength point of view, from serviceability
criteria point of view. We will check certain steps and if we see these are not satisfied then we
have to increase the size and if we see it is satisfied then we can go for this particular section.
In case of limit state design, there are lot of procedures and calculations. Hence, it is very
difficult to perform manual calculation. Therefore, if you can develop a computer algorithm
of if you can develop an excel sheet then just by putting the value you can check, whether it
is okay or not. In some cases we have seen that when the designer is saying that the assumed
section is okay then they simply go with that section, but that is not economic, because may
be with some lesser section under the same loading, it may be safe.
Therefore, we must go for the lesser section, though sometime designers do not go for it,
because lot of calculations have to be done. It is a tedious process. But I will suggest you that
if you know the design algorithm, if you understand the design process of a particular
member then you make a customized program at your own requirement and then go for this
program for the design of the section and in that way you can make that design optimized,
economic and cost effective.
(Refer Slide Time: 5:44)
Now coming to the anatomy of the structure we will see that any steel structures are having
these types of members, as one is beam. Beam is a flexural member where the flexural action
come into picture. Therefore, we need to know the design of a flexural member of the beam,
and then the load will come to the column. Column takes basically the compressive load
along with certain eccentric load, so sometimes moment also come into picture, therefore
column has to be designed accordingly. Floor carries the load and that load is transferred to
2
the beam and column. Bracing system is an important system in case of steel structure.
Bracings has been provided just to increase the load carrying capacity in terms of horizontal
load. Now the entire super structural load are going to the foundation, so we need to know the
foundation design also. Therefore, in foundation we will see the slab base, gusset base, base
plate and how the load from the super structure has been transferred to the sub-structure by
the use of base plate and other members. An important part, which we do not generally come
across in case of RCC structure, is connection.
These connections are very important in the sense, that we know the rolled steel sections are
available or some other type of sections also can be made available in terms of built up
section etc., but it required to be joined properly. Therefore, beam and column need to be
joined properly by the use of bolt, rivet or weld connection.
So, when I will be going to teach this subject, I will discuss about the connection at first,
because if we know connection then we can go for further in design. In steel design as a
whole, connection plays a very important role. We do not give much importance to the
connection, though, I will recommend that when we are going to design a entire system we
have to specially look for the connections and we have to design connections properly, so that
load is transferred from one system to another system, one member to another member
properly. Sometimes moment also has to be transferred, sometimes only axial force.
Therefore, based on the requirement we have to decide what type of connections we will be
going for.
3
Therefore, I am briefly discussing the syllabus, which I am going to cover, but it is tentative,
because I do not know how much time I will get to finish. So first module will be
introduction, we will discuss about steel as a structural material and we will discuss its
advantages and disadvantages, because unless we know the disadvantages of steel we will not
make use of it properly. Then we will go for different types of sections, I. S. rolled sections,
which are available in the market, and their properties are given in the code. Then we will go
for some material overview, means how the steel behaves with the increase of load, how
stress strain varies in case of steel and how the mechanical properties are dependent on
chemical properties of the steel that we will discuss. Then basis for structural design will be
discussed means what type of structural design we are going for in this course.
Then we will come to the module 2, which comprises of connections. So different types of
connections will be discussed and in that connection we will discuss about the bolted
connections, its advantages and disadvantages, then design of bolted connections, its
efficiency and design of joints, then welded connections, advantages and disadvantages of
welded joints, design of weld connections, fillet weld, butt or group weld, plug and slot weld.
So these are the probable topics, I am going to cover.
Then in next module, we will discuss about the eccentric connections, because sometimes
connections become eccentric in terms of its loading. So, different types of eccentric
connections are observed, so we will discuss about bolted and welded connection with load
lying in plane of joint and load lying perpendicular to the plane of joint.
4
Then we will discuss about the design of eccentric connection using bolts and weld. In
module 4, we will discuss about the design of tension members. In tension member, we will
first come into different types of failures, we will find out the gross and net sectional area,
then rupture of critical section then strength calculation, block shear failure, then slenderness
ratio of the member and then we will come to design of tension members, considering all this
and then gusset plates, lug angle, tension splices, design of tension members subjected to
axial and bending, those things will be discussed
In module 5, we will discuss about the compression members. In compression member, first
we will see what are the types of failure occur in case of compression member and
accordingly the strength calculation will be discussed. Then how to calculate slenderness
ratio of the compression member, we will find out and then design of the compression
member and design of eccentrically loaded compression member that means when moment
also will come into picture.
Sometimes the rolled steel section is not sufficient for withstanding the huge amount of load.
So, in that case we will go for built-up compression member, their design procedure will be
discussed. Then in built-up compression member, we need to add the lacing systems. So
design of lacing system and design of batten plates will also be discussed in this module.
In module 6, we will discuss about the flexural member which is called beam. So we will
give you some introduction to flexural member and then design procedure of beam. Beam
will be basically two types, laterally supported beam and laterally un-supported beam, for
5
both the cases, design procedure will be discussed. Built-up beams and design of purlins also
will be introduced in this module.
Then we will come to column base, design of the gusseted base and slab base along with base
plate will be discussed here. If we get time then we will discuss about the gantry girder,
because in steel structure gantry girder is an important component, which we need to know.
So in last module we will discuss about the design aspects of gantry girder, various type of
loads will be there. Therefore, what are the loads coming into gantry girder and how to design
the gantry girder will be discussed.
6
Now I would suggest to follow these two books along with my lectures. These books are very
well written; one book is design of steel structure written by Dr. Subramanian Narayanan
who has directly involved with the development of I. S. 800 2007 code. He has written this
book which is very exhaustively written and well documented. Another book also you can
follow that is written by S. K. Duggal, Tata McGraw Hill publication, limit state design of
steel structure and the first book is published by Oxford publication.
So, other than these two books you can follow some other books also if you want, but I have
seen many books are available in which design calculations are not given properly. However,
in these two books the design calculation and procedures and very well documented in a
simplified manner. You can go for some reference also like design of steel structure by Elias
Abu-Saba, this is CBS publication, you can use this book as a reference book.
Then design of steel structure by E. H. Gaylord et al. by McGraw Hill and structural steel
work by S. S. Ray, Blackwell science. However I will suggest you to at least follow one text
book which has been suggested earlier in earlier slide that is either Dr. Subramananyn’s book
or S. K. Duggals’ book.
7
Now these codes are required while learning the design of steel structure, first is the earlier
code IS: 800, 1984 which was based on working this method. Now the codel provision has
been changed and in IS 800-2007, the code of practice for general construction in steel has
been given, in which the limit state design method has been followed. Therefore, when you
follow my lecture I will suggest you to sit with this code, because lot of codal provisions are
there, which has to be followed while listening my lecture. If you follow the codes at the
same time, it will be easier to understand the lecture. There is a handbook that is SP 6(1)-
1964 for structural engineers where the Indian steel rolled section properties are given.
All the standard rolled section (I section, channel section, T section, angle sections)
properties are given in that IS handbook. So we should follow that and also we can follow the
IS 808-1989 where certain properties are given. You can use steel table of any standard
publication where the properties are given. Other than that, I will suggest you to follow IS
875-part I to part IV for design loads other than earthquake for buildings and structures. I will
come with this code in details later and also IRC code vehicle load in bridge structures may
be useful apart from this for seismic consideration IS 1893-2002 .
8
Now coming to rolled steel section, I have told that different type of rolled sections are
available in the market and their properties are given in IS handbook in SP-6, so like here I
have shown that Indian Standard Junior Beam which is termed as JB also. So, Indian
Standard Junior Beam (ISJB), Indian Standard Light Beam (ISLB) and Indian Standard
Medium Weight Beam (ISMB), Indian Standard Wide Flange Beam (ISWB). So different
type of I sections are available in the code. Indian Standard Heavy Weight Beam (ISHB),
Indian standard column section are also available there.
9
Now, the overall depth of I section is called D, in the SP-6, the properties of I sections are
given. If you say ISMB 250 that means it will refer to a particular I section of medium beam
ISMB, that 250 means the overall depth of the section will be 250. Therefore, this D will be
250 overall depth.
The width of flange is called B and sometimes we call bf also, and web thickness is called t or
tw. Thickness of flange is measured at (B - t)/4 distance and we mention the thickness of the
flange is T or tf.
So if you see in the SP-6, the properties of I section suppose if it is ISMB 250 then its depth
is 250, its weight, its cross sectional area and the geometrical properties everything is
mentioned there. Not only the geometrical properties, but also Ixx, (moment of inertia about x-
axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about y-axis), Rxx (radius of gyration about x-axis), Ryy (radius of
gyration about y-axis), section modulus Ze, Zp, gauge distance can be found. Therefore, that
gauge distance is also standard for particular section. So all the relevant properties can be
found out from that code.
This channel section are mainly used for column. Indian standard junior channel (ISJC),
ISLC Indian standard light channel (ISLC) Indian standard medium weight channel ISMC,
different types of channel section are available in code. Here, ISMC 400 means the overall
depth D will be 400. Once depth is known, other properties can be found out from SP-6.
The width of the flange is termed as bf and the thickness of the flange T or t f is defined at a
distance (B-t)/4, tw is the thickness of web, R1 and R2 are the radius of curvature. Then Cxx, Cyy
10
, flange slop, α are also given in SP-6. In the code, ZZ is written in place of XX, so I xx is
represented by Izz.
Angle sections are of two types, one is Indian standard equal angle and another is Indian
standard unequal angle. Equal angle means leg length of both of the legs are same, but if leg
lengths are unequal then it is unequal angle. So standard way of writing is ISA 90 × 90 × 6,
that means both of the leg length is 90, thickness of the leg is 6 mm.
11
This is another section, which is called Tee section, Indian standard normal Tee section and in
case of Tee section, the total h is the depth.
There are rolled steel bars, which is called Indian Standard Round Section (ISRO) and this is
Indian Standard Square Section (ISSQ).
12
ISRO100 means it is a round section of diameter 100, again ISSQ50 means it is a square
section of each side 50 mm. So, this is how it is designated.
Then rolled steel sheet and strips are also used, those are termed as Indian Standards steel
sheet section and Indian Standard steel strip section. 50 F 8 represent a flat of width 50 mm
and thickness of 8 mm are used.
13
Square hollow sections and hollow pipe sections are also used in design of steel members. So
in this first lecture it is shown that different Indian rolled sections are available for designing
and their geometrical properties are given in SP-6 which will be frequently used for design of
structural members.
14
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod01 lecture 02
Steel as Structural Material
Hello, today I am going to discuss the different material properties of the steel, because we are
going to use the steel as a structural material. So before going to use that, we must know what
are the behaviour of the steel. We should know the composition of the steel then how the
composition are going to vary along with the structural properties, what are the advantages of
steel and disadvantages of steel so that we can wisely use the steel as a structural material. So
these aspects will be discussed.
Steel is a to some extent ductile material. So how it behaves under stress-strain curve, means, the
stress-strain curve of steel, how the strain is going to vary with stress, those aspects will be
discussed in today’s lecture. So, before going to use the steel as a design material we will try to
understand what are the advantages and disadvantages of the steel.
So if we look into the different type of advantages, one is the better quality control. The better
quality control means, the steel is basically factory product, so its quality is maintained in a
15
better way, as compared to concrete material. So therefore, its property will be uniform and its
properties are well defined. So when we are going to design we know with confidence what are
the properties we are going to get, unlike in case of concrete, we are not very sure, what
properties we are going to achieve. There will be gap between the target strength and the design
strength, but in this case that gap is quite less.
This is the advantageous property of the steel another property is , it is lighter with respect to
other building material, it is quiet light, light in the sense the strength to weight ratio is very high.
So with less amount of space we can provide the member and that member can withstand large
amount of load with a small free space unlike in case of concrete structure. Because of this
certain advantages dead load on the structure will be less. So the space in the site will be
comparatively high compared to concrete structures.
Now another aspect we have that it is faster to erect, means unlike concrete RCC structure, this
can be erected at site very quickly, because all steel rolled sections are available. So once it is
transported to the site just we need the connections properly and then we can erect the structure
as we desire. Another thing is the reduction in construction time, so time of construction is
comparatively less which is advantage for construction purpose.
Then large column free space and thus amiable for alteration. In case of steel structures, size of
the column will be comparatively less with respect to the RCC column. So the free space will be
much more as compared to RCC construction.
Then less material handling at site, in case of RCC structure we have to handle, course
aggregate, fine aggregate, cement then water and lot of material handling has to be done and lot
of wastage also occur, lot of hazards come into picture at the site. But in case of steel structure
we will be free from those type of hazards and has less material handling , wastage will be
comparatively less.
Then less percentage of floor area occupied by structural element. the most important thing is
that, steel is ductile and hence, (it is) it can carry the lateral load in a better way and that means it
is earthquake resistant and wind resistance . If the structure become more ductile then
earthquake energy can be absorbed and without failure, it can be transferred to the ground.
16
So if the structure is ductile we can have better resistant due to seismic excitation, also it will
perform better in case of cyclone. So these are the few of the advantageous property I discussed
and similarly, we need to know the disadvantages of steel material, because unless we know the
disadvantages we cannot make use confidently.
So one disadvantage is the skilled labor is required. Unlike RCC structure here skilled labor is
required for connections, because connections has to be made properly and that connections may
be weld connection or bolt connection or may be rivet connection, with a higher degree of
accuracy. So that the load is transferred from beam to column, column to foundation and also
from secondary beam to beam, from floor to beam etc.
Another thing is higher cost of construction; actually material cost of steel is quite high as
compared to concrete. So construction cost will be quite high as compared to concrete. So we
have to make use of steel wisely, if it is not required exhaustively then we should not go for steel
construction, otherwise cost will increase. So this is another disadvantage, because it is high cost.
Then another thing is maintenance cost is quite high. After construction due to humidity and
other problem, it get corroded, so because of corrosion steel strength get reduced. So time to time
frequently we need to make painting, we need to make maintenance. so unlike concrete structure
here maintenance cost will be disadvantageous .
17
Next is poor fire proofing. At 1000 degree Fahrenheit that means 538 degree centigrade, almost
65 percent strength remains. So 35 percent strength vanishes. Similarly, at 1600 degree
Fahrenheit 15 percent strength only remains that means 85 percent strength got reduced. So
therefore it is less fireproofing so we have to be cautious about the fire safety while using the
steel as a structural material.
Then another problem is that electricity, which may may be required if we construct in a remote
area. Where electricity is a problem , we may not be able to go for welded connection properly.
So sometimes we need electric connection, which may not be available at the site, so in that case
we have to face problem. So, these are the few disadvantages of the steel using as a structural
material.
Now coming to chemical composition of the steel, basically steel is an alloy which mainly
contains iron and carbon, apart from the carbon a small percentage of manganese, silicon,
phosphorus, nickel and copper are also added to modify the specific properties of steel. Here, in
IS 2062-1992 and IS 8500 the chemical composition of structural steel have been given. So some
of the chemical composition of different structural grade of steel has been reported in this table
like Fe410 of grade A,B,C the percentage of carbon has been shown. So different percentage of
carbon, manganese then sulpher, phosphorus, silicon and carbon equivalent has been given in it.
18
So with the different ratios of this chemical component we can achieve a particular grade of steel
that means a particular strength can be achieved.
Here,
Carbon Equivalent = (C+Mn)/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15
So, this summation is called carbon equivalent, which is given here, right and the terms in
bracket denote the maximum limit of the flat products So if we want to produce a particular
grade of steel then composition that can be found from this table.
19
Now coming to types of structural steel we can see that one is carbon steel , basically different
steel have been produced based on necessity by changing chemical composition and
manufacturing process. So in case of carbon steel carbon and manganese are used as extra
element and another type of steel is high strength carbon steel. By increasing the carbon content
this type of steel can be manufactured, which basically produces steel with comparatively higher
strength, but less ductility. So for this type of steel you will get high strength, but less ductility.
This is high strength carbon steel, another steel is stainless steel, in this type of steel mainly
foreign materials like nickel and chromium are used along with small percentage of carbon.
20
Now being a structural engineer, we will try to see what is the properties of structural steel.
Being structural engineer or a steel designer, we will be focusing on ultimate strength, yield
strength and the ductility. These three things are very important. These are very important for
using the steel and also weldability, toughness; corrosion resistance and machinability are also
some of the mechanical properties and in this last four properties are important for durability of
material and often associate with fabrication of steel members. So for durability consideration,
this last four properties are very important we have to keep in mind and mechanical properties of
the steel largely depends on this five things, one is the chemical composition.
So we have to know what is a percentage of carbon and other different elements. So depending
on that the mechanical properties of the steel will vary. Then how the treatment is going to be
made for producing steel, then stress history, rolling methods and rolling thickness are important.
So these are the few things, few parameters which we have to keep in mind for getting the
structural properties of the steel, because these structural properties of steel largely depends on
this.
21
Now the structural steel whatever we use, should conform the IS 2062-2011 which is hot rolled
medium and high tensile structural steel. So it should conform to this code and we use mostly the
Fe 410 grade of steel. Few physical properties of structural steel are given in IS 800-2007 in
clause 2 .2 .41, because these properties also will be required like unit mass of steel (ρ) is 7850
kg per meter cube. This is required, because when we are going find out the self-weight of the
structure, self-weight of the steel structure, then we need unit mass of steel.
Next is the modulus of elasticity, this is also important to find out the stiffness of the steel
member and this we consider as 2.0 × 105 N/mm2. Poisons ration also is important, which we
consider in general 0.3 and modulus of rigidity G , G we considered as = 0.769 × 105 N/mm2.
Co-efficient of thermal expansion for heat related problem, we have to consider this thermal
expansion that is alpha is equal to 12 × 10-6 /°c. because steel can expand or contract and because
of this stress may develop so that thermal stress whatever is going to be developed that has to be
calculated and that additional forces has to be calculated while analyzing their structure. So in
that case thermal expansion coefficient is important.
22
Now coming to mechanical properties as I told, the three things are very important that is one is
yield stress, what is the yield stress of the steel? What is the ultimate stress and the minimum
percentage elongation? o these we can find out, in table 1 of IS 800-2007 mechanical properties
of structural steel like, we use Fe 410 grade of steel. So, in that case, the yield stress is 250 and
ultimate stress is 410 in MPa and elongation percentage is 23.
Another yield stress is given for thickness from 20 mm to 40 mm, we can achieve 250 if
thickness is less than 20 mm, but if t is 20 to 40 then 240 and if thickness is more than 40 mm
then the yield stress is going to be considered as 230 MPa. So for Fe 410 grade of steel what we
use we use yield stress either 250, 240 or 230 and ultimate stress as 410 and elongation
percentage as 23. Similarly, Fe 440 grade of steel we can find out yield stress as 300 and ultimate
tensile stress as 440 and elongation is 22.
So in this way we can find out the important properties like yield stress, ultimate stress and
percentage elongation from the grade of steel, if a particular grade of steel is given then we can
find out what is the yield stress, ultimate tensile stress and grade of steel, right. Now coming to
ductility, a very important parameter in case of steel design is ductility.
23
So, I will discuss little more about ductility. Ductility is basically the ability to deform under
tensile force and it undergoes large inelastic. Inelastic deformation means permanent
deformation without loss of strength under the application. So if we see the stress-strain diagram
of the material if this is strain and this is stress then this portion is basically the ductility portion
where stress is not developing as such, but the strain is going to be increase. If we release the
load, it will be coming to its earlier position, of course not in same path, because it is inelastic,
but it will come to its earlier position with deformation. If the material is ductile that means it
will be much more seismic resistance. Therefore, we prefer ductile material so that deformations
are allowed without failure.
Then another property we also come across which is called hardness. Hardness is one of the
mechanical properties of steel by virtue of which, it offers resistance to the indentation and
scratching. So hardness can be measured by different test (the) like rock well test, rock well
hardness test. Another test we make which is called Vickers hardness test and then another test
through which the hardness is measured is called Brinell hardness test. So through this one can
test the hardness of the material and another property also we come across is called toughness.
24
(Refer Slide Time 21:56)
So I am discussing some property, mechanical properties and other properties of steel, which is
important to know for designing the structure and when we are going to design a member we
must know what is a behavior of the member under load. Say for example, if we make stress-
strain diagram of a material, say stress and strain, so brittle material means it will be like this and
suddenly it will fail brittle material and ductile material means it will not fail, it will undergoes
strain. So, this is ductile material.
Now toughness is the ability to absorb energy up to fracture. This toughness is measured by the
area under the stress-strain curve. So stress-strain curve of this material and stress-strain curve of
this material, the area we can find out and we can measure the toughness. It is a one type of
mechanical property of steel. So basically it offers resistance to fracture under the action of the
impact load. So this is one property another is fatigue. Fatigue means the repeated loading. It
means damage is caused due to repeated loading, repeated fluctuation of stresses and which leads
to progress of cracking of the structural element and due to cyclic loading damage and failure of
the material may happen which is called fatigue.
In addition, another is resistance against corrosion. In presence of moisture, corrosion of steel

happens. So to avoid that what we can do? We can go for painting or metallic coating. So either
of these two can be made to take care the corrosion. So this is one property which we have to
keep in mind and then another property is residual stress.
25
Residual stress come into picture, because of uneven heating and cooling, because of uneven
heating and cooling the residual stress is in the member develop. So how the material has been
produced depending on that the residual stress can be calculated, accordingly the design of the
member can be done. Then another is stress concentration when certain changes of geometry
properties are there, say stress concentration. It is basically a highly localized state of stress
where at particular location stress is concentrated and, because abrupt change of the shape. So,
sudden change at the vicinity of notch can make the development of stress concentration and also
during near the hole the stress also generated several times greater than the actual stress. And for
that we have to take care that means when we are going to design there may be chances of failure
at certain localized point, because of concentration of stress. So we have to make the section in
such a way there stress concentration can be avoided.
26
Now we will come to the stress-strain curve. So stress-strain curve of the mild steel we will see
first, say this is strain which is called epsilon and this is stress, which is called sigma, right. Now
in case of mild steel an ideal curve is looks like this, right. So this is the origin from where stress-
strain curve develops. So and this is point A, up to point A that means from O to point A is called
limit of proportionality. This portion is called limit of proportionality that means up to this, it is
linear and it obeys the hooks law.
So OA is basically called the limit of proportionality then from A to B, actually after reaching
point A, change in strain is rapid compared to that of stress, but still the material behaves
elastically up to elastic limit of B. So, point B is elastic limit then point C . Point C is the
upper yield point means if we go on increasing the force then we will observe that yield point
means it reaches upper yield point. So after upper yield point again, it will come down to C. So,
C is the lower yield point, right. This observation of C and C point depends on the rate of
loading it means depending on the rate of loading we can observe the point C and C .
Then CD part, so beyond yield point, the material start flowing plastically without any
significant increase in the stress and material goes large deformation. So CD part is basically
plastic part. So it means it flow like plastic and without any increase of the stress, the strain
increases then up to point E, DE means after reaching point D strain hardening occurs in the
27
material, the requirement of higher load to continue the deformation. This phenomenon is call
strain hardening that means it resist deformation and needs more load to deform.
So after CD means where load was not increasing, but after that point, it is starts resisting
deformation. So strain hardening occurs, so with the increase of stress, strain also is going to
increase up to certain level, which is highest point E and E this E represents the f u the ultimate
stress, right and after that the stress is going to be reduced and at a certain point it breaks. So F is
a breaking stress, right F is the breaking stress, so this is how the material behaves.
So when we are going to design a steel member we have to know what is a properties of steel
under load that means stress-strain diagram how it varies, in case of mild steel, it varies in a way.
In case of tor steel it varies another way, so we have to know and accordingly we have to find out
what is the fu value and what is fy value and what will be the strain at f u and strain at fy. That
means how much ductile this material is, depending on that we can think of designing the
member properly.
So when we go to the design a steel member under certain procedure like working stress method
or limit state method or ultimate stress strain design method we have to know the stress-strain
diagram, stress-strain behavior of the material so that we can understand that up to what level we
are going to allow the deformation and then how we are going to find out the maximum
allowable stress and then according to that design criteria will be decided. So this is all about the
todays lecture about the steel as a structural material, thank you.
28
Professor Damodar Maity
Lecture 03
Module 1
Limit State Design
In today’s lecture, I am going to discuss about the design philosophy of the steel members
and in this course as I have told that we will be designing the members using limit state
method. So the design philosophy of the limit state method will be discussed in today’s
lecture.
Now different type of Design Philosophy has been followed in last few decades. Earlier one
is called Working Stress Method, this Working Stress Method was used till 2007 in our
country.
Another Design Philosophy we come across the globe is Ultimate Strength Method. Another
design Philosophy which we will be considering in our course is Limit State Design Method.
Limit State method means Limit State of Strength and Limit State of Serviceability. So why
we are not going for Working Stress Method or Ultimate Strength Method and why we are
going for this will also be discussed in today’s lecture little bit and what are the philosophy of
limit state method that also I will discuss in next few slides.
29
First let us discuss about the Working Stress Method as I told that Working Stress Method
was used till 2007 in our country and the guidelines are given in IS 800-1984. Basically in
working stress method we consider permissible stress that we divide with some factor of
safety to get the allowable stress.
So, if we see stress strain diagram in case of steel we consider the structure to withstand load
up to yield strength (fy), that means the characteristic strength of the member. So up to Yield
strength we consider and then we divide it with some factor of safety and then we get the
Permissible stress.
30
If you see here I have written that Permissible stress is should be less than yield stress by
some factor of safety. So here, we assume the material to behave in linear elastic manner and
stress-strain diagram stress-strain behavior is also considered linear. That means we are not
considering beyond the yield stress though the member can take certain load after reaching
the yield stress.
The factor of safety in different case has been reported in IS 800-1984 the earlier code
Types of stress Notation Permissible stress (Mpa) Factor of safety
Axial tension σat 0.6fy 1.67
Axial compression σac 0.6fy 1.67
Bending tension σbt 0.66fy 1.515
Bending compression σbc 0.66fy 1.515
Average shear stress τva 0.4fy 2.5
Bearing stress σp 0.75fy 1.33
So, this is how the working stress method was used earlier but in this case there are certain
disadvantages or certain drawbacks were there. We do not consider load factor that means we
design based on service load but from the probabilistic point of view, we have to consider
that sometimes it may exceed that load we are considering
Therefore, in that case the structure may fail, so we cannot rely on this Working Stress
Method always. Another thing is that sometimes this Working Stress Method become very
conservative because we are taking upto the linear behavior of the stress-strain diagram, that
means we are considering up to the yield stress, but after yield stress the member can take
certain amount of load with certain deformation. Therefore, the nonlinear part, the inelastic
part we are not going to consider which is not correct. Therefore, if we consider that in our
design, then the construction cost or the size design member will become less and it will be
economic. And also we have to understand that the member we will design in such a way that
it should not be conservative, it should be economic and of course 100 percent safety has to
be considered. We will not compromise with any safety but at the same time we would try to
make it economic. So that is possible if we go Limit State Method what I am coming later.
31
Than another method which we considered earlier was Ultimate Strength Method. It is
basically a plastic design method, in this case the Limit State is attained when the members
reach plastic moment. That means in this case we go up to say fu, so up to this we consider
and then we design and of course, we also multiply some load factor factor with the working
load to get the Ultimate Load.
In this method, we do not consider the serviceability condition that means whether the
occupant feel discomfort or not, whether excessive deflection is coming or not that we do not
bother. So from the users point of view it is not advisable, so this method also became
nowadays obsolete.
Nowadays we prefer Limit State Method the structure is designed in such a way that it can
safely withstand all kind of loads that may act under consideration in its entire design life. So
that we have to consider the science of reliability based design with the objective of
providing a rational solution to the problem of adequate safety, that means we are not
compromising with the safety and uncertainty is reflected in loading and material strength. So
what we do here, we consider up to ultimate strength and we make use of some factor of
safety to get the permissible strength or the member.
So here we use some sort of factor of safety to ensure the uncertainty factor also we use the
load factor as we are not sure that what will be the actual load in the site. We try to find out
the maximum means worst possible combination and we multiply with some factor which
was obtained from reliability based method and then we try to design with that factored load
32
this is Limit State Method but this is Limit State of strength another is Limit State of
Serviceability that also we have to consider.
So in case of Limit State of Strength we have to consider the stability with Stability against
Overturning and Sway Stability that we have to keep in mind also we have to keep in mind
the Fatigue and Plastic Collapse. Therefore, Limit State of Strength depends on this few
aspects.
So in IS 800: 2007 the Limit State of Strength includes this few things which we have to keep
in mind like Loss of equilibrium of the structure as a whole or in part, loss of stability of the
33
structure, then failure due to excess deformation or rupture, fracture due to fatigue and brittle
fracture. So, these are associated with the failure which we have to keep in mind and we have
to design under the worst possible combination.
So as I told that one is Limit State of Strength, another is Limit State Serviceability. So Limit
State of Serviceability when we check Deflection limit, then Vibration limit, Durability
consideration and also Fire resistance. So these are few aspects from Limit State
Serviceability point of view, so we have to take care we have to keep in mind this limit and
we have to design the structural member keeping all these limits in our mind.
34
So Limit State of Serviceability will be associated with the discomfort faced by the user
while using the structure that is one is excess deflection or deformation of the structure.
Because suppose in structure we are residing in a tall building towards the top floor then due
to vibration means due to cyclone or due to earthquake the building may vibrate considerably.
but we know from Limit State of Strength we know that design has been done in such a way
it will not collapse but if you do not consider the Limit State of Serviceability then we are
allowing large deflection, so if deflection is more than the occupant will be afraid of staying
there because of this large vibration.
So in such case we have to consider the occupants discomfort ability and we have to take
certain measure so that vibration can be reduced, excessive deflection or deformation of the
structure can be reduced. So this has to be taken care.
Then excessive vibration of the structure causing discomfort to the commuters, repairable
damage or crack generated due to fatigue that also we have to keep in mind that we should
take care of damage or crack and of course corrosion and durability that also we have to keep
in mind. So these are the some parameters which are associated with the Limit State
Serviceability.
Now coming to Partial Safety Factor, so in case of Limit State of Strength we know that
certain safety factor have to be considered, one is Safety Factor for Load, this is given in
clause 5.3.3, table 4 of IS 800: 2007.
35
Where, Qck is the characteristic load or load effect and Qd the design load or load effect and
gamma is partial safety factor for k-th load or load effect. So this f is going to vary from time
to time depending on the type of loading, right.
So in table 4 of IS 800: 2007 this partial safety factors are given.
36
Next is what will be the partial safety factor, suppose if we have dead load, live load and
crane load combination what we can do, for dead load we can multiply 1.5 and for live load
we can multiply 1.5. So this will become as this one load combination will be 1.5 into dead
load plus live load. Another load combination we can make that is that dead load plus live
load plus wind load or earthquake load there we are making multiplication of 1.2, so there we
can make like this 1.2 into dead load plus live load plus wind load or earthquake load, either
wind load or earthquake load we are providing, so this is one sort of load combination.
Another load combination is say 1.5 times dead load plus wind load or earthquake load. So
these are different types of load combinations are reported in the code which we have to
consider and we have to find out the worst combination that means which one will be worst
and we have to design the member from that worst combination. In addition, we can see that
for Limit State of Serviceability under dead load and live load we can multiply just unity 1
but when we are going to consider Limit State of Service under dead load live load and wind
load or earthquake load, we will multiply 0.8. That means for that serviceability load
condition we can consider that dead load plus 0.8 live load plus 0.8 earthquake load or wind
load. here it is 1.0, so this is one combination against which we have to check the deflection.
So several load combinations will come into picture one is due to strength point of view,
another is due to serviceability point of view we have to consider. So for each case we will
consider and we will see whether it is exceeding the limiting value or not, limiting value may
be strength, stress, limiting value may be deflection. And when we are going to check the
deflection criteria, we will multiply either 1 or 0.8 as per the codal provisions given and in
case of strength calculation we will multiply either 1.5 or 1.2 as per the type of loading, right.
37
Where, = Partial safety factor for material as given in Table 5.
= Ultimate strength of the material, = Design strength of the material.
So if you see the table 5, we can see the different Partial Safety Factor has been considered
for different type of material condition, like in case of yielding resistance governed by
38
yielding so gamma m0 is one safety factor which is considered as 1.10, whereas resistance of
member to buckling that also as 1.10 that also gamma m0 and resistance governed by
ultimate stress that we are making 1.25 partial safety factor that means we are dividing the
partial safety factor with the ultimate strength to get the design strength.
And for connection for bolt, friction type bolt gamma mf we use 1.25 for shop fabrication
also 1.25 for field fabrication, whereas for bearing type also this is 1.25, 1.25, in case of rivet
also we provide 1.25 and in case of weld we provide in shop fabrication 1.25 and for field
fabrication we increase that the factor of safety upto 1.5, so this is how the factor safety has
been decided and reported in the code which we have to consider and we have to divide with
these factor of safety with the ultimate strength of the material to get the design strength of
the material.
39
Another is the serviceability criteria, for serviceability criteria deflection limits has been
defined in, table 6 of IS 800: 2007. Different limits have been provided, say for in case of
industrial building, I am just showing few of them one is vertical deflection another is lateral
deflection, and again design load will be due to live load/wind load, due to live load only. So
different type of design load will be considered and =different type of members have different
limiting condition. Therefore, for different type of supporting condition and different type of
members the limiting deflection has been given in the table 6.
So this is the continuation of the table 6 for other buildings, one is industrial building and
another one is other buildings we have given.
40
Now another thing is the Cross Sectional Classification, this is given in clause 3.7 of table 2.
one is class 1 which is plastic, class 2 classification is compact and class 3 semi-compact, we
know in IS code different type of steel rolled sections are given.
So say for I section we have ISMB, we have ISJB, we have ISLB, ISHB, ISWB like this we
have different type of I sections. Now for different type of I sections, this d the depth of the
web and tw thickness of web, d by tw, which is different. Similarly, this flange width and
flange thickness this is different, so its ratio is also different B by t f, d by tw. So we have to
see what is the ratio and different type of structures has been classified according to the cross
section as plastic, compact or semi-compact.
41
So for a particular type of member, we have to decide means particular type of cross section
we have to decide means we have to see whether this cross section is under plastic, semi-
compact or compact and accordingly design criteria will be followed. So these things we
have to keep in mind.
Then coming to Load and Load Combinations, load is important because under the particular
load we have to design the member and that load may be dead load means due to self-weight,
may be live load, may be wind load or systemic load or may be other type of load like
accidental load or snow load, hydrostatic load, different type of loads are there. So then we
have to know what are the codal provisions, how to calculate the load on a particular member.
Then we have to go for the load combination with certain factor of safety that we have seen.
So here if we see, the different type of loads are given in IS:875 in part 1 to part 5, IS:875
part 1 to part 5, various load and load combinations have been given and now in part 1 the
dead loads of the structures have been given. Mass density of different kind of material like
brick, plaster, concrete are given in detail in IS:875 part 1.
So the dead load calculation or the self-weight of the structure if we want to calculate, then
we have to go through the IS:875 part 1 and then we have to see what is the total dead load or
self-weight coming into this structure.
Next is the live load or imposed load. Live load or imposed load is given in IS:875 part 2, in
part 2 different type of live loads are given like in case of residential building what will be the
42
live load, in case of industrial building what will be the live load, in case of office building
what will be the live load that has been specified. Again in case of residential building in
balcony, in kitchen, in bedroom what will be the live load, the different live loads are
specified, so that has to be taken care from that code.
Another is the crane load crane load also can be found from this part 2, then coming to wind
load wind load is given in IS:875 (Part-3), so wind load I will be coming details after this
slide. Then snow load in the area, where snow is a factor there we have to consider the snow
load and that has been given in part-4, and in part-5 the temperature load, hydrostatic load,
soil pressure, fatigue, accidental impact, explosions etc and different type of load
combinations are given in part-5. So part-5 consist of temperature load, hydrostatic load, soil
pressure, fatigue, accidental load, impact, explosions etc and different type of load
combinations means dead load plus live load, dead load plus wind load, dead load plus live
load plus wind load, like this different load combinations are recommended in part-5.
And earthquake load you can find out in IS:1893-2002, in case of earthquake load we know
in our country we had 5 zones, now we have 4 number of zones, zone 1 and zone 2 is clubbed
to zone 2, so zone 2, zone 3, zone 4 and zone 5 and zone 5 is the most systematically active
zone. So for different zone what is the systemic coefficient for calculating the load that has
been given in the code in IS:1893-2002, so detail calculation of load due to earthquake can be
found in this code and according to that we have to calculate the load coming to the particular
structure and then we have to apply that load to the structure to design the structural member.
Then erection load is given in IS: 800-2007 in Clause 3.3, the details are there and also other
secondary effects such as temperature change, differential settlement, eccentric connections
those things also has to be taken care in the load and load combinations because due to
differential settlement and temperature, extra load will come into picture, so that has to be
also taken care in the design calculation.
43
Now in clause 5.3.1 if we see the structural system has been classified in three groups, one is
the permanent action, permanent action means the load which are permanent in nature these
are basically self-weight of the structure which we call generally dead load, so these are
permanent action. Another is variable action, variable action is basically imposed load and
wind or earthquake load are not permanent these are temporary and variable so these are
under variable actions. Another is accidental actions, action due to accidental load like
explosion or due to sudden impact such type of accidental actions happen, so that has to also
be taken care.
And we have told that while designing the steel structure the load combination have to be
considered with partial safety factor. Partial safety factor I have already discussed that is dead
load plus imposed load, here we will multiply with 1.5 and dead load plus imposed load plus
wind or seismic load that is 1.2, we will multiply dead load plus wind load here also we
multiply 1.5, like this dead load plus erection load, so these are some load combinations
which we have to take into consideration for the design of the member.
44
Now very briefly I will go through the wind load calculation because in case of steel structure
wind load is a factor for designing the steel members because the steel structures are light in
weight so it is vulnerable to cyclone and wind. Therefore we need to calculate what are the
wind load coming in to the steel structures and accordingly we have to find out the design
criteria means we have to find out the load coming on a particular member and then
accordingly we have to design, not only we will design we will check the limiting deflection
because serviceability criteria has to be also maintained.
So what is the deflection coming due to wind because steel are ductile in nature so lot of
deflection will come in comparison to concrete structure therefore we have to check the
serviceability criteria as well, right. So thinking that I am going to give a brief review on the
wind calculation and I told that wind calculation is given in the code IS 875 (Part 3). You will
get the detail of wind calculation and here the design wind speed Vz (m/s) is calculated
where Vb is a basic wind speed and these basic wind speed are divided in our country in six
zone, ok in six different zone it has been given like in zone one the basic wind is 55 meter per
second this is the highest speed, then in zone two it is 50, zone three it is 47, zone four 44,
zone five 39 and zone six is 33 m/s
In IS 875, figure 1, the basic wind speed for different zone has been given also at the end of
the IS code in a tabular form it is given for different city what will be the basic wind speed.
45
Next is the probability factor k1, k2, k3, k1 is the probability factor or risk coefficient this is
given in table 1, I am not going into details if you look through the code you will be able to
understand all the details have been given. Then, k2 depends on the terrain, height and
structure size, so that factor is given as k2 and in table 2 that is given, you will see that
according to height the k2 factor is going to increase like this it is going to increase that
means the wind speed will go on increasing with the increase of height. Another is k 3, k3 is
the topography factor means in what type of topography structure is going to be constructed
whether it is valley or anything else or plain land depending on that what is the slope
depending on that the k3 factor will be calculated these details you can find out in Clause
5.3.3.
Now Wind Pressure, Wind Pressure we can find out from this formula
The wind pressure at any height of a structure depends on following.
 Velocity and density of the air

 Height above ground level
 Shape and aspect ratio of the building
 Topography of the surrounding ground surface
 Angle of wind attack
 Solidity ratio or openings in the structure
46
Once we get the design wind pressure we can find out the wind force
Where,Cf =Force coefficient of the building

Ae =Effective frontal area
pz =design wind pressure
Another thing is we have to consider that wind force on roof and walls as an individual
means if there is a roof suppose we have a building like this and it has a roof so there we can
47
find out what is the wind pressure is coming from externally and what is the internal wind
pressure is coming depending on that we have to find out the force and this force can be
calculated from this formula
[cl. 6.2.1 of IS 875 part-3]
Where, Cpe =External pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.2 of IS 875 part-3)
Cpi=Internal pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.3 of IS 875 part-3)
A = Surface area of structural element
So if we can find out this value the coefficient external pressure coefficient and internal
pressure coefficient and the surface area then we can find out the wind force on roof or wall
as an individual, right so this is how we can calculate the wind force.
So this is all about today’s lecture and we have seen in todays lecture that why Limit State
Method is important and why it is more accurate, more practical compared to other two
methods that is Ultimate Strength Method and Working Stress Method. Why we have moved
to Limit State Method that is understandable now and tomorrow onwards when we will be
going for design of members or connections, individual members or connections will follow
this criteria that means Limit State Method design criteria, where the load factor and the
partial safety factor for the material will be considered and what will be the load combination
for which we have to design that will be considered and we have seen the what is the ultimate
strength of the member, what is the yield strength of the member for the steel that according
to the different weight we can find out and we can make use of those parameters for design of
the elemental means element or member,.So with this I will have to conclude todays lecture,
thank you.
48
Lecture 04
Module 1
1. Introduction to Connections
1.1 Overview:
This lecture focused on the connections, which are essential to assemble the steel
sections/members to build a complete structure. Various connections are available for joining
members in case of RCC structure. Generally, we used to connect RCC members by casting
them in-situ. But in case of steel members different type of steel roll sections are available in
the market. The steel roll sections are need to join together and that can be done by applying
various types of connections, like rivet connections, bolt connections, weld connections and
combination of those two or three.
Generally, connection between two members are required at the following joints: beam and
column, main beam and secondary beam, column and column, column and brackets, column
and caps, Purlins and rafters, wind braces and columns, rail and columns. In case of truss
structure, truss members are connected through gussets that means when different members
are connected at a particular point then that can be connected through gussets member. So
when more than two members are joining at a point we need connections.
49
Further stiffeners in plate girders, diaphragms in plate girders, flange and web connections in
plate girders, stiffener plates in column joints are also used for connecting different type of
members. Methods of fabrication are basically three types: rivet joints, bolt joints and weld
joints. Also we can make combine of two or three of the above means in a particular joint we
can make use of rivet and bolt, bolt or weld, or bolt and rivet connection. So requirement
wise we have to choose an appropriate connection.
Now let us come to the requirement of good connection. What is good connection? Basically
good connection mean it should be such that it can easily be installed, inspected and
maintained, it should be such that there is the least possible weakening of the parts to be
50
joined and it should be rigid enough to avoid fluctuating stresses which may cause fatigue
failure.
1.2 Rivet connection:
Fig. 1 Rivet Connection

Now coming to rivet connections we know rivets are inserted in the plates to join together.
With different plates and by adding heat we can insert the. A typical rivet joint is shown in
Fig. 1, where different members are connected to plate by riveting and in the parts of rivet,
the upper part is called head and the lower cylindrical part is called shank. Shank has
particular length depending on the thickness of the plates, so it can vary accordingly.
Different type of heads is available and according to that different name of the defects are
given. Now this rivet head has a particular diameter which is called rivet head diameter and
the diameter of shank is called nominal diameter or rivet diameter or shank diameter.
Depending on the size of nominal diameter the strength of rivet can be calculated on the basis
of the type of material used and accordingly we can calculate the rivet strength.

Advantages of Riveted connections:
i. Ease of riveting process.
ii. Rivet connection is permanent in nature
51
iii. Cheaper fabrication cost.
iv. Low maintenance cost.
v. Dissimilar metals can also be joined; even non-metallic joints are possible with
riveted joints.
vi. Rivet connection is possible without electricity in remote area
In case of welded connection, we need electricity otherwise it will be difficult to join the
members but in case of rivet connections, only through application of heat we can joined.

Disadvantages of Rivet Connection:
i. Necessity of pre-heating the rivets prior to driving
ii. Create high level of noise at the site of construction
iii. Skilled work necessary for inspection of connection
iv. Cost involved in careful inspection and removal of poorly installed rivets
v. High labor cost
So because of certain disadvantages nowadays riveting connections are becoming absolute,
mainly because of noise and because of generation of heat and difficulty to change the
improper insertion of the rivet.
There are two types of rivets: power driven rivet and hand driven rivet. Power driven rivet is
called hot rivet and hand driven rivet is called cold rivet. Again in power driven rivet we have
52
two types, one is called power driven shop rivet and another is called power driven field rivet.
Similarly, for hand driven rivets, there are two types, hand driven shop rivet and hand driven
field rivets.

Now commonly used rivets are like snap head where the head dimensions are represented by
the shank diameter. If diameter of shank is d then we can consider that the diameter of rivet
head is 1.6d and the height of the rivet head is 0.7d. So with different height and diameter
different types of rivet heads are available. Two types of rivet are generally used as shown in
fig. 2.
Fig. 2 Commonly used rivet head
In case of flat head, the head diameter is 2d and head height is 0.25d and where d is the
nominal diameter of the rivet. The length of the shank is called rivet length. In this case we
should remember that there is two type of diameter, one is rivet diameter (nominal diameter)
another is hole diameter (gross diameter). Gross diameter is little higher than the rivet
diameter, and it is sometimes 1.5 or 2 mm more than the nominal diameter.

Now while designing the rivet joints we have certain assumptions we have to make, which
are as follows:
i. Friction between the plates is neglected.
53
ii. The shear stress is uniform on the cross section of the rivet.
iii. The distribution of direct stress on the portion of the plates between the rivet holes is
uniform.
iv. Rivets in group subjected to direct loads share the load equally.
v. Bending stress in the rivet is neglected.
vi. Rivets fill completely the holes in which they are driven
vii. Bearing stress distribution is uniform and contact area is d × t, where d is the nonal
diameter and t is the thickness of the plate.
As rivet connection is becoming absolute nowadays therefore in new code in IS:800-2007

details of rivet design is not given in Limit State Method however in case of bolt and weld
connection it has been described explicitly.
1.3 Bolt connection:
The design of bolt connection is generally done followed by IS 800-2007, where different
types of failure of bolt connections is consider and design accordingly. In clause 2.4 of IS:
800-2007 it says that bolts, nuts and washers shall conform as appropriate to the following
codes: IS 1363-1967, IS 1364-1967, IS 1367-1967, IS 3640-1967, IS 3757-1972, IS 6623-
1972 and IS 6639-1972. In those codes the bolt properties like their dimension, different
types, strength are given.
54
(a) (b)
Fig. 3 A typical bolt connection and bolt
In fig 3a it is shown that different members are connected at a particular point using bolt
connection. Now If we come to the parts of bolts we can see bolt has a head, shank, runout,
thread and nut as shown in fig 3b. Nuts are generally tightened over the plate to connect
different plates at a particular point. The thread length, grip length, nominal length of the bolt
is also illustrated in fig. 3b.
So bolt has different parts like head, nut, shank, thread, thread length, grip length and
nominal length which will be required for our design. When we will be going for design of
different type of bolts we will see these parameters are required, these different dimension
like what is the nominal diameter of bolt, what is the gross diameter or hole diameter of bolt,
what is the type of head whether it is hexagonal or square, like this we will come across.
55
Now before going to use bolts we should know the advantages and disadvantages of bolts. As
I discussed earlier, there are three types of joints: bolt joint, rivet joint and weld joint, where
every joint has certain advantages and disadvantages. So we have to look what are the
advantages and disadvantages for a particular case where we are going to joining certain
member. Based on the type of connection design and the advantages and disadvantages, we
choose an appropriate connection.
Advantages of bolt connection:
i. Less manpower unlike rivet connection
ii. High strength bolts are much stronger than rivet. Hence, bolted connections need less
fasteners than rivet joints mean less holes in the plate resulting stronger connection.
iii. Bolting operation is much faster
iv. Bolting operation is very silent in contrast to hammering noise in riveting
v. Bolting is a cold process; no risk of fire
vi. Bolt can be removed, replaced or retightened easily in the event of faulty bolting or
damaged bolts due to accidents/hazards
56
Disadvantages of bolt connection:
i. Bolted connections have lesser strength in axial tension as the net area at the root of
the threads is less
ii. Under vibratory loads, the strength is reduced if the connections get loosened
iii. Unfinished bolts have lesser strength because of non-uniform diameter
iv. Architectural look
There are different types of bolts are available and these types are classified in different way.
According to material and strength we can classify this as ordinary structural bolt and high
strength steel bolt. But according to type of shank we can make three types of bolt:
unfinished or black bolt, turned bolt and high strength friction grip bolt (HSFG). This is very
important that high strength friction grip bolt is generally use in case of high load and if we
need less number of hole, less number of bolt then we have to go for HSFG bolt. According
to pitch and fit of thread three types of bolt can be categorized: standard pitch bolt, fine pitch
bolt and coarse pitch bolt. Then according to shape of head and nut we can make as square
bolt or hexagonal bolt. Square bolt means if the head of the bolt is square and hexagonal bolt
means if the head is hexagonal.
57
This is a typical example of hexagonal bolt. If we see here we will see that it has six number
of sides in this case.
Now we need to know some certain terminology before going to use design procedure of bolt
connections, like in case of rivet and bolt some terms are used like pitch distance, gauge
distance, edge distance, end distance, bolt hole, gross diameter, nominal diameter.
Two plates can be connected either by bolt or rivet connection. Now according to bolt
position there are various types of bolt connection, like regular bolting, zigzag bolting or
plane bolting or chain bolting, diamond bolting etc.
58
Fig 4. A typical bolt connection with regular bolting
The overlapping portion of the two plates as shown in the fig. 4, is called lap distance. Now
as you can see in fig. 4 that pitch is the center to center distance of adjacent bolt measure in
the direction of stress means the force direction. Similarly, the perpendicular to the direction
of stress, the center to center distance of adjacent bolt is called gauge distance. Parallel to the
direction of stress, the distance from the center of outermost bolt to the edge of the plate is
called end distance and perpendicular to the stress, the distance if we consider is called edge
distance.
Now the details of pitch distance and edge distance is discussed in clause 10.2.2 of IS 800-
2007 for particular connections. According to the code the minimum pitch distance is 2.5d or
2.5 times nominal diameter of the rivet or bolt. Why this minimum pitch is required because
we need sufficient space between this rivet or bolt to tightened so that it does not overlap. So
minimum pitch is required to tighten the bolts properly and to prevent the bearing failure
between two bolts if it is very closer than a bearing failure may occur, so to prevent this
bearing failure we need to specify a minimum pitch and code has specified this 2.5d.
Let us come to maximum pitch, what is maximum pitch and why that is necessary. Maximum
pitch is desirable to place bolt sufficiently close to reduce the length of connection and if we
have different members connecting at a point, we have more pitch distance than the gusset
plate will be require more. So the amount of material for gusset will be more that we do not
want, that is why we will try to make pitch distance as less as possible but not less than
59
minimum pitch. So this maximum pitch is defined in code which is written that the pitch
should be 16t or 200 mm in tension and it should be less than 12t or 200 mm in compression.
So while designing a member, say in case of a lap joint we need to provide bolts in such a
way that it follows the codal provision that means the limit of maximum pitch and minimum
pitch has to be maintained.
So minimum edge distance for rivet that is given 1.5d, where d is the nominal diameter of the
rivet, right and gross diameter as I told rivet has nominal diameter is termed as small d and
gross diameter which is the hole diameter actually in case of rivet that is termed as D and this
D will be d +1.5 for d is less than 25 mm and it will be d + 2 mm for d is greater than or equal
to 25 mm, which is given in IS 800: 1984 in the earlier code, in clause 3.6.1.1. When earlier
codes were available that means 1984 which was based on Working Stress Method at that
time the code has provided the gross diameter as nominal diameter plus 1.5 for nominal
diameter less than 25 and if it is more than 25 mm than it is d + 2, that means clearance has
been taken as 2 mm.
60
Now for bolt, in case of bolt the minimum and maximum edge distance and end distance are
given in clause 10.2.4.2 and 10.2.4.3. It is stated that the minimum edge or end distance that
should be greater than 1.7 times the hole diameter (d h) in case of sheared or hand-flame cut
edges and it should be greater than 1.5 times the hole diameter in case of rolled, machine-
flame cut, sawn and planed edges.
So for different cases the minimum edge distance is defined either 1.7 times the d h or 1.5
times dh and maximum edge distance, but it should be less than 12tε, where ε = (250/f y)1/2 and
t is thickness of the thinner part and maximum edge distance should not exceed this 12tε and
ε can be calculated from the steel property.
61
Now another term which we have already used that will come into discussion that is bolt
hole, which is required to fascinate the insertion of bolts to make the connection between
steel members and this bolt holes’ details are given in clause 10.2.1, table 19. The bolt holes
given in code depends on the diameter of the shank that means bolt diameter or nominal
diameter. If nominal diameter is 12 to 14 then standard clearance means hole will be 1 mm,
that means bolt hole is bolt diameter plus clearance of holes. You can refer to the code where
very meticulously this table has been described. Now for different cases this hole clearance
will be different, like for standard clearance it is 1 mm, for over size it is 3 mm, for short slot
it is (3 mm) 4 mm and for long slot it is 2.5 times d, where d is the diameter of the bolt.
Similarly, in case of bolt diameter from 16 to 22 this standard clearance is 2 mm, over size is
4 mm, short slot in case of that it is 6 mm and for all the cases it is 2.5d for long slot. Then
for 24 mm diameter of bolt the standard clearance is considered 2, over size is 6 and for short
slot it is 8 and for long slot 2.5d. If the diameter is greater than 24 mm then the standard
clearance is considered as 3 that means the whole diameter for standard is will be 24 + 3 that
is 27. Similarly, for over size it will be 8, for short slot it will be 10 and for long slot it will be
2.5d. So this is how the bolt hole will be calculated.
62
Lecture 05
Module 1
Introduction to Bolt Connection
In the previous lecture various aspects of different connections which includes rivet
connections, bolt connections and welded connections are discussed. As rivet connection is
becoming absolute nowadays, we have not concentrated on rivet that much. We concentrated
only on the bolt connections in details. In case of bolt connections when we are going to
design we need to know certain terminology that we have already discussed. This lecture
focused on the bolt connections in particular where the different pattern of bolt connections is
used. For different pattern of bolt connections, how the strength is going to vary, that will be
discussed.

In case of bolt connections or in case of weld connections also we have different type of
arrangements and depending upon the arrangement of bolts and plates, we designed the bolt.
Again depending upon the mode of load transmission, nature and location of load, we
designed the bolt connection.
63
Now coming to depending upon arrangement of bolts we have two type of joint we can make,
one is lap joint another is butt joint. So in case of lap joint we have seen earlier that we can
make a single bolting, chain bolting and staggered bolting. And in case of butt joint similarly
we can make single bolting, chain bolting and staggered bolting.
Fig. 1 Chain bolting

So coming to the different bolting pattern first let us come to the chain bolting. In case of lap
joint the two plates are overlapped together and are joined by different ways of connection
like bolt, rivet or welding. Now in case of chain bolting the bolt will be in same line and also
in same row and column as shown in fig. 1. The failure pattern for this type of bolting will be
discussed later.
Fig. 2 Zig-zag bolting
Now in case of zig-zag bolting, the position bolts are in a zig-zag way as shown in fig. 2. For
this type bolting the failure may occur in various direction or path. So we have to calculate
which will be the weakest section and according to that we have to calculate the lowest
strength of the connection and accordingly we will design the connection.
64
Fig. 3 Diamond bolting
In case of Diamond bolting, the number of bolts are increased towards the center as shown in
fig. 3. Similar type of failure as zig-zag bolting may occur in this case also. We generally
prefer diamond bolting because it is much more efficient.
(Refer Slide Time: 5:52) 7:44
Single bolted lap joint Triple bolted lap joint
Single bolted single cover butt joint Single bolted double cover butt joint
Double bolted double cover butt joint
Fig. 4 Different types of bolting depending upon arrangement of bolts and plates
Depending upon arrangement of bolts and plates there are various type of bolt connections as
shown in fig. 4. In single bolted lap joint and triple bolted lap joint two plates are jointed
together by one and three bolts respectively without any cover plate. But in case of single
bolted single cover butt joint single bolt per member and one cover plate is used, where in
65
single bolted double cover butt joint double cover is used. Again in double bolted double
cover joint 2 bolt per member and double cover is used.
Single shear Double shear Multiple shear
Fig. 5 Bolts with different shear

Now depending upon the mode of load transmission we can define a bolt by single shear,
double shear, or multiple shear as shown in fig. 5. When the two plates are joint together
through bolt then only one shear plane is there that is why this is called single shear and if
three plates are connected through bolt, there will be 2 shear plane, hence it is called double
shear. When the number of shear planes is more than two then it is called multiple shear.

Now depending upon nature and location of load we also can find out different type of
connections like direct shear connection, eccentric connection, pure moment connection and
moment shear connection.
Fig. 6 Direct shear connection
66
In case of direct shear connection, we can see that two plates are overlapped together and
connected through bolt as shown in fig. 6, where bolts may fail due to shear so we have
design accordingly.
e
P
Fig. 7 Eccentric connection
In fig. 7 a typical eccentric connection is shown where, beam and column are connected
through gusset plate. Now if we have a load P and eccentricity e as shown in the fig. 7 then
such type of connection exerts moment because this is an eccentric connection. So for
eccentric connection here we can see that the bolt will experience stresses due to the direct
load P the moment P×e.
Fig. 8 Pure moment connection
In pure moment connection the loading is symmetric as shown in fig. 8. So here only moment
will be developed in the connection, so this is called pure moment connection.
67
Fig. 9 Moment shear connection

In case of moment shear connection, both moment and shear are developed due to the
arrangement of the connection as shown in fig. 9.

Now we will discuss about the different type of failures because when we are going to design
a bolt, when we are going to find out the strength of a bolt, or strength of the connection as a
whole we have to find out what are the type of failure may occur and to arrange those failures
what are the mathematical equations are developed and how we will calculate the strength.
The failure of bolt connection may occur due to the failure of bolt or the failure of the plate.
 The bolted joint may fail in any of the following seven ways, out of which some
failure can be checked by adherence to the specifications of edge distance. Therefore,
they are not of much importance, whereas the others require due consideration.
68
Fig. 10 Possible modes of failure of bolted connections
As discussed earlier, there are different types of shearing failure which may occur in bolted
joint. In single shear only one shear plane is developed in the shank portion of the bolt
wherein double shear two shear plane are developed in the bolt.
69
Now we will see bearing on plate and bolt and how bearing failure happens. So if two plates
are connected with bolt then due to bearing on plate it may fail that means it may fail by
crushing as shown in the above figure. So this is one type of failure which is called bearing
failure.
Another type of failure may come in to picture also which is called shear tear-out of plane
that means this is somewhat it will look like as shown in the above figure which may fail by
crushing due to shear tear-out of plate. So such type of failure may occur when force P is in
the direction as shown in the figure.
Another failure may come which is called tension failure of plate because when two plates
are under tension and we are going to join through bolt by insertion of hole then along that
hole line tension failure of plate may happen. Suppose we have a bolt as shown in the figure,
where the two plates may tear out as shown in the figure due to failure of plate. So this is
another sort of failure, so different modes of failure of bolt joints we are observing.
70
And another failure is called block shear failure. When a plate is connected with another plate
say for example a gusset plate and a force P is acting and if bolts are inserted as shown in the
figure then the block shear failure may occur as a hole.
Now we have to remember certain things for an efficient connection using bolt that is one is
the stress concentration results in a considerable decrement in the tensile strength so we have
to try to avoid the stress concentration. Then loose fit of the joint can reduce the stiffness
which may result in excessive deflections. So that has to be taken care that means we have to
tighten the bolts properly so that the loose fit does not occur and joint does not get reduced
instantly.
71
Then vibration cause loosening of nuts which can jeopardize the safety of the structure. So
this has to be taken care while designing a joint using bolt.
And certain criteria we have to remember for designing the joint under axially loaded
members. First of all, the length of joint should be as small as possible to save material on
cover plates and gusset plates.
72
Say for example we have a gusset plate connected with truss member as shown in the above
figure. So how do we connect all the members at a particular point? This type of joining is
possible; we have to join in such way that cg of each members pass through a particular point
otherwise eccentricity may develop then the moment due to eccentricity may come into
picture. The length of joint should be as less as possible to reduce the material amount of
material that means we have to join through a gusset plate. Now if we provide more number
of bolts then we will not be able to reduce the length of joint that means we cannot reduce the
amount of material required for gusset plate, that is why we have to keep in mind that as less
as possible the length of joint should be. Another thing is that the center line of all members
meeting at a joint should coincide at one point only otherwise the joint will twist out of
position. The number of bolts should be increased gradually towards the joint for uniform
stress distribution in bolt. For this type of connection, we prefer diamond bolting where the
number of bolts increased towards the center.
73
Then the arrangement should satisfy the pitch, gauge and edge distance requirement, that
means what will be the pitch distance, what will be the gauge distance, what is the edge
distance all the things has to be satisfied. Next is the strength of joint reduces due to the bolt
holes. So the reduction in area due to bolt holes can be minimized by arranging a zig-zag
form or diamond form and the arrangement can be made in such a way that the strength can
be increased.
So in short while designing a connection using bolt we have to remember certain criteria one
is the length of the joint should be as less as possible. Now if we increase the diameter of
bolt, we should not require large number of bolts. We have to try to reduce the number of
bolts so that the number of holes become less so the tensile strength of the member becomes
high as well as because of less number of bolt the length of the joint will be less and thereby
the gusset plate require for joining plates will be less. So the amount of gusset plates can be
minimized through this.
Another thing is the members meeting at a point should be designed in such a way that cg of
all the members are coinciding at a particular point, otherwise due to eccentricity the
additional moment may generate that also has to be keep in mind. Another important thing
which have to keep in mind that whether we are satisfying the pitch and edge distance
properly because as per codal provisions we have to consider the minimum pitch and
maximum pitch. So the pitch distance whatever we will provide we have to be in between
maximum and minimum as prescribed in IS 800: 2007.
74
So with this I would like to conclude todays lecture saying once again that when we are going
to design a bolt connection we have to keep in mind what type of connections we are going to
handle and accordingly what type of load may come and whether we are going for lap joint or
butt joint, whether we are going for eccentric connections or concentric connection we have
to see and accordingly we have to calculate the external forces and then we have to find out
the bolt strength once we get bolt strength we can find out the number of bolt and we can
design accordingly with the use of codal provisions for pitch distance, edge distance and
gauge distance.
In next class we will discuss the bolt strength due to different failure means different aspects
like bearing failure, shearing failure, tearing failure what will be the bolt strength that we will
calculate as per the codal provisions, thank you very much.
75
Lecture 06
Module 2
Design of Ordinary Black Bolts
In this lecture the design procedure of bolts will be discussed. Bolt may be two types which
are commonly used, one is ordinary black bolt and another is high strength friction grip bolt.
Now at first I will discuss about the design procedure of ordinary black bolt.
As we know that the design procedure of bearing type of bolt and friction type bolt are given
in clause 10.3 and clause 10.4 of IS: 800-2007 respectively. So while we will see the design
procedure I would suggest the participants to follow the codal provisions and open the clause
10.3 while designing the ordinary black bolt. When we are going to design the ordinary black
bolt, we will see the two type of joints will come across openly, one is lap joint where the two
plates are overlapped together at a certain length and another is butt joint where two plates
are in same plane and joint with some cover may be single cover or may be double cover. So
these two types of joints will be covered in this lecture.
76
Now for designing of ordinary black bolt we will see that what are the failure criteria and
from that failure criteria what are the strength like it may fail due to shear. We know that
black bolt may fail at shear plane when two plates are connected through bolt/bolts. So while
we will go for design of that bolt first we have to find out what is the strength of the bolt in
shear then we will go for bearing strength of bolt and so on. Bolt connection may fail also
due to bearing of bolt or due to tension in the bolt or due to tension in plate or due the
combined shear and tension. So we have to design the connection against the lowest strength
of bolt/plate. In case of plate failure in tension, we have to find the net strength of the plate
which is reduced due to the presence of hole. So that also we will check and we will see
which one is the least strength, which will be the bolt strength. So we will try to find out the
bolt strength for different failure criteria as discussed above.
77
Next let us come to design of ordinary black bolt.
Now as per clause 10.3 of IS 800: 2007, nominal capacity of bolt is given by
f ub
Vnsb = ( nn Anb + ns Asb ) blj blg bpkg
3
Where, Vnsb = nominal capacity of bolts in shear

fub = ultimate tensile strength of bolts
nn = no. of shear planes with threads intercepting the plane
78
ns = no. of shear planes without threads intercepting the plane
βlj = reduction factor which allows for overloading of end bolts that occur in long
connections
βlg = reduction factor for large grip lengths
βpkg = reduction factor for packing plates thicker than 6mm
Anb = net tensile area of bolt to be considered at the root of the threads = 0.78×π×d2/4
Asb = nominal plain shank area of the bolt
So for different type of bolts the ultimate tensile strength of bolt will be different that we can
find out from the code
Now if you see the above picture, where entire bolt grip is shown, you can identify nn and ns,
means the shear plane with threads and without threads intercepting the plate.
So now I am going to discuss about the design of ordinary black bolts, this is given in clause
10.3 of IS: 800. Now as I discussed earlier that the design of ordinary black bolts has to be
designed under shear, tension, bearing of bolt and tension of the plate. So we will go through
79
one by one and we will see what are the codal provisions made and accordingly we will try to
find out the design strength of the bolt under shear, under bearing and under tension.
So using the above formula given in clause 10.3, we can find the nominal shear capacity of
bolt (Vnsb) where fub is the ultimate tensile strength of bolt which depends on the material
property of the bolt. So what type of material property we are going to use depending on that
we can find out the value of fub.
80
As we discussed earlier about the number of shearing plane with and without threads, here
from the above figure we can found the shear planes as ns= 2 and nn=1. Now we have to find
out the Anb and Ans. Ans is the cross sectional area of the plane shank of the bolt and Anb is the
cross sectional area of the threaded portion of the bolt. Now we know the cross sectional area
of the shank portion will be πd2/4, where d is the nominal diameter of the bolt but when we
are going to calculate the net area of the threaded portion we will reduce to a certain extent
which is suggested by the code as 0.78 times the cross sectional area of the shank area, that
means this will be reduced to 0.78× πd2/4.
Now we will discuss about the reduction factors which will be used to determine the nominal
shear capacity of bolt. βlj is the reduction factor which allows for overloading of end bolts
81
that occur in long connections. If a connection is quite long, then there will be a factor which
we have to multiply with the capacity whatever is coming this factor is called βlj. Similarly,
βlg is the reduction factor due to large grip length, if the grip length is large that means plate
thickness is high or several plates are given then grip length increases, say suppose I am
increasing the number of plates and joining with a bolt. So if grip length is more then we
have to multiply a factor which is called reduction factor for large grip lengths. Now βpkg is
the reduction factor for packing plates. Suppose we have a butt joint where two plates have
different thickness and we have to join with certain number of bolts. So for this case we may
have to provide packing plates. These packing plates when we are going to consider we are
using a reduction factor for packing plates however if this packing plate is thicker than 6 mm
then we have to multiply a reduction factor of beta βpkg.
Now the design shear force, Vdsb = Vnsb gmb where gmb is the partial safety factor, this gmb is
given in IS code in table 5, in table 5 you will get a different type of partial factor for bolted
connection, for welded connection and for different cases the value of partial safety factor of
the bolt or rivet bolt or welded according to the material it has been given. Now this gmb we
consider here as for bolt we use 1.25, right.
Now let us come to the reduction factor how do we calculate βlj which is the reduction factor
due to long joint. So long joint means if the length of joint become more than 15 times of
nominal diameter of the bolt is consider as long joint and the reduction factor βlj can be
calculated as follows:
82
lj
bl j = 1.075 – , 0.75 £ blj £ 1.0
( 200d )
Where, lj is length of the joint
Next we will calculate the value of βlg which is reduction factor due to large grip length
which is consider if the grip length, lg is more than 5d, where d is the nominal diameter of the
8d
bolt. So when lg > 5d than lg 
(3  lg )
Another reduction factor is for packing plates that is βpkg which can be calculate as follows
83
If thickness of packing plates tpkg > 6mm, then
 pkg  1 – 0.0125t pkg
We have seen first is that bolt in shear now for bearing as I told that bolt may fail due to
shearing effect and due to bearing effect and bolt may fail due to tension also the joint may
fail due to tension of the plate tension failure of the plate that has also have to be consider.
Now the nominal bearing strength of bolt (Vnpb) can be calculated from the following formula:
Vnpb = 2.5kb dt fu
Where,
Vnpb = nominal bearing strength of bolt

fu = ultimate tensile stress of plate
d = nominal diameter of bolt
t = summation of thickness of connected plates experiencing bearing stress in same
direction
Remember, earlier we have calculated the ultimate tensile stress ultimate stress of bolt in
earlier formula but here it is ultimate tensile strength of plate because it is bearing on plate.
Now another factor is a constant Kb which can be calculated as follows:
84
e p
kb = smaller of , - 0.25, fub f u ,1
3d 0 3d 0
Where, fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts

d0 = diameter of bolt hole
p = pitch of fastener along bearing direction
e = edge distance
Now we can find out the design shear force as
Vdpb = Vnpb gmb
Where gmb is the partial safety factor of bolt and this value is 1.25 which we can find out
from table 5 of IS: 800-2007.
Now considering the failure of bolt due to tension we can calculate the nominal capacity of
bolt in tension as follows:
gmb
Tnb = 0.9 fub Anb < f yb Asb
gm 0
Where, Tnb = nominal capacity of a bolt in tension

fub = ultimate tensile stress of bolts
An = net tensile stress area
85
Asb = shank area of bolt
fyb = yield stress of bolt
γm0 = partial safety factor = 1.1 (table 5 of IS: 800)
γm1 = partial safety factor = 1.25 (table 5 of IS: 800)
Now the design tensile force, Tdb = Tnb gmb and we know γmb is basically 1.25.
So what we have seen that the strength of bolt due to shearing, due to bearing and due to
tension we have calculated.
Now another aspect is that the joint may fail due to tensile failure of the plate. So if plate fails
then the joint is going to fail. So the tension capacity of the plate also has to be calculated
while calculating the bolt strength of the joint. So we will calculate now the tension capacity
of plate. The tension capacity of plate is given by
0.9 f u An
Tnd =
gm1
Where, Tnd = tension capacity of plate
fu = ultimate tensile stress of plate
An = net effective area of plate
γml = partial safety factor = 1.25
The net effective area of plate is calculated from the following formula:
An = ( b - nd 0 ) t
Where, b = width of plate

n = number of holes along width perpendicular to the direction of load
d0 = hole diameter = nominal diameter of bolt + clearance of the hole
t = thickness of plate
86
Now another failure may come which is 5th one that is bolt with combined shear and tension.
Sometimes bolt are exerted to combined shear and tension. So when we are calculating
individually the shear strength and tensile strength of the bolt we have to also calculate that if
both the shear and tension acts then what will be the combined strength of the bolt and that is
found from this interaction formula that it has to fulfill these criteria and it has to be less than
1.0.
2 2
æV ö
÷ æTe ö
ç ÷ + ç ÷ ÷
ç
ç ÷ ç
÷ ç ÷ £ 1.0
÷
èVsd ø èTnd ø
Where, V = applied shear force

Vsd = design shear capacity
Te = externally applied tension
Tnd = design tension capacity
Here V should be less than Vsd and Te should be less than Tnd but also this check has to be
conducted and the summation of these two will be less than 1.
87
Now whatever we have discussed we will go through one example and we will try to
understand that how to calculate the bolt strength.
Example: Calculate the shear strength of 16 mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6. The bolt is under
triple shear as shown in the figure below.
Solution:
fub
Vdsb   nn Anb  ns Asb  lj lg pkg
3mb
nn = no. of shear planes with threads intercepting the plane =1
ns = no. of shear planes without threads intercepting the plane =2
Nominal diameter of bolt, d =16 mm
88
Diameter of hole, d 0  18mm (Ref. Table 19)
For grade 4.6 bolts; f ub  400MPa
For Fe 410 grade of steel; f u  410 MPa
Partial safety factor for bolt,  mb  1.25
For 16 mm diameter bolt;

Net shear area of bolt at threads is, Anb  0.78   d 2  157 mm 2
4

And Ans   d 2  201 mm 2
4
fub 400
Thus, Vdsb = ( nn Anb + ns Asb ) = ( 1´ 157 + 2´ 201) =103´ 103 N
3gmb 3 ´ 1.25
Therefore, the design shear strength, Vdsb = 103 kN
So this is a small example we have shown where only shear strength has been calculated due
to multiple shear that means we have tried to understand here that what will be the value of
nn, how we will calculate the value of nn and ns and what will be the Anb and Ans and
accordingly what will be the Vdsb the design shear strength due to shear in the bolt.
So due to multiple shear in this case the triple shear the example has been worked out and has
been shown I hope you have understood this example, thank you very much.
89
Lecture 07
Module 2
Worked Out Examples on Design of Ordinary Black Bolts
In last lecture we have discussed the design philosophy of ordinary black bolt and we have
seen that how to calculate the design shear strength of black bolt, the bearing strength, tensile
strength and tensile strength of plate and combination of shear and tension. So how to
calculate the strength due to different force occurring that has been discussed and we have
gone through a small example in the last lecture.
Now in this lecture I will go through two examples of ordinary black bolt and we will see
how to calculate different type of strength due to shear, due to bearing, due to tension. We
will also go through another example where a plate is connected with different number of
bolts and we will calculate the efficiency of that bolt that means the strength of bolt and the
strength of the solid plate. In first example we will try to calculate the strength of lap joint
and then we will go for butt joint. So this is what we will cover in today’s lecture.
Example 1: Design the following joints using ordinary black bolts between two plates of
width 200 mm and thicknesses 10 mm and 18 mm respectively to transmit a factored load of
150 kN. Use plates made of Fe 410 grade steel and 16 mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6.
Solution:
90
Nominal diameter of bolt, d = 16 mm
Diameter of hole, d0 = 18 mm (Ref. Table 19 of IS 800: 2007)
For grade 4.6 bolts; fub = 400 MPa
For Fe 410 grade of steel; fu = 410 MPa
Partial safety factor for bolt, γmb = 1.25
So we will design the connection for the following three cases:
a) Lap joint
b) Single cover butt joint with cover plate of 8 mm.
c) Double cover butt joint with 8 mm covers plates.
a) Lap joint:
In this case we can assume that shear plane is including in the threads so nn is 1 and ns as 0.
For 16 mm diameter bolt; Net shear area of the bolt at threads is, A nb=157 mm2
Design shear strength per bolt, (excluding reduction factor)
f ub
Vdsb   nn Anb  ns Asb 
3   mb
91
400 10 3
  1157  0   29kN
3  1.25
150
form shear point of view the number of bolts required is n= =5.2 ≈ 6
29
Design bearing strength per bolt,
2.5  kb  d  t  f u
Vdpb 
 mb
e p f
Where, kb = smaller of ,
(
3 d0 3 d0 )
−0.25 , ub , 1
fu
Minimum pitch, p=2.5 d =2.5× 16=40 mm
Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 (for rolled edge) =1.5×18=27 mm
= 1.7 d0 (for hand-flame cut edge) = 1.7×18=30.6 mm
Provide p=50 mm and e= 31 mm
So, kb is smaller of
31
[
,
50
( 3 × 18 ) ( 3× 18 ) ]
−0.25 ,
400
410
,1
So k b =0.57
92
2.5  0.57  16 10  410 103

Vdpb 
1.25
¿ 74.78 kN
Where, V dsb =29 kN
So the bolt value will be minimum of bolt value will be minimum of two that is 29 and 74.78
kilonewton.
Therefore, bolt value = 29 kN
150
Number of bolts required ¿ =5.2
29
18mm Direction of load

10mm 150 kN
31mm
138mm 200 mm
31mm
50mm 50mm
93
So we can provide 6 nos of bolts and arrange them as shown in the above figure.
b) Single cover butt joint with cover plate of 8 mm:
In this case two plates are joint with a cover right. So we have to provide certain as shown in
the above figure. So for this case also the design shear strength of bolt V dsb will be 29 kN
because this is also in single shear.
2.5  kb  d  t  f u
Vdpb 
 mb
Where, p = 50 mm, e = 31 mm, Kb = 0.57, t = 8 mm
2.5  0.57 16  8  410  103

Vdpb 
1.25
¿ 59.83 kN
Therefore, the bolt value is 29 kN.
150
Number of bolts required for this connection =5.1
29
Provide 6 bolts and arranging it in three lines as shown in the figure.
94
Direction of load
18mm 10mm
150 kN
31mm
69mm
69mm 200 mm
31mm
50mm
So bolt we are providing in single line in each case here and plates are connected, right so
this is how we can arrange the bolts in three lines and we can find out the arrangement of the
bolts in this way.
c) Double cover butt joint with 8 mm covers plates:
95
So what will be the difference from earlier one that in this case as double cover butt joint is
considered, we can assume that it is actually in a double shear.
Therefore, the bolts will be in double shear.
Assuming threads in the shear planes. Therefore nn=2; n s=0
Since the two plates of thicknesses 18 mm and 10 mm are to be jointed, packing plate of
thickness (18-10) = 8 mm will be required and as the packing plate thickness is greater than 6
mm we have to provide the reduction factor ( β pkg ) for the packing plate.
As per clause 10.3.3.3 of IS:800 2007, design shear capacity of bolts will be decreased by
factor β pkg
 pkg  (1  0.0125t pkg )
 (1  0.0125  8)
 0.9
96
So the design shear strength of bolt in double shear,
fub
Vdsb  (nn Anb  ns Asb )  pkg
3   mb
400 103
  2  157  0.9
3 1.25
¿ 52.21 kN
If packing plates are not given than the shearing strength of the bolt due to double shear will
become 2× 29=58 kN but as we are providing packing plate which is more than 6 mm,
we have to reduce certain amount which was given as a reduction factor of β pkg and that
value is coming 0.9, that is why in place of 58 this is coming 52.21 kilonewton.
Now design bearing strength per bolt,
2.5  kb  d  t  fu
Vdpb 
 mb
Where, p = 65 mm, e = 31 mm, Kb = 0.57, t = 10 mm
97
As double cover butt joint has been provided that is why the cover plate thickness will
become 8×2 that is 16 mm and thickness of other plates are 10 mm and 18 mm. So thickness
of the thinner plate will be 10 mm so that is why we are providing 10
2.5  0.57  16 10  410 103

Vdpb 
1.25
¿ 74.78 kN
Therefore, the bolt value is 52.21 kN.
150
Number of bolts required for this connection ¿ =2.87
52.21
Now atleast we can provide we have to provide a single line of bolt here and we have to
provide a single line of bolt here right. So if we see these we can see that in plan it will look
like this is the two plates are joining here and bolts are connected here four number of bolts
are there. So the detailing can be done in this way either we can consider 31 millimeter or we
can provide 35 may be 130 and 35 to cover this total 200 mm thickness, right and this we can
provide 65 mm or more whatever means suitably we have to provide, so this will be the this
will be the arrangement of the bolts, right.
Using 4 bolts to arrange the joint as single bolted double cover butt joint can be arranged as
shown in the figure.
98
8mm cover plates
Direction of load
18mm 10mm
150 kN
31mm
138mm 200 mm
31mm
65mm
Example 2: Two plates 10 mm thick are joined by 16mm diameter bolts in a triple staggered
lap joint as shown in the figure. Find efficiency of the joint.
99
So if we draw the figure we will see this is a triple staggered lap joint. So bolt we can provide
in this way. The bolt lines are marked as 1-1, 2-2, 3-3.
Now the failure may occur in any direction as marked in the above figure. So if we make
section 1-1, 2-2, 3-3 then we have to consider first failure at 1-1 that we will try to find out
then it will be going to fail in section 2-2. So when we are going to find out the strength at 2-
2 that means we have to find out strength at bolt at 1-1 failure strength plus 2-2. So it will be
clear when we will be going through this example.
So first let us consider section 1-1 means along 1-1 if it fails how it looks. So there first we
have to find out the this is in single shear so the P single shear if I write then due to single
shear Vdsb will be same as earlier and this will be 29 kN which we have already calculated in
100
earlier case of 16 mm diameter because this is a single shear and diameter is 16 mm diameter
so 29 kN will be the single shear strength shear strength due to single shear.
Now design bearing strength per bolt
Pbearing = Vdpb = 2.5kb d tfu gmb
Here, e = 25 mm, p = 40mm
kb = 25/(3×18), 40/(3×18)-0.25, 400/410, 1
kb = 0.46
2.5´ 0.46 ´ 16 ´ 10 ´ 410

Pbearing = = 60.35 KN
1.25
So bolt value due to shear it is coming 29 and due to bearing it is coming 60. So smaller of
this two will be the bolt value, so we can consider the bolt value as 29 kN, right.
So the strength of joint based on bolt value will become how much strength of joint because 7
number of bolts are there so this will be 7 ×29=203 kN
Again now we will see if it fails along section 1-1 then what will be the strength of that joint.
Strength of joint along 1-1
101
= 0.9 fu ( b - nd h ) t gml
= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-2×18)×10/1.25
= 277.49 kN
= 0.9 fu ( b - nd h ) t gml + 2 Bv
= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-3×18)×10/1.25 + 2×29
= 282.35 KN
= 0.9 f u ( b - nd h ) t gml + 5 Bv
= 10-3 × 0.9×410×(130-2×18)×10/1.25 + 5×29
= 422.49 KN
So the strength of the joint will be minimum of 203 kN, 277.49 kN, 282.35 kN, 422.49 kN.
Therefore, Strength of the joint = 203 KN
102
Now we have to find out the efficiency of the joint, so efficiency of the joint means the
strength of joint divide by the strength of the solid plate. So strength of solid plate we have to
calculate first.
Strength of the solid plate
= 0.9 f u ´ b ´ t gml
= 0.9×410×130×10/1.25
= 383.75 KN
So the efficiency of the joint
203
h= ´ 100 = 52.9%
383.75
So in this lecture what we have seen we have gone through two examples, one was based on
the lap joint and butt joint and we found what will be the strength of the joint for different
type of lap joint and butt joint that we have calculated in first example and in second example
we have calculated the efficiency of the joint and how the joint fails mean joint can fail as a
hole due to shear of the bolt or it can fail along a particular section.
103
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 02 lec08
Design of High Strength Friction Grip Bolts
Hello, in last lecture, I have discussed the design methodology of ordinary black bolt. Now
today I will discuss the design principle of high strength friction grip bolt. Now in case of
high strength friction grip bolt, the friction will be coming into picture for calculating the
design strength of the bolt. Now as I told earlier that high strength friction grip bolt is used
when the external force is quite high. To accommodate the bolt in a shorter length of the joint,
we may have to reduce the number of bolt. So in that case, generally we go for high strength
friction grip bolt with laser number of friction grip bolt. Now I will come to the design
philosophy and first we will see how to calculate the shear strength of high strength friction
grip bolt.
Shear strength of HSFG Bolts:
Now as per the codal provision the formula is given that
Vnsf = mf ne K h F0
Where
Vnsf = nominal shear capacity of bolt
104
µf = coefficient of friction (Ref. Clause 10.4.3, Table 20)
Kh = 1.0 for fasteners in clearance holes
= 0.85 for fasteners in oversized and short slotted holes and long slotted holes loaded
perpendicular to the slots
= 0.7 for fasteners in long slotted holes loaded parallel to the slots
ne = number of effective interfaces offering frictional resistance to slip
F0 = proof load = Anbf0
f0 = proof stress = 0.7 fub
Anb = net area of bolts at threads
fub = Ultimate tensile stress in bolt
Now the design shear force,
Vdsf = Vnsf gmf
Vdsf = design shear force

γmf = partial safety factor
= 1.1 if slip resistance is designed at service load
= 1.25 if slip resistance is designed at ultimate load
Reduction Factor for Long Joints:
If length of joint lj > 15d, where d = nominal diameter of bolts,
Then, βlj = 1.075 – lj/ (200d), 0.75 ≤ βlj ≤ 1.0
105
Vnsf is reduced by a factor βlj
106
Bolts in Bearing:
Now in case of HSFG bolt, we also consider the bearing failure. So this bearing failure we
can calculate as we have calculated in case of bearing type of bolt.
Vnpb = 2.5kb dtf u
Where,
Vnpb = nominal bearing strength of bolt
fu = ultimate tensile stress
d = nominal diameter of bolt
107
t = summation of thickness of connected plates experiencing bearing stress in same direction
So this is what we have discussed earlier also, now also the same formula we are using.
Similarly, we can calculate the strength due to bearing using this value of Kb
e p
kb = smaller of , - 0.25, f ub fu ,1
3d 0 3d 0
Where,
d0 = diameter of bolt hole
p = pitch of fastener along bearing direction
e = edge distance
So the design force,
Vdsb = Vnpb gmb
Where, γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25
108
Bolts in Tension:
In case of bolt in exerted in tension we can calculate the tensile strength of the bolt as
gm1
Tnf = 0.9 f ub Anb < f yb Asb
gm 0
Where,
Tnf = design tensile strength of bolt
Anb = net tensile stress area of bolt
Asb = shank area of bolt
fyb = yield stress of bolt
γm0 = partial safety factor = 1.1
γm1 = partial safety factor = 1.25
The design tensile force,
Tdf = Tnf gmb

Tdf = design tensile force
γmb = partial safety factor = 1.25
So similar way whatever we have done here same process we are following in case of HSFG
bolt except the shear strength calculation.
109
Bolts with combined Shear and Tension:
If bolts are in combine shear and tension, then we have to check the interaction formula
2 2
æVsf ö
÷ æT f ö
÷
ç
ç ÷ +ç
ç ÷
ç ÷
÷ ç ÷ £ 1.0
ç
èVsdf çT ÷
ø è sdf ø
Where,
Vsf = applied shear force at service load
Vsdf = design shear capacity
Tf = externally applied tension at service load
Tsdf = design tension capacity
So in this way we can calculate the strength of bolt, bolt means HSFG bolt due to shear due
to bearing due tension and due to combined effect.
110
Praying forces:
Now for high strength friction grip bolt, another force will come which is called prying force.
Prying force is the additional force coming into picture in case of tension and if the
deformation is allowed between two plates then prying force develops. Let me show through
some figure, say one plate is attached with a ‘I’ section, as shown in the figure. So what we
can see here that it has an applied force and in the opposite direction of applied force bolt
force is coming. So if the applied force is 2Te then bolt force is Te, this equation is true if
deformation of the flange is not allowed. If deformation is allowed, then what will happen
that some additional forces at the connection will be developed. This additional force is called
prying force that means due to application of load of 2Te, the bolt is getting force as Te but if
we allow the deformation of the flange then additional prying force will come into picture. So
if Q is the praying force then bolt force will be (Te + Q). So the prying force will be
developed at the connection and to withstand that force bolt will face extra force of amount Q
and this Q value has been calculated and reported in clause 10.4.7.
111
112
As per clause 10.4.7
æl öé bhf 0bet 4 ù
v ÷
Q =ç
ç ÷
÷êT - ú
ç ÷ê
è2le ø
e
27 l l 2 ú
ë e v û
Where,
Q = additional force of fastener due to prying action
lv = distance from bolt centre line to toe of fillet weld or to half the root radius of a rolled section
(figure. 16 of IS 800)
le = distance between prying force and bolt centre line (figure. 16 of IS 800)
le =1.1t bf 0 / f y
β = 2 for non-pre-tensioned bolts
= 1 for pre-tensioned bolts
η = 1.5
f0 = proof stress
t = thickness of end plate
tmin = 4.4M p ( f ybe )

Where, M p = Telv / 2 = Qle
113
So in case of HSFG bolt apart from shearing, bearing and tension, prying force may also
come into picture. So the bolt we supposed to take will have some additional value of Q that
means if Te is the external force on bolt then actual force will be Te + Q where Q is a prying
force. Now we will go through one example of HSFG bolt and we will see how to calculate
the shear strength and other strength means bearing strength etc. for HSFG bolt then it will be
clear to us.
114
Example:
An ISA 110 mm ×110 mm ×10 mm carries a factored tensile force of 150 kN. It is to be jointed with a
10 mm thick gusset plate. Design the joint using HSFG bolt when (a) no slip is permitted, (b) when
slip is permitted. Assume steel is Fe 410 grade.
115
Solution:
Let us provide HSFG bolts of grade 8.8 and of diameter 20 mm.
For 8.8 grade bolts: f ub  800 MPa

Net tensile stress area of bolt, Anb  0.78   202  245mm2
4
For Fe 410 grade of steel: f u  410 MPa
a) Slip-critical connection (slip is not permitted):
3
proof load, F0  Anb  0.7 f ub  245  0.7  800  10  137.2kN
Slip resistance of bolt   f ne kh F0 /  mf
here,  f = 0.5 (assuming)
ne = number of effective interfaces offering frictional resistance to slip
=1
 mf = 1.25 at ultimate load
kh = 1.0 (assuming bolts in clearance holes)
137.2
Slip resistance of bolt  0.5  11  54.88kN
1.25
116
150
Number of bolts required   2.73
54.87
Thus provide 3 nos. HSFG bolts.
b) Bearing type connection: (slip is permitted)
Strength of bolt in single shear,
Anb f ub 245  800

Vdsb   103  90.53kN
3 mb 3 1.25
117
2.5kb dtf u
Strength of bolt in bearing, Vdpb 
 mb
Assume e = 40 mm [Minimum e = 1.7d0 = 37.4 mm]
p = 60 mm [Minimum p = 2.5d = 50 mm]
kb is smaller of 40/ (3×22), 60/ (3×22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1
Therefore, kb = 0.61
2.5  0.61 20 10  410  10 3

So, Vdpb   100.04kN
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 90.53 kN
150
Number of bolts required   1.66
90.53
Thus provide 2 HSFG bolts
So here we have seen that if we consider slip critical and if we do not consider slip, if we
allow slip and if we do not allow slip how the values are going to change. So design of high
strength friction grip bolt is exactly similar to bearing type of bolt except the friction. Friction
component if we had that means if we consider the slip resistance then we have to find out,
the design shear strength accordingly, other things will be exactly similar to the bearing type.
118
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 02 Lecture 09
Weld Connection
Hello, in today’s lecture am going to discuss about the weld connections. Before the design of
weld connections, I will discuss little bit about the advantages and disadvantages of weld
connections. As we have seen, in case of bolt connections, there are certain advantages and
disadvantages and according to the requirement in the field, we have to choose a certain type of
connections. There are two type of bolt. One is bearing type of bolt and another is high friction
grip bolt. The two type of bolt connections have been designed and certain number of examples
have been worked out. Now in this lecture I will first discuss about the weld connections, weld is
basically a process of joining metals, metal pieces by the application of heat and with or without
pressure.
119
Different process of weld connections are there, i.e. forge welding, thermit welding, gas welding,
resistance welding and electric-arc welding. Nowadays the electric arc welding is a most popular
type of welding.
Now coming to weld connections, let us see first the certain type of advantages, weld connection
does not need any hole in the plate. So there should not be any reduction of area that means the
structure members are will be more effective to take the load. Second is, in weld connection filler
plate, gusset plate, connecting angles etc. are not used that means the total weight of the joint
will be less in such cases. Now weld joint should be economical as less materials are required.
120
So these are the certain advantages. Another advantages is that efficiency of weld joint is more
than that of the riveted or bolted joint, because when bolt connection or riveted connections are
used we create hole and because of creation of hole the net effective area of the plate is going to
be reduced and this area under tension will be less and therefore, the capacity or strength of the
bolt joint will be less compared to the weld joint. Therefore, the efficiency of weld joint will be
comparatively more than the efficiency of the bolt or rivet joint.
Now another advantage is that, the weld joint look better than the bulky riveted and bolted joint.
If we want to make a particular shape of the joint, we can make by the weld joint, but in case of
bolted joint or riveted joint it will look bulky, because of extra bolt and bolt or rivet will be
added.
121
Another advantage is the speed of fabrication. In case of weld joints, speed of fabrication will be
much faster than the riveted joint and complete rigid joint can be achieved through weld process.
In case of bolted joint complete rigid joint we cannot achieve, but in this case we can make it.
Then alternation and addition of the existing structure is easy as compared to riveted joint,
because rivet joint is permanent in nature, it is difficult to add or alter the existing structure.
Now another important advantage is that no noise is produced during the welding process as in
case of riveting process and also, the welding process requires less work space in comparison to
rivet and any shape of joint. So these are certain advantages we obtain in weld joint.
122
Weld material are brittle in nature and as a result the fatigue strength is less
123
Now let us come to the disadvantages of weld joints. Weld joints are basically brittle in nature
and therefore, it is means its fatigue strength is comparatively less. This is one disadvantages and
another disadvantage is that due to uneven heating and cooling of the member during the
welding the members may distort resulting additional stresses. So distortion may come and
because of distortion the additional stress may come into picture. Then another disadvantage is,
we need skilled labor and electricity for welding say for example, if we want to construct a
structure at the remote place where electricity is not there, in that case, it would be difficult to go
by the weld joint. So this is another disadvantage. Then there is no provision for expansion and
contraction in welded connection and therefore, there is a possibility of cracks. So cracks may
develop because of this and inspection of weld work is more difficult and costlier than riveting
work and another disadvantage is the defects like internal air pockets, slag inclusion, incomplete
penetration are difficult to detect.
124
Now coming to type of weld, there are three types of weld we have; one is fillet weld. Fillet weld
is used when two members are lapped together.
Suppose two members are there and these are overlapped, when we are going to join this we
need to join at the overlap portion and if we see in that plan we will see that these are say, these
are welded. So this type of welding is called fillet weld means when 2 members are lapped
together, 2 members are to be joined, in that case fillet member we can use and in case of fillet
weld or I should say that in case of 2 members joined in a different plane then fillet weld can be
used. Butt welds we can use when the two members are joined in same plane, suppose this is a
125
member and this is another member, we will be joining in same plane. So in this case we can
provide butt weld and we can fill with weld material and it may have complete penetration, it
may have incomplete penetration, different type of butt welds are there. I will come into it later
and according to the process of penetration the throat thickness of the weld is defined and the
strength calculation is carried out.
Another type of weld is plug weld, the plug weld is required when two members are connected
together having a limited length of the joint, say suppose one members is like this and another
member is connected, right and we have limited length. Limited length means here if we see that
length is this much say, this is l1 and we will get this is l2, so total length will be available length
will be here2×l1+l2 and suppose the force along the joint is so high that the required length L R is
much more than the available length. So in this case we have to adjust the total length in
between, so what we can do we can make a slot here and we can provide way. So in this way we
can increase the length of the weld joint by the insertion of slot. So this is how one can make
adjustment of the additional length with the insertion of slot. So these are the 3 types of weld we
will come across.
126
Now I will quickly show some basic type of welds and their symbols, we do we use sub-symbol
that means if we use certain symbol like this, then it means this is fillet weld. Similarly if a
square butt weld is used then in the drawing we use this parallel line 2 parallel line. So that
means when parallel line is there that means we understand that this is a square butt.
If we write V that means it is a single V butt joint where joint will be like this, again if we come
to double V butt joint it will be like an X when joint is single U butt we will make a symbol like
this. So in case of double U butt joint, its symbol will be like this. So different symbols we use
for different type of weld in the drawing sheet, so we have to know that what symbol are given in
the drawing and what does it mean.
127
Similarly double V, double-bevel-but joint, single-j-butt joint, double-j-butt joint we can also use
in terms of its symbol.
Now shape of the weld when it is flat, its symbol is like this, and when convex, its symbol we
use like this and when concave we will use symbol like this.
128
So first we will discuss the fillet weld, its different parameters, then we will see the design
methodology for fillet weld joint then we will go for butt weld joint and finally we will go for
slot weld joints. Therefore, in case of fillet weld, as we know that when two lapped plates are to
be joined. In case of fillet weld, we know that certain terms will be used in case of fillet weld.
Say, what is size of fillet weld? How do we define the size of fillet weld? Then we will discuss
then what is the throat of fillet weld and throat thickness of that fillet weld, then effective length
of fillet weld, we know the length of fillet weld, but what is the effective length?
Then another term we will use in fillet weld is end return, then overlap, then side fillet,
intermittent fillet, single fillet weld and permissible stress and strength of fillet weld we have to
find out. So these terms we will be frequently used in case of fillet weld design. So we need to
know one by one about the term.
129
So, if we see here that the two members are joined together and by the application of heat then
this will be the fusion zone where the members are joined. Now this is the portion, which is
called root. So from root to toe the length is called leg and this will be the size of the weld. This
is a weld face and we will see that some extra deposit are there means if we make a straight line
from this toe to this, we will see this is the extra deposit which is call reinforcement, right.
130
The leg length of the weld, is the distance from the root of the weld to the toe of the weld
measured along the fusion face.
131
Now minimum size of the weld are given in clause 10.5.2.3 of table 21 of IS 800-2007. So it
depends on the thickness of the thicker part of the member, suppose the two members are joined
together overlapped. So it may be of same thickness it may be of different thickness. Now
minimum size of the weld we can define on the basis that if the thickness of thinner part is up to
10 mm then minimum size of the weld will be 3 mm. Similarly, from 10 to 20 mm if thickness of
thicker part is existing then minimum size of the weld will be 5 mm. Similarly 20 to 32 it will be
6 mm and so on. So these details are given in table 21 of the IS 800-2007. So, we can use that
while designing the fillet weld.
132
Now few things we have to remember like when the minimum size of the fillet weld is greater
than the thickness of the thinner particularly, the minimum size of the weld should be taken as
the thickness of the thinner part. So minimum size cannot become more than the thickness of the
thinner part. Then when the thicker part is more than 50 mm thick special precaution like
preheating etc. will be taken care and as per clause 10.5.2.1. For deep penetration weld where the
depth of penetration beyond the root run is minimum of 2.4 mm, the size of the filet weld is
minimum leg size plus 2.4 mm and this is about the minimum size of the fillet weld.
Now the maximum size is also defined in the code that is the thickness of the thinner part minus
1.5mm, it can go up to that means the thickness of the thinner part we know and the maximum
size we can become that thickness of the thinner part minus 1.5 mm. Similarly, in case of angle
the maximum size of the fillet weld be three fourth of the nominal thickness of the angle.
133
Now, (I will come to) now I will discuss about the effective throat thickness, as I told one is size
of the weld. So if we see if we make a diagram that this is a size of the weld and (this the) this is
root and from root to toe is a size of the weld and if size of the weld in different direction is same
then we can write S or the minimum of that. Now extra deposits happens here, which is called
reinforcement and this extra deposit we provide to increase the efficiency of the joint.
Now if we give a name say suppose A, B, C. Now from root to perpendicular distance to the
hypogenous will be the thickness of the weld. So if this is D then the throat thickness will be BD
134
where the size will be BC or AB. Now how to find out the relation between T and S. So we can
see here that, in triangle ABD, if we write in triangle ABD,
BA  BC  S
 AC  2S
AB2  AD 2  BD 2
 BD  AB2  AD 2
2
 S S
 BD  S  2
  BD 
 2 2
 BD  T  0.707S  0.7S
135
Now this is true for right angle triangle if it is right angle then fine we can find out this relation
but what will happen about different angle. So in that case what will happen, so that is defined in
code that is in clause 10.5.3.1 of IS 800, it is told that the throat thickness will not be less than 3
mm and generally not exceeding 0.7t or 1.0t under special circumstances where t is the thickness
of thinner plate?
For the angle other than right-angled fillet weld the value of throat thickness is given as:
T = KS
Where,
T = Throat thickness of weld
KA constant depends upon the angle between fusion face
S Thickness of the weld
136
In table 22 of IS 800-2007 the values of K is given. So in clause 10.5.3.2 we will see that the
value of K will be 0.7 if angle between fusion face is 60 to 90 degree. Similarly for 91 to 100
degree the value of K will be 0.65, 101 to 106 degree. The maximum value is 0.7. So maximum
value of K is 0.7, when angle between fusion face is 60 to 90 degree. If it is more than that then
the value of K will be reduced. So we have to take the value of K from this table.
137
Now coming to effective length. So effective length can be found out from the area of the weld
for which specified size of the effective throat thickness of the weld exist. Suppose we have a
length this much then if we say, this is effective length then total length will be l + 2S, total
length and if it is effective length. So why 2S , because we assume that the strength will be
carried out by the length which is called effective length, but we have to provide little more in
two side to make sure the strength is being carried out by this l e. So the total length we will make
little higher, right and this effective length should not be less than four times the size of the weld.
138
Now coming to the design strength of fillet weld. When we are going to calculate the strength of
the fillet weld join we have to find out what is the permissible strength of the joint or permissible
force of that joint. So that can be calculated from this formula which is given in the IS 800 that is
f u Lwte
Pdw =
3γmw
Lw = length of weld in mm
fu = ultimate stress of weld in MPa
te = effective throat thickness = 0.7S
γmw = partial safety factor
= 1.25 for shop welding and
= 1.5 for site welding
S = size of weld in mm
Now if we go to the design procedure we will see that first what we have to do? We have to
assume a size of the weld, suppose we are going to design a weld joint, we have been given a
particular load then what we can do? If we have a certain length then we can find out the what
139
will be the throat thickness of the weld and size of the weld, in other way also we can do, we can
fix the size of the weld from the maximum and minimum criteria and the we can find out the
effective length Lw and then the total length, right.
So one way we can do, we can assume size of the weld based on thickness of the member then
by equating the design strength of weld to external factor load the formula which I have given in
last slide the effective length of weld is calculated. If length exceeds 150t e then we have to
reduce the design capacity of the weld as prescribed in clause 10.50.7.3 and is as given below,
right. So that reduction factor will be
0.2l j
blw = 1.2 -
150te
Where, lj = length of joint in the direction of force transfer
te = throat thickness of the weld.
Then another thing is end returns of length equal to twice the size of the weld are provided at
each end of the longitudinal fillet.
Let us come to that slide, this is called end return that means when the length of joint is this then
we have to provide a end return of this value and that is 2S. So this return, this is 2S, right. So if
140
we provide here, the weld in this direction and this direction and if it is extended up to the corner
then we have to extend up to 2S more, which is called end return and another thing we have to
remember that is overlap.
The overlap of lap joints should not be less than four times the thickness of the thinner plate or
40 mm whichever is less, this also we have to keep in mind while going to design. So this is all
about the calculation of design strength of fillet weld we have seen that how to find out the
design strength of fillet weld Pdw which is basically
f u Lwte
Pdw =
3γmw
Where fu is the ultimate stress of the weld metal and Lw is the effective length not the total length
and te is the effective throat thickness. So this is how we can find out the design strength of weld
connection, thank you.
141
Lecture 10
Module 2
Design of Fillet welds
Hello, today I am going to discuss about design of Fillet welds. In last lecture I have
discussed about the fillet welds, means different parameters used for fillet welds like what is
the effective length of the weld, what is the total length of the weld, what is the size of the
welds, what is the effective thickness of the weld etc. We have also discussed to find out the
maximum allowable throat thickness of the size and minimum size of the weld on the basis of
the plate thickness and finally we have discussed about the design strength of fillet weld,
right.
This is the same formula to calculate the design strength of the fillet weld,
f u Lwte
Pdw =
3γmw
142
Lw = length of weld in mm
fu = ultimate stress of weld in MPa
te = effective throat thickness = 0.7S
S = size of weld in mm
We generally use right angle and for that it is 0.707S and on the basis of this, we will go
through one workout example. If some load is given then how to find out the length of the
weld and how to distribute the length of the weld in different site that will see through this
workout example.
Example:
A tie member of a roof truss consists of ISA 100×75×8 of Fe410 grade, is welded to a 10 mm
gusset plate. Design the welded connection to transmit a tensile load, T. Assume connection
are made in the workshop.
143
So here the thickness is given means thickness of the gusset plate is given 10 mm and
thickness of the angle is 8 mm, so from these two we can find out the size of the weld right.
So this is one thing second thing is that this is an angle section so its c g distance will not be at
the middle not at will be at the centre. So that means the weld length will not be distributed
equally in upper side and lower side so, the design of weld has to be made in such a way the
equivalent strength passes through the cg.
Solution: Minimum weld size = 3 mm [Table 21, IS 800]
Maximum weld size = ¾ ×8 =6 mm [clause 10.5.8.2, IS 800]
Therefore, Let us adopt 5 mm thick fillet weld.
Throat thickness, te = 0.7 × 5 = 3.5 mm
For ISA 100×75×8, Gross area, Ag = 1336 mm2 , Cz = 31mm
Full strength of the angle,
f y Ag 250×1336
= = ´ 10- 3
γm0 1.1
= 303.64kN
144
Strength of 5-mm weld,
3.5  410
 662.8 N / mm
3 1.25
Force to resist by weld at 100 mm side of angle,
P2  662.8 100 103  66.28kN
Force to resist by weld at upper side of angle,
Ty P2 303.64  31 66.28
P1      61kN
d 2 100 2
Force to resist by weld at lower side of angle,
61103
Lw1   92mm
662.8
Length required at upper side of angle
176.36 103
Lw3   266mm
662.8
Total Length (effective) of weld = 266 + 92+100 = 458 mm
Note: Add twice the weld size at the ends.
Thus total length = 458+2S = 468 mm
145
146
So whatever you are getting you have to represent in terms of drawing so that engineer can
understand at the site. Here one thing we have to remember, we provide the effective length
suppose length whatever we are providing is effective length and engineer has to add to this
147
that means the size of the weld it has to add and then it has to fabricate right. So this is one
example.
Example Design a suitable fillet weld to connect web plate to flange plate and flange plate to
flange cover plate of a built-up girder as shown in the figure, for the following data. Assume
shop welding.
Web plate: 1200 mm × 12 mm
Flange plate: 450 mm × 20 mm
Flange cover plate: 350 mm × 16 mm
Maximum Factored shear force: 1600 kN
148
149
For Fe 410 steel:
f u  410 MPa
For shop weld:
 mw  1.25
Permissible shear stress
fu 410
   189.37 N / mm 2
3   mw 3 1.25
Connection of web plate to flange plate:
Size of weld: Minimum = 5 mm [Table 21, IS 800]
Maximum = 12 – 1.5 =10.5 mm [clause 10.5.8.1, IS 800]
Let us provide 7 mm size of fillet weld.
Effective throat thickness of weld
te  KS  0.7  7  4.9mm
te  2  4.9  9.8mm
Ay  450  20  (600  10)  350 16  (600  20  8)
 900.68 104 mm3
150
350 163 450  203 12 12003
I zz  2  [  350  16  6282   450  20  6102 ] 
12 12 12
 12.8  109 mm 4
Shear stress:
VAy 1600  103  (900.68 104 )

  114.9 N / mm 2  189.37 N / mm 2
I zz  te 12.8  10  9.8
9
Hence, the weld is safe.
151
Connection of flange plate to flange cover plate:
Adopt a 7 mm fillet weld.
te  KS  0.7  7  4.9mm
te  2  4.9  9.8mm
Ay  350  16  (600  20  8)  351.68 10 4 mm3
152
Shear stress:
VAy 1600  103  (351.68 104 )

  44.86 N / mm 2  189.37 N / mm 2
I zz  te 12.8  10  9.8
9
Hence, the weld is safe.
This is how we can check the joint whether it is ok or not right. So in todays lecture what we
have seen that two type of problem we have come across and we have seen how to calculate
the design strength of the weld or how to design the weld joint. And in first case we have seen
how the distribution of the weld will be done for an angle section because in angle section c g
distance is not at the centre so we have to make the weld connection in such a way that
strength of the weld connection coincide with the c g of the joint. So this is what we have
done, this is all for todays lecture, thank you.
153
Lecture 11
Module 3
Design of Butt welds
Hello today we will discuss about the design procedure of butt joint. In last lecture we have
discussed how to design a weld joint using fillet weld and the fillet strength has been
calculated and we have discussed that the size of the weld, then throat thickness of the weld,
minimum size of the weld, maximum size of the weld.
So butt weld is basically a type of weld when two plates are joined at the same plane.
154
That means I had shown earlier if you remember that when two plates are joined, then plates
may be of different size or same size. In this kind of joint, we use butt weld also we can see
that when a T joint is desired in that case also we can use this butt weld.
Now in case of butt welds we have certain specification, so we need to know the specification
like size of the weld, how the size of the weld will be calculated, then effective length of the
weld, then effective area of the butt weld and reinforcement. So if we see here the two plates
this is one plate and this is another plate are connected in the same plane and through fusion
we have joined and this is called throat thickness, from which the size of the weld can also be
found.
155
And this extra deposit is called reinforcement and I told this reinforcement is necessary
though we do not calculate the strength due to this extra deposit but this is necessary for
efficient joint of the members.
Now size of the weld can be defined by the effective throat thickness as follows, like the size
of the butt weld is the thickness of thinner plate, this is one that if we have two plates joined
together. Suppose if we have two plate then the size of the thickness of the thinner plate will
be the size of the butt weld, now in case of complete penetration the effective throat thickness
will be the size of the thinner plate otherwise we have to calculate. I will come later and
different type of complete penetrated joint are double V butt joint, double U butt joint, double
J and double Bevel butt joint these are some example with completely penetration. Therefore,
in this case the thickness of the thinner plate will be the size of the weld.
156
In case of incomplete penetration the effective throat thickness is taking as 7/8 of the
thickness right not the full thickness, but for the purpose of stress calculation we will
calculate 5/8 of the thickness of the thinner part. So there are two things when you are going
to calculate the effective thickness of the butt weld in case of incomplete penetration we will
calculate the effective throat thickness as 7/8 times the thickness of the thinner plate but when
we are going to calculate the strength of the plate we will calculate 5/8 times of the thickness
of thinner plate as effective throat thickness.
Now the difference in thickness between two plates should not be more than 25 percent of the
thickness or or 3 mm whichever is more. If difference is more than 25% then a tapering is
required of 1 in 5.
157
Now the effective length is calculated in a similar way as we have done in case of fillet weld
the effective length will be based on the effective area. It is the area of the butt weld for
which the specified size that means the effective throat thickness of the weld exists that
means the length in which the effective size of the throat thickness are existing that length
will be the butt weld length and the minimum length of the butt weld should not be less than
4S where S is the size of the weld.
So minimum length has to be 4 times the size of the weld and I told again I am repeating here
that in drawing only effective lengths are shown, the welder must provide an additional
length of 2S to get the overall depth. So in drawing we will show the effective length but
weld length has to be added 2S for designing.
158
Reinforcement is basically an extra deposit over the plate and this is also necessary for
effective strength of the joint and this is least 10 percent greater than the thickness of the weld
material. So the extra deposit of the metal above the thinner plate between 1 mm to 3 mm is
not considered for stress calculation or design. The reinforcement is provided to increase the
efficiency of the joint.
So reinforcement has not been taken considered for calculation of strength but to make it
efficient we need to provide the reinforcement and what will be the permissible stress in the
butt weld that also defined, i.e. the stresses of butt weld should be taken equal to the stress of
the parent metal in case of shop weld. Therefore, stress of the butt weld will be the stress of
the parent metal.
Stress of the butt weld we can consider, as a stress of the parent metal but the value will be
reduced to 80 percent when it is done in field.
159
The design strength of butt weld in tension or compression is governed by yield,
f y Lwte
Tdw =
γmw
Lw = effective length of weld in mm
fy = smaller of yield stress of weld and parent material in MPa
te = effective throat thickness in mm
The design strength of butt weld in shear is also governed by yield
f y Lwte
Vdw =
3γmw
160
Now stress due to individual force when subjective to different types of compressive or
tensile force then the stress we can calculate by the force divided by the effective area.
Effective area means te into Lw.
When subjected to either compressive or tensile due to axial force or shear force alone, the
stress in the weld is given by,
P
f a or q 
te lw
Fa = calculated normal stress due to axial force in N/mm2
q = shear stress in N/mm2
P = force transmitted (axial force N or shear force Q)
te = effective throat thickness of weld in mm
lw = effective length of weld in mm
161
Now combination of stresses so it may happen that two type of stress or more than two type
of stress are acting together combined, so in this case we have to find out the equivalent
stress.
fu
fe  fa2  3q2 
3  mw
fa = normal stress, compression or tension, due to axial force or bending moment.
q = shear stress due to shear force or tension.
162
Now if we go for another stress which is called bearing combined bearing, Bending and
shear. So if we combine this three stress then the equivalent stress can be calculated from this
formula,
fe  f b2  fbr2  f b fbr  3q 2
Fe = equivalent stress
Fb = calculated stress due to bending in N/mm2
Fbr = calculated stress due to bearing in N/mm2
q = shear stress in N/mm2
Now we will go through some examples we have seen how to find out the strength of the
butt weld, now through some example will see how to calculate the strength of butt weld due
to incomplete penetration due to complete penetration, this also we will go through this
example and we will see how the design strength is going to vary right.
163
Example:
Two plates of thickness 12 mm and 10 mm are to be jointed by a groove weld. The joint is
subjected to a factored tensile force of 250 kN. Assuming an effective length of 150 mm,
check the safety of the joint for
(a) Single-V groove weld joint and,
(b) Double-V groove weld joint.
Assume Fe 410 grade steel plates and that the welds are shop welded.
Solution:
(a) Single-V groove weld:

Throat thickness,
5 5
te  t  10  6.25mm
8 8
Effective length of weld,
Lw  150mm
Strength of weld
Lwte f y 150  6.25  250

 103  187.5kN  250kN
 mw 1.25
164
(b) Double-V groove weld:

Throat thickness = thickness of thinner plate = 10 mm
Strength of weld
Lwte f y 150 10  250

 103  300kN  250kN
 mw 1.25
165
Example:
A joint is subjected to a factored shear force of 300 kN. Assuming single-V groove weld joint
find the effective length of the weld if the thickness of thinner plate is 8 mm. Assume Fe 410
grade steel plates and that the welds are shop welded.
Solution:
For single-V groove weld, effective throat thickness =
5 5
te  t   8  5 mm
8 8
Length of the weld,
3γ´ ´ Vdw 3 ´ 1.25 ´ 300´ 103

Lw = mw
= = 520 mm
f y ´ te 250 ´ 5
Thus, the effective length of the weld will be 520 mm.
166
Effective length of the weld Lw will be 520 mm and if effective length of the weld is 520 mm
then the total length we can find out total length will be L w plus 2S where S is size of the
weld right so this is how we can find out the total length of the weld right.
So in today’s lecture what we have seen that how to calculate the design strength of butt weld
and this butt weld may under tension or compression or under shear. So in both the cases we
have calculated how to find out the design strength of the weld and off course here we have
to remember whether it is going to be full penetration or partial penetration penetration an
accordingly we have to find out the throat thickness or effective thickness of the weld
167
properly because the strength depends on the effective thickness of the weld. So, for today
this is all about the butt weld, thank you very much.
168
Lecture 12
Module 3
Design of Plug and Slot Weld
Hello, today I am going to discuss about the design of plug and slot weld. In last three
lectures we have discussed about fillet weld and then butt welds and I have told that three
types of welds are there fillet weld, butt weld and plug weld or slot weld, now plug weld and
slot weld is nothing but a type of fillet weld. As I have told earlier that in case of plug or slot
weld we are facing problem of limited distance and limited length of the joint. If the length of
the joint is limited and if we have higher values of tension or compression force then it is
difficult to adjust the entire length on this limited length. So, in that case we have to cut some
portion of the overlapping portion in terms of slot or plug to make adjust of that additional
length.
Now if we see here in case of plug or slot weld if we see here that here we have limited
length say L right. So here we will get only this much length and if it is L 1, L1 and L2 then
total length we are getting L2 + 2L1 right.
So if we get the Lw value which is more than L then it is difficult to adjust because our length
is limited, this L1 is fixed so to adjust within a limited length we make some cut of the
169
overlapping position. We cut some portion in terms of slot or plug and then fill with the
welded material and this is how we increase the strength and accommodate the additional
length.
So, if we see a slot is cut in one of the overlapping member and the welding metal is filled in
the slot now what is slot and what is plug. When the slot is small and completely filled with
weld metal then it is called plug weld, but if the periphery of the slot is filled with weld metal
then it is called slot weld. This is how slot weld and plug weld has a difference.
170
Now in IS816-1969 certain specifications are given which we need to follow for design of
plug or slot weld so what are the specifications we need to see. Say first the width or the
diameter of the slot should not be less than three times the thickness of the part in which the
slot is formed or 25 millimetre whichever is greater. Slot diameter means when we are
making a slot so this diameter or this is width this slot diameter or width should not be less
than three times the thickness of the part in which the slot is formed or 25 mm at least 25
mm.
So this diameter will be at least 25 mm or at least three times the thickness of the part in
which the slot is made so this is what we have to remember and diameter of the slot has to be
fixed in this way. Another thing is the distance between the edge of the part and edge of the
slot or plug or between the adjacent slot or plugs should not be less than three times the
thickness of thinner member or 25 mm whichever is greater.
171
Now if we draw the things then it will be clear say suppose we have a slot here and because
of this limited distance, we have to make some slot first point is telling that the diameter or
width should not be less than three times the thickness of the plate in which slot has been
done at least it should be more than three times the thickness of the plate right this is one
point. Second point is telling the distance between edge of the part and edge of slot that
means distance between edge of part or edge of slot or plug like this or adjacent to slots
should not be less than three times the thickness of thinner member or 25.
Then another point we have to remember corners at the enclosed ends should be rounded to a
radius not less than one and a half times the thickness of the upper plate or 12 mm whichever
is greater. So corner at the enclosed end means at the enclosed end we have to make the
rounded corner with a radius not less than one and half times the thickness of the upper plate
or 12 mm thickness whichever is greater. So these three points we have to keep in mind and
the design stress on a plug or slot weld will be same as that in fillet weld and is specified in
clause 10.5.7.1.1 of IS800:2007.
So as I told that design criteria will be same as we have done in case of fillet weld because
this is nothing but a type of fillet weld only thing is because of limited distance we have to
introduce some slot so that the additional length are adjusted.
172
Now with this we will go through some example so that we can understand how to design a
slot weld with the product provision whatever we have understood means whatever we have
discussed and then we will be designing the member.
Example:
An ISMC 300 @ 363 N/mm is used to transmit factored force 800 kN. The channel section is
connected to a 12mm thick gusset plate. Design a fillet weld connection if the overlap is
limited to 300 mm. Use slot welds if required. Assume site welding.
173
The properties of ISMC 300 are,
A= 4630 mm2 , tf = 13.6 mm , tw= 7.8 mm
maximum size of weld= 7.8 - 1.5 = 6.3 mm. (Cl. 10.5.8.1)
Minimum size of the weld = 3 mm (Table 21 IS 800:2007)
Adopt a 6-mm size weld.
Throat thickness = KS = 0.7 x 6 = 4.2 mm.
Strength of the weld per mm =
= 4.2  410 / ( 3  1.5)
= 663 N/mm
174
Required length of weld = 800×1000/663 = 1207 mm
The maximum length of weld that can be provided in the channel = 300 × 2 + 300 = 900 mm
< 12074 mm
Hence, use two slots welds of width 25 mm (3t = 3 × 7.8 = 23.4 mm or 25 whichever is
greater)
Assume the length of the weld is x mm, then,
1207 = 2 × 300 + 300 + 4x
Or, x = 76.75 mm
Hence, provide 80 mm × 25 mm slots, two in numbers as shown in the figure.
175
176
177
Now as we have time will through another example which I have discussed in last lecture. In
case of butt weld or in butt weld lecture we have discussed that is how to calculate the
equivalent stress of the weld joint means when it is under shear and normal stress or shear or
bearing and normal stress. So how to check that design strength of the joint when it is
subjected to axial tension or compression bending and shear, so I will go through one
example with this.
Example:
A pipe of 100 mm diameter and 8 mm thick is connected to a 16 mm thick plate with fillet
weld. It is subjected to a vertical factored load of 10 kN at a distance of 0.5 m from the
welded end. It is also subjected to a factored twisting moment of 3 kNm. Find the size of the
weld assuming shop welding and steel of grade to be Fe410
178
Here, fu = 410 MPa , ymw = 1.25
Permissible shear stress,
N/mm2
Hence, P = 10 kN
M = P. e = 10 x 0.5 = 5 kNm
T = 3 kNm
Polar moment of inertia,
= 785398t mm4
Izz= Ip/2 = 392699t mm4

(1) Shear stress due to direct load,
N/mm2
179
(2) Shear stress due to twisting moment,
N/mm2
(3) Normal stress due to bending,
N/mm2
180
Resultant shear stress,
N/mm2
181
Equivalent stress due to normal and shear stress,
N/mm2
So, t = 4.55 mm
Hence, mm
So, the size of the weld will be 7 mm.
182
So in this few lectures, we have discussed about the different type of connections starting
from rivet connection to bolted connection and then finally weld connection again weld
connection, fillet and butt weld has been discussed and design criteria has been discussed
how to calculate the design strength of the fillet weld and butt weld these things we have
discussed and accordingly we have solved certain number of examples, I hope this will clear
the r designing methodology how we have done and we will be able to design different type
of joint using bolt or weld, thank you very much.
183
Lecture 13
Module 3
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in Plane of Bolted Joint)
In this lecture we are going to discuss about eccentric connections. In last few lectures, we
have discussed about the different types of connections but mainly those are concentric. Now
in case of eccentric connections c.g. of the connection and c.g. of the load will be in different
position so if it does not coincide then eccentricity will develop and because of eccentricity
extra moment will come into picture and because of the moment extra stress will develop.
So therefore we have to design the joint taking consideration of the direct load as well as due
to eccentricity. In case of eccentric joint we have different type of joint like when load is
lying in the plane of joint it will be one type of eccentricity again that can be designed by
weld connection as well as by bolt connection and similarly when load is lying in the
perpendicular to the plane of joint then another type of eccentricity come into picture means
another type of load reaction will come and that also can be designed using bolt joint and
using weld joint. So basically four type of joints will be considered for design.
Now I will discuss today mainly on the bolted type connection where load is lying in the
plane of joint. Say for example if we see above, there is a typical example of load lying in the
184
plane of bolted joint, the cg of the bolted joint and the load are acting in different positions.
Suppose the load is P with the eccentricity of e then the additional moment will come into
picture that is P×e. At the joint we have to calculate what are the load coming at each bolt,
accordingly we have to calculate the bolt strength and we have to see whether this is safe or
not.
If we draw the above figure we can see that a column is carrying some eccentric load which
is coming from beam or say gusset plate. Now P is the load so the eccentricity will be e. So
the additional moment due to eccentricity will be P×e. If n number of bolts are there, then
load in each joint will be P/n assuming that the loads are distributed equally to each joint.
So if we consider that every bolt is sharing equal load then load at each bolt, F =P/n and this
is the load which is coming due to direct load. Now another load will come because of
moment.
We can say r is radial distance as shown in the above figure. So for each bolt there are two
types of forces will be acting, one is called Fa due to direct load and another is called Fm due
to moment. Now we have to find out what is the resultant of this loads and these resultant
load will be the load acting on the bolt. The resultant force can be calculated as follows
ur uur uur
F  Fa  Fm
So we have to find out the resultant force for each bolt, where the extracted force for each
bolt will be different and we have to see which one is the most critical one.
185
So if we start with the load lying in the plane of bolted joint then we can see that this case can
be made equivalent to M (M = Pe) + = direct load as shown in the above figure. So we are
dividing into two parts, one is moment due to eccentricity another is direct centroid load.
So this two will be added and we have to find out the equivalent load. So this is what I have
discussed that if we can find out the direct force that will be Fa and this Fa will be simply P/n
and similarly we can find out moment, which will be P×e where P is the axial load and e is
eccentricity. So if we add this direct force and moment we can find out the combination of
this.
186
Similarly, here resultant will be the simply adding and here we can see that this will be again
adding so out of this six bolts in this particular case will see the extreme case will come either
this one or this one because this bolt and this bolt have similar magnitude because the theta
will be same here so resultant force will be same because distance radial distance from here
to this bolt and to this bolt is same.
That is why resultant force will become same for this case however in this case it will be
simply adding but in this case we will see it will be reduced, this Fr value will be less and
here it will be Fa minus Fm so it will be much more less than this and similarly this is equal
to this one so it will be also less so what we can see that we have to check only two bolts
means if we can check only these two bolts then we will be able to understand which one is
the critical bolt because this bolt and this bolt are same so we do not need to check one means
if we check the extreme one that is sufficient and also we have to check this one then we have
to find out the critical one.
187
So from this we can find out shear due to moment that will be Fm that will be varying with r
because in this case if we see that the moment will be more if the distance is more. But Fm
will be less in this direction in this bolt, so it varies with the distance. So we can write as
Fm  r
Where, r is the radial distance of bolts from the cg bolt.
We can write
Fm  kr
Fm
k
r
Here k is the proportionality constant
Moment due to Fm in each bolt = (kr).r = kr2
Hence, the total moment will be:
 F r  kr  r M   kr
m t
2
k  r 2
Fm
k
But, r
Fm
M   kr 2

r
r 2
Mr Per
 Fm  
 r  r2
2
So this is how the force on a particular bolt can be calculated from this formula where e is the
eccentricity and r is the radial distance of bolt to the cg group of the bolt, so Fm the force on a
188
particular bolt due to moment can be calculated. And Fa for each bolt can be calculated as
follows
P
Fa 
n
Where n is the number of bolt
Now the resultant force can be calculated as follows
R  Fa2  Fm2  2 Fa Fm cos 
Example: Calculate the safe load F that can be carried by the connection as shown in the
figure below. HSFG bolts of grade 8.8 with 20 mm diameter are used. Assume the thickness
of the bracket plate as 12 mm and column used is ISWB 350. Assume no slip is permitted and
slip factor (μf) as 0.5. All dimensions in the figure below are in mm.
189
Solution:
Now let us go through one example right, so this example let us go through. Say calculate the
safe load F that can be carried by the connection as shown in the figure below I will show the
figure. HSFG bolts of 8.8 grade with a 20 mm diameter are used. Assume the thickness of
bracket as 12 mm and column used is ISWB 350. Assume no slip is permitted and slip factor
Mu has been given that is Mu f as 0.5. So all dimensions in figure are given in millimetre.
190
So if we try to solve this problem then it will be clear to us say in this problem the figure is
given like this say it is a ISWB 350, is connected with a bracket and it has a force F this is F
and it is situated at a distance of 180 millimetre. Now bolts are placed in this way six bolts
are placed with a pitch distance of 60 mm and edge distance of 40 mm right. Say this is bolt
number 1, this is bolt number 2 and this bracket thickness is 12 mm and this is ISWB 350
section.
HSFG 8.8 bolt, Ø = 20 mm, μf = 0.5
ISWB 350, tf = 11.4 mm
Proof load, Fo = Anb ×0.7 f ub
π
¿ 0.78 × ×202 ×0.7 × 800× 10−3=137 kN
4
191
Now
1) Slip resistance of bolt in bearing,

V dsf =μ f ne k h F o / γ nf
= 0.5 × 1 × 1 × 137/1.25 = 55 kN
2) Strength of bolt in bearing,
2.5 k b dt f u
V dpb =
γ mb
192
e 40
( )
= =0.606,
3 d o 3 ×22
p 60
−0.25= −0.25=0.66,
k b =¿ least of 3 do 3 ×22
f ub 400
= =0.975,
f u 410
1
¿ 0.60 6
Here, thickness, t will be the thickness of flange of ISWB350 = 11.4 mm.
410
So, V dpb =2.5 ×0.606 × 20× 11.4 × × 10−3
1.25
¿ 113 kN
So bolt value we can find out as least of bearing and shearing, shearing is 55 kN and bearing
is 113 kN.
Hence, Bolt Value= least of (55 & 113) = 55 kN
r 1=√ 502 +602=78.1 mm , r 2=50 mm
∑ r 2 =4 r 12+2 r 22=4 ×78.12 +2 ×502
193
2
¿ 29398 mm
194
So now the force due to direct load in each bolt will be Fa is equal to P by 6 right.
F
Fa =
6
F × 180
Fm = × 78.1=0.478 F
1
29398
F × 180
Fm = × 50=0.306 F
2
29398
θ1=tan−1 ( 5060 )=50.19 ; θ =0

°
2
Now, Fr =√ F2a + F 2m +2 F a Fm cos θ1

1 1 1
¿F
√( )
1 2
6
1
+0.478 2+2 × ×0.478 ×cos 50.19
6
¿ 0.599 F
195
Fr =F
2
√( )
1 2
6
1
+ 0.3062 +2× ×0.306 × cos 0
6
¿ 0.473 F
∴ F r=max of ( Fr ∧Fr )=0.599 F

1 2
∴0.599 F=5 5
¿ F=92 kN
196
So 0.599P is equal to 55 we can equate and then we can find out P as 55 by 0.599 and this
will become 92 kilonewton that means to withstand the load on this arrangement of bolt we
need means we can apply maximum value of P as 92 kilonewton at a distance of 170 mm. So
this is how if we know the distribution of bolt and the loading distribution then either we can
find out the load considering the maximum capacity of bolt due to shearing and bearing or we
can apply certain load and we can check whether the existing bolt in what way it is
distributed are safe or not means if we provide certain load then we can check what is the
load coming on these bolt or in the critical bolt what is the load coming and that load if it is
more than the bolt strength then it is unsafe otherwise the bolt is safe.
So this is how in other way we can do either of the way we can do, either we can find out the
critical load or we can find out whether the section is mentioned the bolt connection group is
safe or not. So in this way the calculation can be made when the eccentric connection in a
sense that load is lying in the plane of connection if it is then I can find out the section
whether it is adequate or not.
197
Lecture 14
Module 3
Design of Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in Plane of Bolted Joint)
Today’s lecture is a continuation of the last lecture. In last lecture we have discussed how to
find out the strength of a bolt and what will be the critical bolt and what is the maximum load
coming to a particular bolt when the load is lying in the plane of joint. So firstly we have
decided bolt arrangement and we have found what are the total load is coming, total load
means the combination of direct load and eccentric load due to eccentricity. We have also
found that what is the moment and what is the load in each bolt due to direct load and due to
moment.
Then we found the resultant of the forces acting on different bolt and we found the maximum
load coming on a particular bolt then we see whether it is exceeding the design strength of
that particular bolt or not. If it is exceeding, we have to redesign and if it is not exceeding
then it is safe. In this lecture we will discuss that how to design a bolt group means if you
have given a load then what should be the number of bolt. First we have to find out number
of bolt required then the arrangement of the bolts means how many lines of bolt we can
provide and how many bolts we can give in each line. Accordingly, we have to decide that
what will be the pitch distance, what will be the edge distance, what will be horizontal
spacing.
Now it is not easy to find out the number of bolt at the very beginning because number of
bolt will be deciding on two factors one is due to direct load and another is due to moment.
Now we can find out number of bolt is equal to direct load divided by bolt strength but that
bolt is going to resist the moment also.
So that means the resultant we have to note unless we know the resultant force coming into
particular bolt we will not be able to find out the design right so for doing that we have to go
with certain trial and certain approximate calculation. Firstly, we have to find out what will
be the total number of bolt approximately required and then we will make a trial arrangement
then we will see that whether with this particular number of bolt and with that arrangement,
the bolt will be safe or not that means critical bolt forces is more than the bolt strength or not.
198
If bolt forces are coming more than the strength, then the design is unsafe so we have to
rearrange the bolt group or we have to increase the number of bolt then we can find out right.
So if we see here that for this case we will decide load line in plane of bolted joint, so here
say for example we have given four bolt in each line and total number of bolt are 8 right. So
with this if we have a value of P here then whether this is safe or not that we can find out
from earlier lecture but we have the value of P then what will be the number of bolt that
means whether 4 or 3 or 8 how do we decide that we will try to discuss.
199
Now we will discuss about the design procedure then we will go through one example so that
we will be able understand the design procedure. Firstly, we have to assume a suitable
diameter of bolt depending on the availability. If we want the lesser length of the joint then
we have to make bigger diameter otherwise we can go for small diameter also and it depends
on the thickness of the member, so depending on that we will decide the diameter of bolt.
Then we have to find out the strength of one bolt in shear, bearing and get bolt value Vsd.
So Vsd is the bolt value correct and how do we find out this shear and bearing, this can be
found whether it is double shear or single shear we have to know. Also we have to find out
whether it is HSFG bolt or whether it is bearing type bolt. Then when we will be going for
bearing stress we have to know what is the edge distance, what is the pitch distance and
accordingly we have to find out the kb, the constant value of kb then we have to find out the
bearing strength right.
So for finding out the bearing strength we have to find out first the pitch and edge distance as
well as the type of bolt whether it is bearing type or friction type depending on that we will
be able to calculate the strength of the bolt. Once it is calculated then we can use this formula,
n  P / Vsd
if P is the external direct load then P by V sd is equal to the number of bolt. So when will use
this formula will use if moment coming on the joint is much less compare to the direct load
200
that means if eccentricity is quite less and moment is coming therefore is less then we can use
simply this n is equal to P by Vsd to find approximate number of bolts.
When the moment is comparatively much less than the direct load, means if the eccentricity
is less than moment will be less, then we will increase the number of bolts to a certain
percentage which depends on the designers’ experience.
From designer from that experience they can understand that how much percentage should be
increased to make the total number of bolts and whether it will be in two or more vertical
lines that also have to decided. In earlier lecture I have shown we had two vertical lines right
so it may be two or more so with a suitable spacing we have to make. So we will increase the
number of bolt with a certain percentage to find out the total number of bolt for checking the
strength of that bolt joint right.
And another case is if moment on the joint is much high compared to direct load that means if
eccentricity is high then will not use the earlier formulae we will use the following formula
6M
n
n ' p  Vsd
where Vsd is the bolt strength and moment M is equal to P×V and p is the pitch distance and
n' is the number of vertical lines.
201
So in this case also we will increase the number of bolts to a certain percentage (depends on
the designers’ experience) and then arrange the number of bolts per line.
So in that case we have to take decision accordingly right so once we consider some
approximate number of bolts will make the arrangements of bolts then will find out the
resultant force for the critical bolt. We will see in which bolt it may come more right if we
cannot predict that then we have to calculate for each bolt or in few bolt we have to calculate
because in few bolts similar forces will be developed.
So we will calculate the resultant force in few bolts and will see what is the maximum force
coming on that bolt then we will see the resultant force in the critical bolt is less than the bolt
value or not if it is less than the bolt value then the joint is safe that means if the resultant
force in the critical bolt is less than the the joint is safe that means the arrangement whatever
we have done is correct, the arrangement means in terms of number of bolts and number of
bolt line, pitch distance, edge distance and spacing between two bolt lines.
So these arrangements are correct if it is not if forces in bolt is coming more than the bolt
value then we have to redesign that means we have to either increase the number of bolt or
we have to rearrange the bolt in such a way that the reaction force on the bolt is coming less
than the bolt strength. So if it is so what will do we will either increase the number of bolts
per line or we will change the bolt orientation in different positions means either number of
bolts per line the spacing and edge distance and pitch and will check whether the critical bolt
force is coming less than the bolt value in this way will design the entire process.
202
So this will be clear if we go through one example say let us go through this example right.
Example: Design a bolted bracket connection to transfer an end reaction of 300 kN with an
eccentricity of 170 mm, due to factored load as shown in the figure. The steel used is of grade
FE 410. Use 20 mm diameter bolt of grade 4.6. The thickness of bracket plate is 10 mm and
the column section is ISHB 200 @ 365.91 N/m.
Solution:
So this is the example we will try to solve that means you have been given 300 kN of load
acting at an eccentricity of 170 mm and this load is acting on a bracket of 10 mm thick
bracket and this bracket is connected with a ISHB 200 I section column right. So now we
have to design a bearing type of bolt to withstand this 300 kN, so we do not know how many
203
bolts will be provided here, how many bolt lines will be provided here, we do not have
anything. So we have to fast find out the approximate number and then we have to arrange
with increase of certain number of bolts and then we have to check whether it is ok or not. So
through this example we will learn how to do it ok.
For Fe 410 grade of steel: f u  410 MPa
For bolts of grade 4.6: f ub  400 N / mm 2
Partial safety factor for the material of bolt:  mb  1.25
For column section ISHB 200 @ 365.91 N/m,
Gauge, g  100mm
Thickness of flange, t f  9.0mm
Diameter of bolt, d = 20 mm
Diameter of hole, d0 = 22 mm [Table 19 IS 800]
Minimum edge distance, e = 1.5×22 = 33 mm [cl. 10.2.4.2 –IS 800]
Net shear area of the bolt at threads,
204

Anb  0.78   202  245mm 2
4
Minimum pitch, p = 2.5×20 = 50 mm
Provide e = 35 mm and p = 60 mm
Strength of bolt in single shear,
f ub
Vdsb   nn Anb  ns Asb 
3   mb
205
400 103
  1 245  0   45.26kN
3  1.25
Strength of bolt in bearing,
2.5  kb  d  t  f u
Vdpb 
 mb
kb is smaller of 35/ (3×22), 60/ (3×22)-0.25, 400/410, 1
Hence, kb = 0.53
2.5  0.53  20  9  410 103

Vsd   78.23kN
1.25
Hence, the strength of the bolt, Vsd  45.26 kN
Let us provide bolts in two vertical rows.
Moment due to eccentricity, M = 170×300 = 51000 kN-mm
number of row, n  2
Number of bolts required in one row,
6M 6  51000
n   7.51  8
pnVsd 60  2  45.26
206
207
Force on critical bolt A
P 300
The direct force, F1    18.75kN
n 16
Pe0 rn
The force in the bolt due to twisting moment, F2 
 r2
Eccentricity, eo = 170 mm
rn  2102  502  215.87 mm
 r 2  4  [(2102  502 )  (1502  502 )  (902  502 )  (30 2  50 2 )]
 342400mm 2
208
300 170  215.87

F2   32.15kN
342400
50
cos    0.232
2102  502
Resultant force on the critical bolt,
F  F12  F2 2  2 F1 F2 cos 
F  18.752  32.152  2 18.75  32.15  0.232
 40.8kN  45.26kN
Hence, connection is safe.

209
So if we check for few bolts and if we find out the critical one then we can see whether the
proposed arrangement of bolt and proposed number whether it is ok or not. This arrangement
also can be changed little means Fm value is coming here little more, that can be reduced
slightly if we change the P value suitably then also Fm value slightly will be reduced but
always it is suggested that you cannot change much more. So if the design strength of bolt is
quite less than the force coming on the bolt then it is better to increase the number of bolts in
place of changing the pitch distance or edge distance or the spacing because it will not change
much.
So this is what we have discussed today, to summarize once again let me conclude that design
of a bolt group due to eccentric load lying in the plane of joint can be done by trial and error
method.
We can find out the approximate number of bolt either from force or from moment then we
can increase a certain number of bolt on the basis on that approximate number and then we
can arrange the bolt group means bolts in a particular way, once it is arranged then we have to
check whether that bolts are safe or not that means the forces on critical bolt is coming less
than the bolt strength or not. If it is not then we have to redesign we have to increase the
number of bolt or we have to change the orientation means position of the bolts in terms of
spacing and pitch and edge or if it is safe then we can stick to that connections.
210
Design of Steel Structures.
Professor Damodar Maity.
Department of Civil Engineering.
Indian Institute of Technology, Kharagpur.
Lecture-15.
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying in Plane of Welded Joint).
In this lecture I will discuss about the eccentric connections where load is lying in the plane
of joint and using weld connection, here basically fillet weld will be used for connections.
Now in case of load lying in the plane of joint two types of stresses will come into picture in
the weld. One is due to direct force which would be the shear, and another will come due to
eccentricity and the stress will come due moment.
So we have to make calculation of the stresses due to direct force and due to moment and
then we have to find out its equivalent forces that means resultant forces, and that resultant
forces should be less than the weld strength. If the resultant stress is less than the weld
strength then our design factor is ok means design whatever we have designed is ok
otherwise we have to increase the weld size or length of the weld size or orientation means
the weld length and width has to be changed and then again we have redesign it.
So coming to this picture if we see here that basically if there is a force P then moment will
become P×e. Now because of that the stresses will be generated on the wild. Now if weld is
connected in this way, so in the bracket throughout the bracket if it is connected then we have
to find out the cg of the weld group.
211
Once we find out the cg of weld group then we can find out what will be the stresses acting
on each portion of the weld say for example in this point stress will be acting one stress will
be acting in this direction vertically downward due to direct force and another will be 90
degrees to the radial distance from cg, and then we have to find out the resultant right.
Now similar as bolt connection we have to find the resultant stress. But we know the stresses
will develop much more at the extreme point building stresses, so the radial distance of this
point and radial distance of this point if we compare it will be more here that means the
critical point will be this point. Similarly critical point will be this one and this point and this
point will be same because this distance and this distance are same, it is symmetric along this
direction.
Therefore the radial distance between this two will be same, the angle between two forces
will be same, therefore the stresses the resultant stresses at this point and this point will be
same. So at any point any of these two points if we calculate then we can find out the critical
stresses of the section right. So in place of calculating entire weld length, in place of
calculating in different position of the weld if we calculate only one point then we can find
out the critical strength.
212
So critical strength will be developed only at this point because of its position. Now direct
shear stress in the weld can be found out from the following formulae
P
ps 
Lt
Where P is the vertical load, L is the total length of the weld and t is the throat thickness.
Say for example if we draw this figure whatever we have seen and this is a column which is
connected by a weld. The bracket is taking a load of P right and this distance is suppose some
distance say e1 and this we have this distance we have so we can find out the cg of this
distance and then we can find out the x and cg e.
So we do not know what is the M value right now unless we know the cg of the weld group
right. So weld if it is made through this periphery then total length here this L, L is the length
of weld, which can be calculated as
L=2 x+ d
Now shear stress due to bending can found from the following formulae
M
pb  r
IP
213
Where M is the moment which is calculated as P×e and r is the radial distance of the welding
point from the cg of the weld. Now unless we know the distribution of the weld we cannot
find out the value of e, e is the distance between load and the cg of the weld group
So before calculating the stress we have to provide certain distribution of the weld, then we
can find out the cg of the weld, then we can find out the stress how much it is coming due to
moment. So here Ip is basically polar moment of inertia of the weld and this can be calculated
as Ixx + Iyy.
Now at any point the resultant stress is given by
p r  ps2  p b2  2ps p b cos 
Where θ is the angle between ps and pb.
For critical condition developed stress should be less than the permissible stress in the weld.
214
215
Example:
A bracket is subjected to a load of 50 kN and is connected to a stanchion by welding as

shown in the figure. Find the size of the weld so that the load can be carried safely.
Solution:
Firstly, we have to find out the cg of the weld group. So along vertical directions say in y-
direction weld group is symmetric but along horizontal direction say x-direction we have to
find out the cg.
Distance of the CG of the welded area from weld line BC,
2 100t  50
X  25mm
2  100t  200t
Eccentricity of the load = 150 + 100 – 25 = 225 mm
1
 I xx  t  2003  2 100t 100 2  2.67 106 t
12
mm4
Similarly,
1
t 1003  2 100t   50  25 
2
I yy  200t  252  2 
12
216
 4.17  105 t
mm4
Now the polar momentum of inertia,
I P  I xx  I yy  26.7 105 t  4.17 105 t
 30.87 105 t
mm4
2  100t  200t  400t

Area = mm2
217
r  752  1002  125
Maximum radial distance, mm
For getting the maximum shear due to bending, first we have to find out the moment.
M  50  225 / 1000  11.25

So Moment, kN-m
Now maximum shear stress due to bending,
M 11.25 106 455.54

pb  r  125 
Ip 30.87 10 t
5
t
Direct shear stress,
T 50 103 125
ps   
A 400t t
75
cos    0.6
125
Resultant stress,
218
2 2
 455.54  125
   
455.54  125
pr       2      0.6
 t   t  t  t
539.88

t
219
Strength of weld = 410 /(√ 3 × 1.25)=189.37 MPa
Therefore, 539.88/t=189.37
Thus t=539.88/189.37=2.85 mm
Size of the weld, s=t /0.707=4.03 mm
Hence, provide 5 mm size of the weld.

Now from minimum and maximum criteria means what should be the minimum size of weld
that from the codal permission we have to check. And then we have to see whether it is
exceeding or not if it is less than the minimum then we have to provide the minimum. So for
220
this case the minimum thickness will be 3 mm so we can provide the size of the weld as 5
mm.
Now say for example, if the size of the weld is given and the distribution is given then also
we can find out what will be the load carrying capacity of the weld joint. The reverse way
first we have to find out the strength of the weld then according to the size of the weld we can
find out what is the Ps and Pb then from that we can find out the load acting at a particular
distance P.
So either of the way we can find out right. So the weld joint when load is lying in the plane of
joint then how to design the joint that has been discussed in this lecture.
221
Module 4
Lecture No 16
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to Plane of Bolted Joint)
In this lecture we are going to discuss about the load line perpendicular to the plane of bolted
joint, that means when loaded in out of plane then how reactions on the bolt will be coming
in to picture that we will try to understand. And in each bolt we know that due to the
eccentricity of the load the moment will come in the bold group as well as direct force will
come. Now as it is out of plane loading that is why here if we see the 2 type of stresses will
develop. One is the shear stress due to direct load and another is the tensile stress due to
moment.
222
So if we draw the diagram say for example a bolt group is connected with certain bracket say
for example this is connected here and we have bolt group at different positions. Now a load
of magnitude P is acting at a distant of e, so moment will be basically P×e, this moment will
come into picture and because of this P the shear stress will develop in this direction and
because of this moment tensile force will come in this direction and we know this tensile
force will be in this top portion and in bottom portion there will be compressive force.
If we draw the stress diagram this will develop as shown above. Now where will be the center
of rotation that means the neutral axis, so there are different opinions for finding out the
neutral axis because it will not be at the cg of the bolt group. This is because bolt lying above
the neutral axis will be in tension but in this portion the bracket if we draw this the bracket is
going to take the compression, so the amount of compressive force will be huge in this
direction compared to the bolt force in as a tension therefore the center of rotation cannot be
at the center of gravity or at the mid-point.
Another opinion has come that it may be at the bottom of the bolt but this is also not true
because the bottom flanged of the bracket and the stanchion are not perfectly rigid so if it is
not perfectly rigid we cannot consider that all the bolts are going to be carry out by the
tension, this is not also practicable, so that we actually need to make some trial and error.
Trial and error means we have to find out where it can lie so through trial and error analysis
we can find out otherwise there is an opinion that we can consider at a distance of h/7, where
223
h is the height from the bottom of the bracket to the top most bolt position which are in
tension.
So if we consider the neutral axis at h/7 then we can find out the total tensile force on the bolt
and total compressive force on the bracket, so and we can make equal to find out the
equilibrium equation.
So the assumption is here that the tensile force develop on the bracket will be proportionate to
the distance from NA, that means it will be meeting with distance at NA, say if this is
distance y then t will be vary with y or I can write
Ti  kyi
Where Ti is the tensile force developed at ith bolt and yi is the perpendicular distance from
center of rotation or from neutral axis to that center of the particular bolt.
So this is what we can assumed and then we can find out the constant which is called elastic
constant or proportionality constant that I can write as
Ti
k
yi
The moment of resistance due to this tensile force
So, total Moment of resistance provided by the bolts in tension,
224
Ti  yi 2
Or M '   kyi  2
yi
So moment of resistance provided by the bolt intension we can write down in this way.
So we can find out the value of moment in terms of its tensile force.
Now tensile force in bolt i,
M ' yi
Ti 
 yi 2
225
Tensile force in the extreme critical bolt will be:
M ' yn
Tn 
 yi 2
Total tensile force exerted by the bolt,
M '  yi
T
y i
2
This is the total tensile force exerted by the bolt and these has to be equal to the total
compressive force because we know about neutral axis the total tensile force and total
compressive force has to be equal.
Thus total compressive force,
M '  yi
C
y i
2
2 h 2h
This compressive force acts at a distance of    from the neutral axis.
3 7 21
226
Hence taking moment about NA we get
External moment (M) = Moment resisted by bolts in tension (M’) + Moment resisted by
compressive force.
M '  yi 2h
 M  M ' Cy  M ' 
y
2
i
21
or M  M '  1 
y
 i 2h
 
 y 21
2
 i 
M
M '
Therefore, 2h  yi
1
21  y 2
i
Now depending on the number of bolts position of the bolt we can find out what is the
fraction of moment is carrying by the bolts, so this is how we can analyze.
227
Now we will find out the maximum tensile force at the bolt, what will be the maximum
tensile force? Maximum tensile force will develop at the extreme bolt.
Therefore, the tensile force in the extreme bolt,
M ' ymax
Tmax 
 yi 2
Where ymax is the maximum distance of the bolt from neutral axis.
6
Thus, ymax  h
7
So maximum tension in the bolt I can find out from this formula and where M' already we
have found out.
228
Now I will go to the design steps means I did not know. I have been given a tension and
which is connected to a bracket and then this bracket is carrying an eccentric load of say P at
a distance of e. Now what should be the number of bolt, we have to find out. So if P and e is
given then how to find out the number of bolts. So what we can do we can write as design
steps.
Design Steps
1. Select nominal diameter of bolt and provide pitch and edge distance suitably.
2. Calculate the design shear strength (Vdsb)
3. Select number of bolt lines, n' and external moment (M) due to eccentricity.
4. Find the approximate number of bolts (n) per line from the following formula:
6M
n
n ' p  Vsdb
5. Compute the shear force (Vsb) in the bolt.
6. Calculate the design tensile strength of the bolt (Tdb).
7. Calculate tensile force (Tb) in the extreme critical bolt.
8. Check for developed shear and tension individually:
Vsb < Vdsb and Tb < Tdb.
9. The connection should be checked against combined shear and tension using the
interaction formula:
2 2
 Vsb   T b
     1.0
 Vdsb  T db
229
So this is how we can go for design, design is basically a trial and error method, so we will
start with an approximate number of bolt per bolt line, then we will check whether it is okay
or not. If it is not okay then we have to again increase the number of bolts, so it is an iterative
process.
230
Lecture No 19
Design of Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to Plane of Bolted Joint)
This lecture will be the continuation of last lecture. In last lecture, we have discussed about
the bolt group connection where the load is lying perpendicular to plane of the bolt group. So
far we have covered the followings; how to find out the tensile force developing on the bolt
and the shear force in each bolt, how the neutral axis will be decided and on the basis of that
how the tensile force is going to vary from bolt to bolt and through interaction formula how
to check the bolt group.
So in this lecture we will go through one example to understand the same process whatever
we have discussed. So before going to the example, let us take an overview of design
procedure whatever we have discussed in last lecture.
Let us say one bracket is connected to a stanchion which is loaded with certain amount of
force at a certain distance away from the structure that means it is an eccentric connection.
Now we have to see first whether it is out of plane load or in plane load. If it is out of plane
load then we have to design according to the design steps given.
So we will start with certain assumptions means diameter of bolt which will not be given. So
we can start with certain bolt diameter then we can find out what will be the pitch distance
and edge distance according to the bolt diameter, what will be the bolt strength due to shear
231
and other things. Again we do not know how many number of bolts are exactly required
because it is not given. So what we can do we can assume certain number of bolt groups,
certain number of bolt lines, right two or three whatever it is, then per line what will be the
number of bolt that approximately we can calculate this from the moment formula.
So that we are showing here, say suppose in first step we can see that we can find out the
nominal diameter of bolt and we will provide the pitch and edge distance. Accordingly we
can find out the design shear strength assuming number of bolt lines and the external moment
due to eccentricity. Then we can find out the approximate number of bolt per line from the
formula given in step 4 and also we can find out the shear force coming in each bolt.
Then in next step we can find out the design tensile strength of the bolt group and also the
tensile strength in the extreme bolt. Further we have to check individually that the shear force
developed on a particular bolt should be less than the design shear strength of the bolt and
similarly the tensile force develop on the bolt should be less than the tensile strength of the
bolt.
So individually it has to be less if it is not than either we have to increase the number of bolt
or we have to increase the diameter of bolt to make sure that mentioned conditions are
satisfied and once it is satisfied we have check against combined shear and tension using the
interaction formula given in step 9. If the equation is not satisfied then we have to increase
either number of bolt or diameter of bolt and we have to recheck once again.
232
Example:
Design a bracket connection to transfer an end reaction of 200 kN due to factored load as
shown in the figure. The end reaction from the girder acts at an eccentricity of 250 mm from
the face of the column flange. Design bolted joint connecting the Tee-flange with the column
flange. Steel is of grade Fe 410 and bolts of grade 4.6
Solution:
233
For Fe 410 grade of steel: �� = 410 ��
For bolts of grade 4.6: �� = 400 ��
Partial safety factor for the material of bolt: �� = 1.25
The bolts along section AA are subjected to
Shear due to the load, P = 200 kN passing through the c.g. of the joint
Bending moment, M = 200×250 = 50,000 kN-mm
Let us provide 24 mm diameter bolts for making the connection.
Diameter of hole d0 = 24+2 = 26 mm [table 19, IS 800]
Net tensile stress area,
�� = 0.78×�/4×242 = 353 ��2
234
Minimum pitch, p = 2.5×24 = 60 mm
Minimum edge distance, e = 1.5d0 = 1.5×26 = 39 mm [cl. 10.2.4.2, IS 800]
Provide p = 65 mm and e = 40 mm.
Strength of bolt in single shear, �� = �� = (�� )/(√3 �� )
= (353×400)/(√3×1.25) N
= 65.22 ×103 N
= 65.22 kN
235
Strength of bolt in tension, �� = ��/��
�� = 0.9��
= 0.9×400×353
= 127.08×103 �
= 127.08 ��
Hence, �� = 127.08/1.25 = 101.66 kN
The bolts will be provided in two vertical rows, one on each side of the web of the Tee
section, connecting the flanges of the two sections.
236
Number of bolts required in one row,
n=
√ 6M
'
p n V sd√=
6 ×50000
65 ×2 ×65.22
=5.95 ≈ 6
Hence provide 6 bolts in each row at a pitch of 65 mm and edge distance of 40 mm.
Total depth of the bracket plate ¿ 5× 65+2 × 40=405 mm
Therefore h=405 – 40=365 mm
The neutral axis is assumed to lie at h/7 from the bottom of the bracket, i.e., at 365/7 = 52.14
mm
(65+40−52.14)+(130+40−52.14)
Now ∑ y i =2× ¿
+(195+ 40−52.14)+(260+ 40−52.14)
+(325+ 40−52.14)¿
=1828.6 mm
237
∑ y 2i =2× [ 52.86 2+117.86 2+182.86 2+247.86 2+312.86 2 ]

¿ 418877. 8 mm2
2
y max =h−52.14=365−52.14=312.86 mm
238
52.14 mm
312.86 mm
365 mm
405 mm
239
Maximum tensile force in the critical bolt,
M y max 50000 ×312.86

T b= = =37.3 5 kN < 101.66 ( T db ¿
∑y 2
i
418877. 8
So what we could see that maximum tensile force develop on the extreme bolt is less than the
tensile carrying capacity of the bolt. So this is ok, that means the number of bolts chosen in
this case are ok.
Shear force in the critical bolt,
V d sb
P 200
V sb= = =16.6 7 kN <65.22 kN ¿ )
number of bolt 2 ×6
Now we have to check from the interaction formula that means if it acts as combined then for
the combination of this formula we have to check the following
V sb 2 T b 2
( )( )
V dsb
+
T db
≤1.0
2 2
16.67 37.3 5
Or ( )(
65.22
+
101.66 )
=0.2≤ 1
240
Hence the bolt group is safe.
Now what we can see here we can see few aspects that interaction formula shows that the
combined coefficient is coming 0.2 only in place of 1, right so it is much much safer with this
combination. Also Vsb and Tb are much less compare to V dsb and T db respectively,
that means may be it is over designed.
So in place of number of bolt 6, we can come to number of bolt 4 or 5 and we can check, to
make economy in the design we can decrease the number of bolt or the diameter of bolts and
then we can check once again if we decrease the diameter of bolt than strength capacity also
would be reduced then also we can check.
So if design is much safe means over designed than to make it economy we can redesign
means either we have to decrease the number of bolt or we have to decrease the nominal
diameter of bolt. So if we reduce the number of bolt automatically that interaction formula it
was much less than 1, it will be near to 1, right.
So this way we can think but if we see that in the interaction formula it is more than 1, then
we have to increase the number of bolt or diameter of bolt to make it safe.
241
Lecture 18
Module 4
Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to Plane of Welded Joint)
This lecture will be the last lecture on the module eccentric connection. In last few lectures
we have seen the design procedure of eccentric connections where load was lying in the plane
of joint and load is lying on the plane of perpendicular to the plane of joint.
But one case we have not consider where load is lying perpendicular the plane of joint but the
connection is welded connections. So in this lecture we will discuss when a welded joint is
under eccentric load and load is perpendicular to that welded joint.
242
And you know that there are two types of welded joint, fillet weld and butt weld. Therefore
we have to calculate the stress develop on the fillet weld as well as butt weld.
So let us consider the first case that is when a column is loaded with a load P with an
eccentricity e and the connection is done by filled weld. Now we have to find out the stresses
means two type of stresses will come into picture in such type of connection one is shear
stress and another is stress due to bending and both will be perpendicular to each other.
So first if we see shear stress which is due to direct load, will come in the direction of direct
load.
243
Load
The direct shear stress in the weld = q = Effective weld area
(a) Fillet Weld
1. The shear stress in the fillet weld,

P P
q 
lwtt 2d  tt
Where, P is the load and e is the eccentricity, d is the depth of bracket plate/welding depth,
�� is total effective length of weld, �� is the throat thickness of the fillet weld.
2. The stress due to bending,

M
fb  y
I
Where,
1
I  2 t td3
12 ,
d
y
2 and
M  Pe
Therefore,
Pe d 3Pe
fb   2
1 3 2 ttd
2  t td
12
244
Now resultant stress can be calculated as follows:
fu
f e  q 2  f b2  weld strength 
3 mw
Design Steps:
i. Select a suitable size of weld and then compute throat thickness and weld strength,
fu
Rw 
3 mw
ii. Calculate the depth of weld using the following expression:
3Pe
d
tt Rw
iii. Increase depth d to certain percentage to accommodate shear stress as well.
iv. Calculate direct shear stress, q, which should be less than ��.
P
q
2 d  tt
245
v. Similarly, compute stress due to bending, fb, which should be less than ��.
3Pe
fb 
tt  d 2
vi. Calculate equivalent stress, fe, which should be less than ��.
f e  q 2  f b2
vii. If the equivalent stress exceeds the design weld strength �� then length of weld should
increase and above process be repeated till the checks are satisfied.
So unless it is satisfying this criterion we have to go on increasing the depth of weld or size
of weld or both to make sure that design is ok.
246
Example: (Fillet weld)
Design a fillet weld to connect a 10 mm thick bracket to the flange of a column as shown in
the figure below.
Solution:
There are three cases, either size of the weld is given then you have to find out the depth or
depth is given then you have to find out the size of weld or both depth and size of the weld is
not given then you have to find both. So in case of finding both we have to go for trial and
error means we have to assume certain size of the weld from the basis of the thickness i.e.
from minimum size of the weld and from maximum size of the weld, we have to find the
suitable size and then we have to find the depth and then we have to check. So both cases can
be done.
247
So in this case the depth is given but size of the weld is unknown.
Let s = size of weld;
Throat thickness, tt = 0.707s

P 50×103 176.8
q= = = MPa
Therefore, Vertical shear stress, 2dt t 2×200×0.707s s
Horizontal shear stress due to bending,

6M 6×P×e
fb = =
2t t d 2 2t t d 2
6×50×103 ×150
=
2×0.707s×2002
795.6
= MPa
s
Now we can find out the equivalent one.
So the equivalent stress,

2 2
 176.8  795.6
 815
fe  q  f b
2 2
     
 s   s s
This equivalent stress should be less than Rw.
Now weld strength,

R w  410 /   3 1.25  189.37MPa
248
Equating fe and Rw we get
780
 189.37
s
 s  4.3 mm
So we can adapt a weld size of 5 mm.
So what we have seen in this example that the depth of weld is given but the size of the weld
was not known so designing this what we have found we have assumed certain size of weld
and then we have equivalent stresses due to external forces equal to the weld strength. So by
making equal of this, we can find out the size of the weld.
(b) Groove Weld:
In case of groove weld the weld has been done by grooving in the plate. So here if we
consider the depth of weld as d and thickness as t then we can find out the shear stress and the
bending stress in a similar fashion.
1. The shear stress in the fillet weld,

P P
q 
lw t e d  te
Where, P is the load and e is the eccentricity,

d is the depth of bracket plate/welding depth,
�� is total effective length of weld and
249
�� is the effective thickness of the groove weld
In earlier case, we have considered lw as 2d because in two sides (the periphery) the weld
joint has been done by fillet weld but in case of groove weld this will be only d.
2. The stress due to bending,

M
fb  y
I
Where,
1 d
I t ed3 y
12 and 2
Pe d 6Pe
fb  
1 3 2 ted2
t ed
Therefore, 12
fy
f e  3q 2  f b2 
Now resultant stress,  m0
Design Steps (Groove weld):
Now coming to the design steps, so for designing a groove weld if we see in a similar way we
can move forward.
i. Select a suitable size of weld and then compute effective thickness and weld
strength,
250
fy
Rw 
0
ii. Calculate the depth of weld using the following expression:
6 Pe
d
te Rw
iii. Increase depth d to a certain percentage to accommodate shear stress as well.
iv. Calculate direct shear stress, �, which should be less than ��.
P
q
d  te
v. Similarly, compute stress due to bending, ��, which should be less than ��
6 Pe
fb 
te  d 2
vi. Calculate equivalent stress, ��, which should be less than ��
f e  3q 2  fb 2
vii. If the equivalent stress exceeds the design weld strength �� then the length of the
weld should be increased and above process be repeated till the checks are
satisfied.
251
Now the same example which has been considereded earlier, will be done using the groove
weld.
Example: (Groove weld)

Design a groove weld to connect a 10 mm thick bracket to the flange of a column as shown in
the figure below.
Solution:
So if we use groove weld how to design the connection that we will see.
252
Let provide a double J groove weld.
Therefore, effective throat thickness = thickness of bracket plate = te = 10 mm
Therefore, vertical shear stress,

P 50×103
q= = =25 MPa
dt e 200×10
Horizontal shear stress due to bending,

6M 6×P×e
fb = =
t ed 2 t ed 2
6×50×103×150
=
10×2002 =112.5 MPa
253
Resultant stress at extreme fiber,
f e  3q 2  f b 2  3   25    112.5   120.55
2 2
Now weld strength,
R w  f y /  m0  250 / 1.1  227.27MPa
So the resultant stress is less than the weld strength that means the joint is safe.
So in this way we can design, in this case, the length of the weld was fixed length of weld or
depth of weld was fixed and the thickness is also fixed because it was a double J groove weld
and so the effective thickness was also fixed. So what we need to do here, we have to find out
the equivalent stress and that equivalent stress whether it is less than the strength permissible
strength or not that we have to check, if it is ok then fine, if it is not ok then the design is not
safe.
However if the depth is not given then we can find out the depth also by trial and error
method the way we have discussed earlier, in the same way we can find out the approximate
depth and then we can check whether it is ok or not, if the equivalent stress is much less than
the weld strength then we have to decrease the depth and we have to check again and if
equivalent stress is more than the permissible stress then we have to increase the depth of the
weld so that we can accommodate it.
254
So this is how we can find out the design strength of weld and we can find out the equivalent
stress of the weld and we can check. So in the last few lectures, we have discussed the
eccentric connections and in eccentric connections, two types of connections will come
basically one is due to in plane loading another is due to out of plane loading. In case of in
plane loading we have seen what are the stresses will develop and how to design and in case
of out of plane loading also we have seen what are the stresses are coming and what are the
equivalent stress and how to design.
And we could see here in all the cases the design procedure is basically a trial and error
method, where we will assume certain parameters then we can find out the stresses developed
on the joint whether it is bolt joint or weld joint, whether it is butt weld or fillet weld and then
we have to see whether it is exceeding the permissible limit or not, if it is not exceeding the
permissible limit then design is fine otherwise we have to redesign with the increase of
number of bolts, diameter of bolts, or weld thickness, weld depth, etc as per the case required.
So with this, I would like to conclude the entire lecture of eccentric connections. In the next
class, we will discuss the design of tensile member.
255
Lecture 19
Module 4
Tension Members and Net Area
Hello today I am going to start a new chapter on new module, that is tension member. So far,
we have discussed about different type of connections, starting from bolted connections,
welded connections and also eccentric connections. Now we will go one by one the member
design. Member means either it is a compression member or tension member or flexural
member.
Now unlike RCC structure here tension member plays an important role. In case of RCC
structure because of the dead load or self-weight, generally structure undergoes compressions
and may be rarely tension comes into but in case of some structures where tension occurs
frequently, we have to use the steel member so that the steel can take tension.
So in case of industrial building or bridges particularly trust members are subjected to tension
because of different type of loads including vehicle load for bridges and wind load,
earthquake load for industrial structure etc. Therefore, we found that many members
undergoes axial tension.
So we means we have when we will be learning the design means design of steel structures
we have to learn how to design a tension member. In case of RCC member many of us have
not learnt that design of tension member in RCC but in case of steel we need to know as we
know that wind when industrial structure is built when wind comes into picture or earthquake
comes into picture some columns goes compression and other columns under tension.
Again, because of reverse direction again the columns which were in compression, will
undergo tension and which were in tension earlier may undergo compression. So we have to
design the members for both tension and compression in case of industrial building or
structures. So those things we will see one by one and you know tension members can have
any type of cross sections it may be angle section, it may be circular section, it may be I
sections any type of sections can be used.
However generally we use circular section as a tension member or sometimes we use angle
sections also because of its advantages geometrical properties.
256
So if we see that truss member, cables in suspension bridges, bracings for buildings, these are
often subjected to axial tensile forces which is be designed properly and as I told that any
cross sectional configuration may be used where circular rods and rolled angle sections are
commonly used.
These are some application of tension member where in case of cable stayed bridge we need
to design tension the stay cables and similarly in case of truss members few members are in
tension. In case of bracings we need to design the bracings which experience tensile force, so
the purlin, hanger supporting floor deck, etc we have to design for tension.
257
Now coming to tension member, we see that different type of section can be used, one is
circular sections, and we can use rectangular or square section. We can use angle section
back-to-back angle section we can also use one angle and this is another angle which is
connecting with a gusset plate.
Also we can see, this two angle sections are connected with a gusset plate with bolt
connection or four angle sections are also connected, this is the way we can make some angle
sections.
258
Then other type of configurations are like this, two channel sections back to back that
generally we use for column section means for compression member but sometimes we may
need it for design of tension member also. Again, channel section face to face may be
connected and angle section making a box this may also can be connected. Angle sections
with the use of gusset plate and other additional plates can be used for making a built of
section which will be useful for tension member design.
Now we will discuss about various factors affecting the tensile strength. Therefore, if we
have a plate and if we make a connection with a hole then the net area of the section is going
to be reduced. For this reason we will be calculating the net area or the for calculation of the
tensile strength we have to reduce the bolt hole area because this bolt hole cannot take tension
that is why the strength will be decreased in the presence of hole.
Then another factor is geometry factor. The ratio of gauge length (g) to diameter (d)
represents geometry factor. A lower ratio of gauge length to its diameter gauge results in
contentment of contraction at the net section and hence it is more efficient.
Then another is ductility factor if the members become more ductile then it increases its
strength because of even distribution of stress. Then residual strength, where fatigue is
involved, we have to count the residual stresses also, how much it is present so accordingly it
has to be taken care.
If spacing of fasteners are closer than relative to the diameter then block shear will lead into
failure so that has to be also taken care.
259
Next is the shear lag effect this is very important in case of tension member design.
Sometimes the whole member are not connected to the gusset plate or to the system. So when
the members are subjected to tension so all the portions of the element or the member are not
directly under tension. Therefore, tension force are not distributed throughout its cross section
properly, so there is scope of shear lag effect. Because of shear lag effect the strength of the
member gets reduced. Say suppose an angle is connected to a gusset plate. Now when the
tension force is applied so this portion will be under tension directly as it is directly
connected but in this portion, it will not occur there will be some lagging. So because of that
lagging shear lag effect will come into picture and because of shear lag effect the strength of
the member will be reduced.
Now coming to net area calculation because in case of tensile member the net area plays
important role because when we will find out the rupture of the section means the member
may undergo rupture along its critical section.
So for that we have to find out the net area, net area means basically the total area minus the
hole area because of the presence of bolt, holes are made so that hole cannot take tension. So
when we are going to calculate the net area we have to reduce that area. So we have to
calculate the different options and then we have to find out that which one is the most critical
section and according to that critical section we have to find out the what is the strength due
to rupture. So, this is how we will make it.
260
So basically net area means gross area minus hole area, so this is the formula which we can
use are in chain bolting,
A net =( b−n d h ) t
Where,
t  Thickness of the plate
dh Gross Diameter of the plate
b  width of plate
n→ No. of bolts in one line
Say we know the when two plates are in connections and under tension say P, bolt
connections are made with a chain bolting. So there will be chance of failure along this
direction say, 1-1. So in this direction, along this path the net section area will be less, if I
consider here, if the width of the plate is b and thickness is t then gross area will be b × t,
right but the net area along these sections will be less. And that will be gross area minus hole
area means if diameter of the hole is dh and if t is the thickness then net area is b- dh × t × n.
Therefore, this is how One can calculate the net area for chain bolting.
261
However, in case of staggered bolt we have different formula.
[ (
A net = b −nd + +
4 g1 4 g 2 )]
p 2s 1 p2s 2
t
Where,
b , t = width and thickness of the plate respectively.
d = diameter of the bolt hole (2 mm in addition to the diameter of the hole, in case the
h
directly punched holes).
g = gauge length between the bolt holes.
p = staggered-pitch length between line of bolt holes.

s
n = number of bolt holes in the critical section.
i = subscript for summation of all the inclined legs.
In case of staggered or zig-zag bolt, the bolts are not in a particular line it is distributed in a
zig-zag manner so we need to know how to calculate the net area and we have to see how it is
going to fail. t So here we can see that suppose the bolt connections is like this then it may
fail in this way say I can give a name that 1-2-3-4.So failure may occur along 1-2-3-4, again
failure may occur in this direction also if this is 5, this is 6 means 1-2-5-6. So it may fail in
the direction 1-2-5-6 also it may fail along 1-2-5-3-4. So three alternatives are there through
which the failure may occur. So what we need to know we need to find out what is the net
area along this three alternatives route and the least one will be the most critical one, so the
failure will happen first on that line so that is what we have to calculate.
262
Now if the gauge distance and staggered pitch distance are different then there is a
modification in the formula,
[ (
A net = b −nd + +
4 g1 4 g 2 )]
p 2s 1 p2s 2
t
So for example, this case where two plates are connected with a lag joint. P is the tensile
force acting and there is a bolt here, this is another bolt, this is another bolt, that means it may
fail along this 1-2-3, this is one case. There are other three failure cases, these are 1-2-4-5-6 /
1-2-5-6/1-2-4-7.
263
So now, I will show the same thing in this picture to give the summary of the things whatever
I have discussed. We can say that the net area Anet , we can calculate as (b - ndh )×t where, t is
the thickness of the plate, dh is the gross diameter of the plate, b is the width of the plate, and
n is the number of bolts in one line. Therefore, this is what number of bolts in one line means
in this line how many bolts are there. Therefore, in this case it will be 3.
So, for chain bolting I can easily find out the net area, but the problem start when we have to
calculate the net area for zig-zag bolting.
264
So in case of zig-zag bolting we have discussed two things one is when staggered pitch
distance () are same and gauge distance (g) are equal. In addition, I told that failure may
occur along 1-2-3-4 or 1-2-5-6 or 1-2-5-3-4. Therefore, if I consider failure along 1-2-5-3-4
then n will be 3, because number of bolt holes in critical section is 3 so n will be 3. So in this
way we can calculate.
265
And, the formula we know that
[ (
A net = b −nd + +
4 g1 4 g 2 )]
p 2s 1 p2s 2
t
So, the parameter name I have told that the variables like n is equal to number of bolt holes in
the critical section means which sections I am passing according to that I can find out number
of bolt holes. And ps is the staggered pitch length between line of bolt holes as shown in the
figure and g is the gauge length between the bolt holes and as shown in the figure earlier. And
dh is the diameter of bolt hole and b and t is the width and thickness of the plate respectively
therefore the net area can be calculated.
266
Now if the staggered pitch is different for different cases say for example this case. So in this
case this we see here s1 and s2 are different that means these bolts are not in the same line
means, in 1-2-3 it is not situated.
So in this case we have to calculate net area considering individual staggered distance. So if I
consider the net area along 1-2- 4-5-6, so there is two inclined line so I have to make this
ps2^2/4g2 and ps1^2/4g1 and net area I can find out in this way. Failure may occur in different
way and so for calculation of net area I have to find out the critical path or the net area for 1-
2-3, 1-2-4-5-6, 1-2-5-6 and 1-2-4-7. So, I will calculate the net area for these four cases and
the minimum one will be the critical one through which the failure will occur, right. So by
seeing we cannot tell that in which line it is going to fail, so I have to calculate and then I
have to find out which one will be the most critical one.
So with this I would like to conclude todays lecture as time is not permitting. So next day I
will go through one example and we will show how the net area is going to be calculated
thank you.
267
Lecture 20
Module 4
Calculation of Net Area in Tension Member
Hello so today we will go through some worked out example. In last lecture, we have
discussed how to calculate the net area of a member along critical section. So the use of the
formula, we will try today to find out the net area of the section for a given section
Example: Calculate the net area of an angle ISA 75×75×6 which is connected to the gusset
plate through single leg as shown in following figure. Bolts used are M20 grade 4.6.
Solution:
(a) For bolt connection
Diameter of bolt hole = 20+ 2 = 22 mm
2
Net Area of connected leg, A = (75-6/2-22) × 6 = 300 mm
nc
2
Gross area of outstanding leg, A = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm
go
268
2
Net area, A = A + A = 300 + 432 = 732 mm
n nc go
(b) For weld connection
2
Net Area of connected leg, A = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm
nc
2
Gross area of outstanding leg, A = (75-6/2) × 6 = 432 mm
go
2
Net area, A = A + A = 432 + 432 = 864 mm
n nc go
269
Example: A flat size of 200 × 8 mm of grade Fe 410 is used as tension member in a roof
truss. It is connected to a 12 mm gusset plate by M16 bolt of grade 4.6 using two alternate
methods of bolting as shown in following figures. Calculate the net area of the members.
Solution:
Diameter of bolt hole = 16 + 2 = 18 mm
(a) Chain bolting
The critical sectional area of the plate will be along 1-2-3-4.
So the net area, An = (200 – 2 × 18) × 8 = 1312 mm2
270
(b) Zig-zag bolting
In this case, the critical section may fail along 1-2-3, 4-5-2-3, 4-5-2-6-7 or 4-5-6-7. Hence,
the net area for all possible sections needs to be calculated and the minimum value will be
considered as net area.
A n=( b−n d h ) t 2
The net area along 1-2-3, = (200 – 18) × 8 = 1456 mm
271
Net area along 4-5-2-3,
[ p2si
] [ ]
2
75
A n= b−n d h+ ∑ × t= 200−2× 18+ ×8
4 gi 4 ×50
2
=1537 mm
Net area along 4-5-2-6-7,
[ ]
2
75
A n= 200−3 ×18+ 2× ×8 = 1618 mm2
4 ×50
It may be noted that the section along 4-5-6-7 will not be critical as the strength of the bolt 1
will be added to this section.
Thus the net sectional area = min of (1456 mm2, 1537 mm2 and 1618 mm2) = 1456 mm2
Therefore, the most critical sectional area will be along 1-2-3.
So when we are we will be going for design of some connection we will try to prefer zig-zag
bolting because it will be more efficient then the chain bolting. Now in next class we will
272
discuss about the strength calculation of the tension member. Now tension member may fail
due to yielding of the gross area so because of yielding what will be the design strength that
we will be calculating.
Next we will calculate the rupture of the critical section that means along critical section how
it is going to fail that we will try to calculate and there we will see that shear leg effect will
come into picture and I told that shear leg happens when the hole sections are not connected
to the member. So, if part of the member is connected then the direct axial tension will first
come to that portion and the shear leg effect will be there in the outstanding leg, which are
not connected.
So, because of shear leg effect the strength is going to be reduced little bit. So we have to
calculate that shear leg effect and then we have to find out the design strength due to rupture
and another scope of failure will be the block shear failure as a hole it may fail due to shear
which is called block shear failure.
So for that also, we have to calculate how the block shear failure is going to happen and what
will be the design strength and then out of this minimum of these three strength will be the
design strength of the member.
273
Lecture 21
Module 5
Design Strength of Tension Member
Hello today I am going to discuss about the codal provisions for calculation of design
strength of members under axial tension. Therefore, as I told in last class that design strength
will be calculated based on three criteria; one is the due to gross yielding of the section, due
to rapture and due to block shear. And the minimum of these three will be the design strength
of the tension member.
So coming to the codal provisions, we will get the design strength calculation of tension
member in clause 6 of IS: 800-2007. So details you can find out from clause 6 that the design
tension T should satisfy the requirement of this Td . Where Td is the design strength of the
member under axial tension and Td will be the least of these three, one is the yielding of gross
section (Tdg), then rapture of critical section (Tdn) and then block shear failure (Tdb).
So on the basis of these three, the Td will be decided. So, Td will be the least of these three
and that Td has to be greater than the factor tensile force coming into the member. So coming
to clause 6.2, we will see that design strength due to gross yielding Tdg can be calculated as,
Tdg = Agfy /m0
274
Where,
fy is the yield stress of material in MPa,
Ag is the gross area of cross-section
 m0 is the partial safety factor of failure in tension by yielding (Table 5, IS 800: 2007).
Similarly we can find out design strength due to rapture of critical section. So this can be
found in clause 6.3 and in clause 6.3.1, you will get design strength in tension of a plate,
Tdn = 0.9Anfu /m1
Where,
fu is the ultimate stress of material in MPa,
An is the net effective area of cross-section
m1 is the partial safety factor of failure in tension at ultimate stress (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
So, for plate in earlier lectures we have seen, how to calculate the net area of the plate means
about the critical section. So this net area will be required to find out the rupture strength of
the section.
275
The design strength of threaded rods in tension,( Tdn ) governed by rupture is given by
Tdn = 0.9Anfu /m1
Where,
An is the net root area at the threaded section.
Similarly for single angle section, now in case of single angle as I told that if it is connected
with some gusset plate, or some other plates, or some other members then shear lag effect
will be going to be occur. So, we have to calculate the T dn value taking care of the shear lag
effect.
Tdn = 0.9Ancfu /m1 + Agofy /m0
Where,
= 1.4 – 0.076 (w/t) (fy /fu) (bs /Lc)  fum0 /fym1
 0.7
Here, w = outstanding leg width,
bs = shear lag width, as shown in figure below.
276
LC = length of the end connection, that is the distance between the outermost bolts in the end
joint measured along the load direction or length of the weld along the load direction.
Here,  is a factor which can be calculated from this formula that is
= 1.4 – 0.076 (w/t) (fy /fu) (bs /Lc) and this should be less than or equal to fum0 /fym1 and
should be greater than or equal to 0.7.
And at the beginning we may not know all the details, so for preliminary sizing we can
calculate Tdn from this formula
Tdn =  Anfu /m1
Here,  = 0.6 for one or two bolts, 0.7 for three bolts and 0.8 for four or more bolts along the
length in the end connection or equivalent weld length.
An = net area of the total cross-section;
Anc = net area of the connected leg;
Ago = gross area of the outstanding leg; and
t = thickness of the leg.
277
For other sections like double angles, channels, I-sections and other rolled steel sections
connected by one or more elements to end gusset is also governed by shear lag effect. The
design tensile strength of such sections as governed by tearing of net section may also be
calculated using equation in clause 6.3.3, where  is the is calculated based on the shear lag
distance bs , and bs is taken from the furthest edge of the outstanding leg to the nearest bolt or
weld line in the connected leg of the cross section. So, for rapture strength calculation other
than the single angle section we can use this clause that is clause 6.3.3.
278
Then the design strength due to block shear can be calculated from clause 6.4 of the IS code,
it is given in clause 6.4.
Bolted Connections
The block shear strength, Tdb of connection shall be taken as the smaller of,
Tdb = Avgfy /3m0 + 0.9Atnfu/m1 (For tension fracture and shear yield)
or
Tdb = 0.9Avnfu /3m1 + Atgfy /m0 (For tension yield and shear fracture)
where
Avg and Avn = minimum gross and net area in shear along bolt line parallel to external force,
respectively (1-2 & 3-4 as shown in Figure above).
Atg and Atn= minimum gross and net area in tension from the bolt hole to the toe of the angle,
end bolt line, perpendicular to the line of force, respectively (2-3 as shown in Figure above),
and fu and fy = ultimate and yield stress of the material, respectively.
279
Now for weld connections Tdb can be checked for welded connections by taking appropriate
section in the member around the end weld and this which can shear off as a block.
Now another thing we have to check that is slenderness ratio, theoretically there should not
be any upper limit of the slenderness ratio because it is under tension if it is compression then
there is a chance of buckling so for that we have to consider the limiting value of slenderness
ratio. But in this case, theoretically we should not, but we consider certain slenderness ratio
from serviceability point of view, because limitation is necessary to prevent undesirable
vibration and lateral movement.
So permissible values of slenderness ratio is given in clause 3.8, table 3 in the IS code. So we
are checking slenderness ratio in case of tension member because to make sure that vibration
is not going to be more from limit state of serviceability point of view also sometimes the
member get reverse load due to wind and earthquake . So in that case slenderness ratio will
be a big factor.
280
So the slenderness value slenderness ratio value are given in table 3 of IS: 800-2007, if we
see when the tension member has reversal of direct stress due to loads other than wind and
seismic it is 180.
Whereas when a member subjected to compressive forces resulting only from a combination
of wind and earthquake actions, provided the deformation of such a member does not
adversely affect the stresses in any part of the structure. In that case, the permissible value of
slenderness ratio is 250.
And, if a member normally acting as a tie in a roof truss or a bracing member which is not
considered effective when subjected to reversal of stress resulting from the action of wind or
earthquake we can consider as 350.
And, when members are always in tension other than pre-tensioned members we can consider
as 400. So this is how the IS code has provided certain limit on maximum effective
slenderness ratio, so that has to be kept in mind.
So that means when we are going to design a tension member not only we have to find out
the strength but also we have to find out whether it is under the permissible limit of
slenderness ratio or not, so both the things we have to see.
So this is how one can calculate the design capacity of a particular section, in tension and
check whether that section is violating the slenderness ratio or not.
281
Lecture 22
Module 5
Strength Calculation of Tension Member
Hello so in today’s lecture we will discuss how to calculate the design strength of a member.
So I will go through one work out example through which we will try to see how to find out
the design strength due to gross yielding of the section, due to rupture of the critical section
and due to block shear. So these three aspects will be seen in the workout example.
And in the workout example we will go through one angle section in which one leg is
connected to the gusset plate that means the shear leg effect will come into picture.
Example:
Two ISA 75×50×8 are connected to a gusset plate on its same side of thickness 10mm by four
M18 grade 4.6 bolts. Find the design tensile strength of the angle if (1) gusset is connected to
the longer leg (2) gusset is connected to the shorter leg.
Solution:
(1) Gusset connected to the longer leg
2 ISA 75 × 50 × 8 connected back to back with its longer length.
282
Thus, the gross area will be Ag = 2 × 938 = 1876 mm2
Strength due to yielding of gross section:
f y × Ag 250 × 1876
T dg= = = 426.36 × 103 N = 426.36 kN
γ m0 1.1
Dia. of bolt = 18 mm
Dia. of hole = 18+2 = 20
Let us assume pitch distance = 50 mm, edge distance = 30 mm
Then we will go to calculation of the strength due to rupture of the critical section. So as
diameter is 18, so hole diameter will be d h diameter of hole become 18 + 2 that is 20 mm and
we can assume pitch distance as say 2.5d that is 50 mm and edge distance e as 1.5d that is 30
mm, so we can use this, ok.
283
Strength governed by rupture of net section:
Anc = (75 - 8/2 - 20) × 8 = 408 mm2
Ago = (50 - 8/2) × 8 = 368 mm2
An = 408 + 368 = 776 mm2
bs w f y 50+ 40−8 50 250

β=1.4−0.076 × × ¿ 1.4−0.076 × × ×
Lc t f u 3 ×50 8 410
= 1.242
284
f u γm 0
Again, β≤ and ≥ 0.7
f y γm1
f u γ m 0 410 ×1.1
= =1.443
f y γ m 1 250 ×1.25
Thus, satisfying above criteria, β=1.242
0.9 f u A nc βf y A go 0.9 × 410 × 408 1. 242×250 × 368

T dn= + ¿ + = 224.31 × 103 N =
γ m1 γ m0 1.25 1.1
224.31 kN
So, the strength due to rupture for two angles = 2 × 224.31 = 448.62 kN
285
α × An × f u 0.8 ×776 × 410

Alternatively, T dn=2× =2 × = 407kN
γ m1 1.25
Strength governed by block shear:
Avg = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30) = 1440 mm2
Avn = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30 – 3.5 × 20)= 880 mm2`
286
Atg = 8 × 35= 280 mm2
[as gauge g = 40 for 75 mm leg; p = 75 – 40 = 35]
Atn = 8 × (35 – 0.5 × 20) = 200 mm2
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 410 ×880 250× 2 80

T db1= + = + = 213.62 × 103 N = 213.62 kN
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3 ×1.25 1.1
Thus, Tdb1 for both the angle will be:

2 × 213.62 kN = 427.24 kN.
287
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 1440 × 250 0.9 × 410× 200
T db2= + = +
√ 3 γ m0 γ m1 √3 ×1.1 1.25
= 248 × 103 N = 248 kN

So, Tdb2 for both the angle will be: 2 × 248 kN = 496 kN.
Thus, the block shear, Tdb = 427.24 kN

Design tensile strength of angle will be least of Tdg , Tdn and Tdb (426.36 kN, 448.62 kN and
427.24 kN) = 426.36 kN.
288
Here we have calculated the strength of the connection where the longer leg is connected.
Now we will see what will be the design strength when the shorter leg is connected to gusset,
this is one thing another thing we will see which one is efficient.
(2) Gusset connected to the shorter leg
Strength due to yielding of gross section:
f y × Ag 250 × 1876
T dg= = = 426.36 × 103 N = 426.36 kN
γ m0 1.1
289
Dia. of bolt = 18 mm
Dia. of hole = 18+2 = 20
Let us assume pitch distance = 50 mm , end distance = 30 mm.
Assuming gauge length for 50 mm leg = 25 mm
Strength governed by rupture of net section:
Anc = (50 - 8/2 - 20) × 8 = 208 mm2
Ago = (75 - 8/2) × 8 = 568mm2
An = 208 + 568 = 776 mm2
290
bs w f y 75+25−8 75 250
β=1.4−0.076 × × ¿ 1.4−0.076 × × × = 1.133
Lc t f u 3× 50 8 410
f u γm 0
f y γm1
f u γ m 0 410 ×1.1
= =1.443
f y γ m 1 250 ×1.25
0.9 f u A nc βf y A go 0.9 × 410 ×208 1 .133 ×250 ×568

T dn= + ¿ + = 207.661 × 103 N =
γ m1 γ m0 1.25 1.1
207.66 kN
So, the strength due to rupture for two angles = 2 × 207.66 = 415.32 kN
291
α × An × f u 0.8 ×776 × 410

Alternatively, T dn=2× =2 × = 407kN
γ m1 1.25
Strength governed by block shear:
Avg = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30) = 1440 mm2
Avn = 8 × (3 × 50 + 30 – 3.5 × 20) = 880 mm2`
Atg = 8 × 25 = 200 mm2 [as gauge g = 25 for 50 mm leg; p = 50 – 25 = 25]
Atn = 8 × (25 – 0.5 × 20) = 120 mm2
292
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 410 ×880 250× 200
T db1= + = + = 195.43 × 103 N = 195.43 kN
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3 ×1.25 1.1
Thus, Tdb1 for both the angle will be: 2 × 195.43 kN = 390.86 kN.
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 1440 × 250 0.9 × 410× 120

T db2= + = + = 224.37 × 103 N = 224.37 kN
√ 3 γ m0 γ m1 √3 ×1.1 1.25
So, Tdb2 for both the angle will be: 2 × 224.37 kN = 448.74 kN.
Thus, the block shear, Tdb = 390.86 kN
293
Design tensile strength of angle will be least of Tdg , Tdn and Tdb (426.36 kN, 415.32 kN and
390.86 kN) = 390.86 kN
Now if we compare that in case of first one the value is coming 426.36 kilonewton and in
case of second one value is coming 390.86 kilonewton, right. And what we see here that if
longer length is connected then the strength is more strength of the joint is more. So
whenever we are using unequal section we should try to join the longer length with the gusset
plate to get the strength more with same material, right. So, this is how we can calculate the
design strength of a member which is subjected to axial tension and the three criteria we will
follow and the least of these three will be the design strength of the member, thank you.
294
295
Lecture 23
Module 5
Strength of Tension Members and Weld Connection
Hello today we are going to start the design calculation of tension member where it is
connected with welded joint. So, in last classes we have gone through one workout example
where the strength of the tension member has been calculated using bolt connections. Now
same thing we will be doing for weld connections. In case of weld connection how the net
effective area is going to change with respect to bolt connections, how the shear lag distance
is going to change those things we will come across and we will also see that block shear how
to calculate, how to calculate that Atn, Atg, Avn, Avg.
So those parameters will be calculated in todays lecture and we will see how what is the
difference between bolt connection and weld connection with respect to strength calculation
of tension member.
Example:
An ISA 90×60×6 angle of Fe 410 grade steel is connected to a 10 mm thick gusset plate by
weld as shown in the figure below. Calculate the design tensile strength of the angle if gusset
is connected to the (a) longer leg (b) shorter leg.
296
Solution:
(a) Gusset is connected to longer leg
Gross area, Ag for ISA 90 × 60 × 6 = 865 mm2. [From IS hand book: SP: 6(1)-1964]
The net area of connected leg, Anc = (90 - 6/2) × 6 = 522 mm2
Gross area of outstanding leg, Ago = (60 - 6/2) × 6 = 342 mm2
(i) Tensile strength governed by yielding of gross section: [Clause 6.2]
f y × Ag 250 × 86 5 −3
T dg= = ×10 = 196.6 kN
γ m0 1.1
(ii) Tensile strength governed by rupture of net section:

Therefore, the length of outstanding leg will be, w = 60 mm.
So, the shear lag width, bs = 60 mm.
The average length of weld along the direction of load
= Lc = (75+75) /2= 75 mm. Thus,
bs w f y
β=1.4−0.076 × ×
Lc t f u
60 60 250
= 1.4 – 0.076× × × = 1.029
75 6 410
f u γm 0
f y γm1
297
f u γ m 0 410 ×1.1
= =1.443
f y γ m 1 250 ×1.25

0.9 f u A nc βf y A go
T dn= +
γ m1 γ m0
0.9 × 410 ×522 1. 029 ×250 ×342

So, T dn= + = 234× 103 N = 234 kN
1.25 1.1
298
α × An × f u
Alternatively, T dn=
γ m1
Here, An =Anc +Ago = 522+342=864 mm2
0.8× 864 × 410

Thus, T dn = = 226.71 × 103 N = 226.7 kN
1.25
(iii) Tensile strength governed by block shear:

Assuming average length of weld on each side as 75 mm
Avg = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2 [As gusset plate thickness = 10 mm]
Avn = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Atg = 90 × 10 = 900 mm2
Atn = 90 × 10 = 900 mm2
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 1500 × 250 0.9 × 410× 90 0
T db1= + = +
√3 γ m0 γm 1 √3 ×1.1 1.25
= 462.5 kN
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 1500× 410 250× 90 0
T db2= + = +
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3× 1.25 1.1
= 460.2 kN
So, Tdb = 460.2 kN
299
Thus, the design tensile strength of the angle = least of (i), (ii) and (iii) = 196.6 kN.
300
(b) Gusset connected to shorter leg
The net area of connected leg, Anc = (60 - 6/2) × 6 = 342 mm2
Net cross sectional area, An = 522 + 342 = 864 mm2
f y × Ag
i) Tensile strength governed by yielding of gross section: T dg= =
γ m0
250 × 86 5
×10−3 = 196.6 kN
1.1
301
(ii) Tensile strength governed by rupture of net section:
Here, the section is connected through its shorter leg.
Therefore, the length of outstanding leg will be, w = 90 mm.
So, the shear lag width, bs = 90 mm.
The average length of weld along the direction of load

= Lc = (75+75) /2= 75 mm. Thus,
bs w f y
β=1.4−0.076 × ×
Lc t f u
302
90 90 250
= 1.4 – 0.076× × × = 0.566
75 6 410
f u γm 0
f y γm1
f u γ m 0 410 ×1.1
= =1.443
f y γ m 1 250 ×1.25

0.9 f u A nc βf y A go
T dn= +
γ m1 γ m0
0.9 × 410 ×342 0.7 × 250× 522

So, T dn= + = 184 kN
1.25 1.1
α × An × f u 0.8× 864 × 410

Alternatively, T dn= = = 226.7 kN
γ m1 1.25
(iii) Tensile strength governed by block shear:
303
Avg = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Avn = 2 × 75 × 10 = 1500 mm2
Atg = 60 × 10 = 600 mm2
Atn = 60 × 10 = 600 mm2
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 1500 × 250 0.9 × 410× 6 0 0

T db1= + = +
√3 γ m0 γm 1 √3 ×1.1 1.25
= 373.9 kN
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 1500× 410 250× 60 0

T db2= + = +
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3× 1.25 1.1
= 392 kN
So, Tdb = 373.9 kN
304
Thus, the design tensile strength of the angle = least of (i), (ii) and (iii) = least of (196.36, 184
and 373.9 ) = 184 kN.
But in this case we could see that the critical strength are coming due to rapture of the net
section that is 184 kilonewton, right. Moreover, we could see that this critical strength is less
in this case, means, when shorter length is connected with the gusset plate with respect to the
earlier one where longer leg is was connected to the gusset plate.
So in this example means through this workout example we could see that efficiency of the
same angle can be increased if the connection is done properly connection can be done
properly in a sense that when the longer leg of the angle section is connected with the gusset
plate then we could increase the efficiency of the section. Also from earlier lecture if we
compare with the earlier calculation then we can find that weld connections is taking little
higher load then the bolt connection.
So from these two examples means examples from the strength calculation of bolt connection
and weld connection for the connection with longer leg, connection with shorter leg, four
permutation combination we could see the best option is connection should be done with
longer leg and if possible with the weld connection. In that case maximum efficiency can be
obtained.
305
Lecture 24
Module 5
Steps for Design of Tension Members
Now I am going to discuss about certain steps which we should follow in case of design of
tension member. So in last few lectures we have seen that how to calculate the design
strength of the tension member and we have seen that tension member may fail due to its
gross yielding, it may fail due to rupture of the net section, also it may fail due to block shear.
So these three aspects we have to see as well as one another thing we have to that is the
slenderness ratio means radius of gyration and allowable slenderness ratio.
The member which we are going to consider whether it is exceeding its limiting value or not
that is necessary from serviceability criteria point of view. Therefore these four aspects we
have to keep in mind while designing the things. So if we can develop methodology
methodology means the steps that what are the steps we will follow whether we first calculate
the slenderness ratio and we will try to find out the section or we will calculate the design
strength due to block shear, then we will find out the section that we have to decide, right.
So in today’s lecture I will give an overview of the steps to be followed and then I will come
to the some flow chart that how if I write a program then how flow chart can be developed
and how algorithm we can develop at our own, so that we can make a program and we can
make it useful we can make it useful in the sense that we have seen that design calculation
Tds we have to calculate lot of things, lot of complicated expressions are there.
So when we are going to design means it is a repetitive process repetitive process means we
can start with certain angle section or certain other section but that may fail or may be
overdesigned. So we may have to reiterate again, right. So doing all the things for every
member it is Tds job. So if we can develop a program at our own in an customized manner
then it will be useful and easier and helpful for us for designing a tension member in an
economic way and in a short time, right.
306
So if we come to the steps we will see that first step is we have to find out the gross area
because the design because the load acting on the member is given that is Tu the ultimate
load means the factor load that is given if the factor load is given then how do I decide the
member, right. For a particular member if some factor load is given then how to start that can
be started with the use of gross yielding of the section from that we can find out a
approximate area because in our experience we have seen you can see in the previous
example also we have seen that the least strength comes generally due to yielding.
So first we will try with yielding, we will try to find out the gross area then we will choose a
section and then we will go for other sent criteria we will see whether it is fulfilling the
criteria of not if it is not fulfilling then we have to go for higher section otherwise we can
make use of it, right.
So first we will find out the gross area to carry given factor load Tu considering the strength
in yielding from the following expression that is we know Tu is the means Tdg is the Agfy by
gamma m0. So from that equation I can write that Ag is equal to Tu into gamma m0 by fy,
right here Tu is the factor load that load coming in the member with certain factor.
Then from this Ag the gross area we can find out the suitable shape of section means first we
have to design whether we are going for angle section, or channel section, or some other
section, right. So depending on the shape of section we will go to the IS handbook and then
we will find out what is the gross area available for a particular section, right.
307
So first we will find out the shape of the section whether it is I section, or channel section, or
angle section then we will find out what should be the section size, right. So that section size
can be found from this gross area if we know the gross area then we will go to corresponding
area of that angle section or other section and then we will choose a section whose gross area
is slightly more than the gross area obtained in step 1, right.
So member what we will be choosing its gross area will be more than the gross area obtained
in step 1, because it has to satisfy this criteria, right and I mentioned already that usually if
minimum edge and pitch distance is maintained, strength in yielding gives least value, right.
So design will be safe if gross area provided is greater than the gross area required so here
gross area required is this and we will provide slightly higher gross area and accordingly we
will choose a particular section depending on the requirement, right.
Then what we will do one section is chosen section is chosen means two things we are
choosing one is shape and its size, shape means whether it is angle section or channel section,
or some built up section this is one thing and then size what should be the size, size of the
section should be in such a way its area should be more than this area required area, required
gross area, right.
And then we can find out the number of bolts or the welding length required and we can
arrange the bolts.
So what we will do next that we can find out a particular bolt means we can choose a
diameter of bolt and then we can find out the pitch, edge distance, right and then we can find
308
out what is the shear strength of this bolt Vdsb shear strength of the bolt, then bearing
strength of the bolt Vdpb, right.
So from this we can find out the bolt strength and then we can go to find the number of bolt
required, right and this number of bolt we can find out from the total load coming that Tu by
the shear strength, ok. So shear strength oh sorry strength of the bolt so say Vb, so if Vb is the
strength of the bolt and Tu is the factor load then I can find out the number of bolt if we are
going to use bolt connection.
And if we are going to use weld connection then also we have to find out the weld length
assuming size of the weld, we can assume certain size of the weld depending on the plate
thickness or angle thickness we can assume certain size of the weld and according to the size
of the weld we can find out the strength depending on the material properties of the weld we
are using. And then we can find out the length required to withstand that much tensile load
that is Tu, ok.
So in second step what we can do sorry in third step what we can do we can find out the
number of bolts and its positions that means how we are going to make it whether it is chain
bolting or zig-zag bolting, so those things we will see and what will be its pitch distance,
what will be edge distance, so all these things we will fix or if we go for weld connection
what will be the weld length distribution in top and bottom and what will be the size of weld,
what will be the length of weld so everything will be decided, right.
So in step three we have to do that because if we do not do that we will not be able to
calculate Anc value and Ago value, net area of the connected leg and gross area of the
outstanding length also we cannot find out the shear lag width unless we know shear lag
width we cannot find out the factor beta then we cannot find out the strength due to rapture
that is Tdn, also later we cannot find out the block shear strength.
309
So to find those things we have to make detail of the connections, right. So once we do that in
step 3 we can go further to step 4 that is in step 4 we can find out the yielding of the gross
section that means Tdg, then rapture at critical section we can calculate this also, then
strength in block shear, right. So these three we will consider and we have to see the Tu value
the load acting on the member the tensile load that should be less than these three, this Tdg,
Tdn, and Tdb, ok this has to be less.
That means so it has to be less if it is not less then what we will do we have to increase the
size of the section, right. So if any of the above strength become less than the factored tensile
force so so if if any of the strength become less than the factored shear force Tu then we have
to increase the size of the section, right if it is more than the Tu then find that means if design
strength is more than the applied load then it is fine otherwise we have to increase the size of
the section and we have to repeat 3 step 3 we have to repeat, that means step 3 we will do
again and again we will go for step 4, right.
So what we could see here that we have to find out the yielding of gross section, rapture of
critical section and strength in block shear and these three strength should be greater than the
Tu otherwise we have to increase the section size and we have to repeat the steps so that this
this criteria is fulfilled.
310
Next what we can do in step 6, that if we see the if the design strength that means minimum
of these three in step 4, is too high compare to factored load then also we can decrease the
section size suitably and repeat from step 3. That means if we see the design strength is quite
higher than the applied load applied load means the Tu the axial tension if the design strength
is quite high design strength means least of Tdg, Tdn and Tdb that is the design strength, if
design strength is quite high then the Tu value that applied load then it will be a conservative
design that means it will be uneconomic whatever section is required we have consider bigger
section.
So what we can do we have to means we can go with this one or if we make if we want to
make economic design then we have to reduce section size and again we have to follow from
step 3, right.
And once it is over we can check the slenderness ratio of the member and the limiting value
is given in table 3 of IS: 800-2007. Now if the value of slenderness ratio exceeds the value of
given in the code, then this is not ok that means what we have to do then we have to increase
the size of the section and redesign redesign means again we have to go to step 3 and we have
to check all the things, right. So these are the steps which we have to follow for designing a
tension member.
311
Next I will show uhh the flow chart diagram of the of the developed algorithm and I will
show some screenshot of the developed code and one program I will run and I will show how
the things are means outputs are coming and how we can make it useful, right. So it has been
developed in MATLAB program and also it is graphical user interface based program, so as it
is GUI based so it will be user friendly means user can easily make useful of this program
and they can find out the intended section due to a particular load.
So in flow chart if we see the flow of the program will be like this this is basically based on
the steps whatever I have discussed in earlier slides that is first what we will do is the
calculation of cross section require that is from the gross yielding we can find out what is the
312
gross area require that is Ag once that is find out then what we can do we can decide means
we can we have to decide whether we are going for bolt connection or weld connection.
So from gross area we can find out the smallest angle with cross section area greater than the
cross section area calculated or taken before and thickness of length of connected leg larger
than taken before, ok.
So as per the requirement with there we are going for bolt connections or for weld connection
the program will flow accordingly if we go for (weld) bolt connection then we have to see
whether length connected leg is bigger enough to fit the bolt if not then we have to go and we
have to again increase the section size otherwise we can go for calculation of number of bolt,
ok.
So after that we will go for calculation of design strength of angle due to net section rapture.
So (net) rapture of net section we can calculate the design strength in other way also we can
start with welding. So from that we can find out the minimum weld length require and weld
distribution also we have to do then we will find out the rapture strength. That means once
the section is selected either we will go for weld connections or we will go for bolt
connections accordingly number of bolts and its distribution can be decided and then rapture
strength can be calculated or if we use weld connection then also we can distribute the
requirement of weld length properly and then we can find out rapture strength.
So as per the necessity we will follow the path, that means when we will right the program
we will right in such a way that as per the choice of the user it will flow the path.
313
Next is we will calculate that is angle safe in next section of rapture that means the rapture
strength we calculated in earlier step. Now if rapture strength is less than the applied force
applied tensile force then we have to go to the earlier step to increase the section size, right. If
it is not less than we will go for either welding or bolting as we have decided, that means if it
is bolt then what we will do that we will find out the gauge distance and other things to find
out the block shear so we will calculate the block shear.
And then if block shear due to block shear it is going to fail then what we can do we can
change the gauge distance and we can redesign it, right means without changing the size of
the section otherwise if it is not going to fail then we will go next step. Similarly here also in
case of welding we check for block shear then if angle is safe then fine if not then either we
will increase the length of the weld and then we will recheck or we will go for higher section
whatever we feel we can do and if it is safe then we will go to next step next step means for
bolt case also we will go to next step, for weld also we can go to next step.
314
So in next step so what we have seen that the strength due to block shear, strength due to
rapture is more than the the applied load, if it is so then it has come to this step, if it is no then
it has gone to the earlier step to increase the section size, so once it is over the strength
calculation is over we will go for check for slenderness ratio. So the slenderness ratio limit
we know from the codal provisions and if the slenderness ratio is less than the allowable then
it is fine if it is no then we have to go for increase of the section size, so that the slenderness
ratio is becoming more, right.
And if slenderness ratio is less than allowable then we can say that angle is ok. So in this way
one can flow its program so that he can write the program and find out the intended
calculations.
315
Now I will show some snapshot of the developed program as I told that develop program was
done using MATLAB and in MATLAB you have options so this programs were developed by
some of my students during summer summer intensive course. So in fact you can develop in
other way means according to your requirement in the industry or in your case, so you can
decide what should be the GUI and what are the options you want, right. Here we have given
certain options like if you see option is that one is single angle section with bolt connections
and single angle section with weld connections that means according to our option chosen we
can find out the design calculation, so one is the single angle section with bolt connections or
single angle section with weld connections.
Another option is two angle sections placed back to back on the same side of gusset plate,
right and two angle sections placed back to back on the opposite side of gusset plate. So these
are four options at that time we have considered you can choose any other type also like here
only we have considered the angle sections, you can consider channel sections and you can
find out its design strength also, you can consider any other sections also as you wish, just for
demonstration purpose we have used this and then once you choose a particular type then you
click on this give input values. So once if you click then you can go to next one, right.
316
So here another snapshots I have shown that is if you choose this one that is that is if you
choose two angle sections placed back to back, so it will be like this on the same side of
gusset plate. Again if the angle sections are chosen on the opposite side of gusset plate it will
be like this. So for different options different pictures have been given, so that the user can
understand properly.
Now when we go next we can see that different inputs are asked by the program, one is the
factor load in kilonewton, ok so you have to provide certain factor load, right. Then length of
the tension member that is effective length effective length also you have to consider and you
have to put the allowable slenderness ratio that is available in code. So allowable slenderness
317
ratio in particular case what is the allowable slenderness ratio that (())(25:37) also enter by
the user, right. So these three inputs you have to give, one is the factor load and then effective
length and also the allowable slenderness ratio, right.
So next the properties of steel we have to enter, properties of steel means what type of what
grade of steel we are going to use what grade of steel means you can use that ultimate tensile
stress that is fu, what is the value of fu in MPa and yield stress in MPa, right. So these two we
have to enter or what we can do if we check this box if we make a tick to this box then
automatically it will take the ultimate tensile strength value of Fe410 grade of steel. So one
automatic value is given otherwise if you want other type of properties you can enter this.
Then again partial safety factor partial safety factor can be chosen as per the IS code in table
5 whatever given if we choose this then partial safety factor can be obtained automatically
otherwise we can provide our own partial safety factor gamma m1 and gamma m0 is here, in
place of 1.25 and 1.1 we can provide other partial safety factor also, right. So to make it
generalize it has been made.
Next is the properties of bolt, if bolt connections are there then these these things will come,
if it is not bolt connection then this screen will not come, right. So properties of bolt either we
can use 4.6 grade bolt or 8.8 grade bolt these are means if you can choose this radio button
then automatically its properties will be taken, otherwise we have to provide the tensile
strength in MPa here that option is also available, right.
Then diameter of bolt you have to choose a particular diameter of bolt which you are going to
use and then you can provide the pitch distance and edge distance pitch, distance and edge
distance can be taken different way that is either you can provide the pitch distance means
user can make definition of means make some value of pitch distance and edge distance or it
can allow the program to calculate the values or means that is P is equal to 2.5d and 1.5d,
right as per IS code it can take.
Then partial safety factor gamma mb of the bolt, partial safety factor also as per table 5 you
can choose or you can customize means in place of gamma mb 1.25 you can provide some
other value also, ok that is also possible. Then as we have chosen angle section because this
program are developed only for angle section, so in case of angle section we have to define
whether it is equal angle or unequal angle. If equal angle fine otherwise if it is unequal angle
then you have two options that outstanding leg will be larger or outstanding leg will be
318
smaller because which leg is being connected depending on that its shear lag width will be
calculated and other things also will be calculated accordingly that is why you have to give
input to the program here that outstanding leg is larger or smaller and then you can go to
next, ok.
So after putting the value you can go to next so in next you can see that some values have
been put here like factor load 180 kilonewton we have given, effective length we have given
2500 in millimeter, allowable stress we have given. Then we have check the that we have
used the Fe410 grade steel, so it has come accordingly means ultimate tensile stress and yield
stress has come accordingly.
And partial safety factor also has been consider as per the IS code and 4.6 grade bolt has been
consider, so accordingly the ultimate tensile strength has been obtained. Then diameter of
bolt then as per IS code we have consider pitch value. So in this way we have consider the
input values, right like here we have told that connected leg larger, so connected leg is larger
we have considered, right. So once these inputs are given you can go back to means you can
go to next ok.
319
If you put next so all the data whatever we have put is giving here, ok all the data. Also so
data means that what are the load and length, so partial safety factor and stresses, bolt
properties, so everything is given and section is means which one is going to be connected
larger leg or smaller leg, ok. So these are already given.
Now another option we have to tell that design for economical section or check for a
particular section that means if you tell that check for a particular section then you have to
give a particular section size say 90 by 60 by 6, if you give that then it will means program
will tell you whether this section is safe or not, ok. And if you say design for economic
section then the program will start with the minimum one and it will go on increasing then it
will give you the just the section size which was which is going to pass, that means the
minimum section size which is safe that will be given, which is called economic section.
So the beauty of this program is you can find out a economic section and you do not have to
do manual calculations means n number of iterations you do not have to go program will do
automatically and accordingly you can find out the most suitable section in terms of
economy, ok. Or if a particular sections you have to provide you do not have other option
you have you should you have to know only only that particular section which is available
whether it is safe or not, that also can be done by giving this option, right.
320
So according to the requirement either you can choose a section, right then if you click on
this check then it will tell you that whether it is ok or not, means when you are giving a
particular section and if you are putting a check means you can click in check then it will give
you a dialogue of check that section is safe or section is unsafe, ok if it is unsafe again you
can click another section then you can try that whether it is you check if it is ok fine, if it is
not ok then you can go for again next one.
So by this way you can check for particular section and we can find out, right and you see
here in drop box different sections are given as available in the IS code as SP6 as available in
the SP6 we have made in database means all the properties of the say angle sections or
channel sections are fit in database so all the things will come if you select a particular
section is all properties are as per the codal provisions or properties are stored that will be
used in the program, right.
And if you say that economic section then it will find out the economic section particular
economic section then again you may act means you may want to find out what is the
intermediate calculation, right. So what are the calculations happen that can be found if you
use this the open output file if you open output file then the number of iterations the what are
the things have been done all outputs will be is written in the program, means in the output
file so all outputs will be displayed there, right in a file in a word file. So in word file you can
get the output and you can check manually or means one or two you can check to get
confidence that program is ok, right.
321
And also help file is there where if you click you will get the theory whatever has been used
how it has been used all the things it has been made and if you are not satisfied with this, then
you can go to again redesign means if you go to redesign then the earlier page will show and
you have to change the design parameter, if you change the design parameter, then again if
you redo then you can find out the new sections and you can make it.
So this is a sample input and output if you see this we have done in the program, these are the
(output) means input we have taken if you remember the screen we used this as input, right.
So after providing this input one can get the output.
322
Output means so step by step this intermediate calculations should be shown like required
area of the section as per the applied load that has been given, then it has started with this the
section 65 by 45 by 8, so whose sectional area is 817 millimeter square and if you
(remember) if you see we want this one and we have just given 817 that means just next to
this value, right. So what computer has that means the algorithm has done that it has searched
the value which are more than 792 section, ok. So according to that it could find that ISA 65
by 45 by 8 is coming immediately above this 792 millimeter square.
Then it has calculated the shearing strength and bearing strength of the bolt and then number
of bolt also it could find out, right and then the gross yielding of the section it could find if
you see 185 where 180 was the Tu value that applied load. Then check for net section in case
of net section it has calculated that has number of bolts are 4, so alpha value has been taken
as 0.8, so An value Tdn value has been calculated and it has seen that Tdn is 167 kilonewton
that means it is less than the value given Tu that is 180. So as it is less than 180, so section is
not safe that means it is going to next section, right.
So it will go to next section next higher section is sorry next higher section is this one the 70
by 45 by 8 and its gross sectional area is 858 that means just for next higher section it has
calculated all all the things and then it found that Tdn value is coming 178 kilonewton that
means still it is not ok that means we have to go again next higher section, right.
323
So for next higher section in test case 3 Tdn value is coming 192, which is more than 180 that
means this time it is ok. So every time it is iterating all those calculations, repeating all those
calculations and then finding the value, right. So in this case Tdn value it is getting 192, so
what it can go it can go for next calculation that is Tdb block shear strength, ok.
So block shear failure calculation should be done, so for block shear again Avg, Atg, Avn, Atn
all these things should be calculated and then it is calculating the Tdb2 value is coming just
180, right so this is ok just 180.329, ok. That means from here we can see that the just
minimum section which is required has been found, right and then slenderness ratio point of
view also it is ok that means this is (ok) this section is safe, right. So it is the optimum
324
sections or economic section and under present load and configuration this is the best suitable
sections we can tell, ok.
Now we can means we can imagine that if we have to do calculations of all manually it
would take lot of time, right to get the economic sections because we do not know which
section is going to be safe. So we have to try with different sections, so for so many
repetitions it takes lot of time so that can be saved if once we can develop a algorithm, if once
we can provide a program then means while writing a program it will take little time but once
it is written and tested then n number of times we can use it without wasting any time and
confidently we can make it useful, right.
Now again I will show for fillet connection very quickly I will go through this that if we use
fillet weld then in case of bolt these will come these properties will come, right like sorry in
case of bolt in case of fillet weld that whether it is shop welding or site welding accordingly it
can consider the partial safety factor then on two sides parallel to axis of the load or three
sides that you have to decide accordingly this can be calculated, weld thickness you have to
give and then again similar things that equal or unequal section and other properties of steel
which earlier has been given same thing we can give. So accordingly all entries can be made
through this GUI and we can make it useful.
325
And then if we see for the same value whatever we have consider in case of bolt connections
we have used same for weld connection then we can see that output is coming like this in test
case 1 we could see that the total weld length is coming 272 millimeter and Lw1 and Lw2 we
are getting this means weld length distribution that is necessary for calculating the weld
strength, shear leg distance and other things, right.
326
So once weld distribution is over we can find out Tdg value now in this case you can see Tdg
value is coming ok and then Tdn value is also coming ok unlike bolt connections in case of
bolt connection it was going to fail but in this case it is ok and Tdb value also we could see
that Tdb value are also quite high, right. So here you see that in one iteration we could find
out that the section 65 by 45 by 8 is ok under the present load and configuration, so this is
how one can decide.
So in short what we can see that this is a sample algorithm and program we have developed
and it was developed by my students during summer (intern) intensive and this program may
have certain mistakes means we have to rectify that also however I have checked with details
I could not find mistakes so however means when you will be writing program you do
program as you feel means comfortable that means either you can write program only for bolt
connection then separately only for weld connection, or a same program in which you will
make bolt connection, weld connection together.
Similarly you can make the connections where angle sections means two angles are placed
back to back of the gusset plate or at the same side of the gusset plate. So either different
programs you can make or in same program different functions you can made and you can
make a single program, right and then as per your requirement and choice you can make
useful means GUI means in the GUI you can provide certain inputs, ok and then from those
input you can provide output of intermediate calculations so that the user can get confidence
on the use of this and we can (remem) we can feel that whatever calculations are doing by the
program is ok because manually also it is coming same.
327
So that options you have to give so that the user can whenever he feels doubtful he can check
that means he can check a program and make sure that your program is correct, right. So once
you make the program then means for example for tension member then you do not have to
means waste more time for this once you have developed n number of times use this and
every time you can use you can get, you can safe your time and you can get an economic
sections, right.
So I will encourage participants or those who are listening this video to develop their own
program whatever language they find comfortable that whether C, Fortran, or MATLAB or
any other Python program whatever you feel you can develop and it may not be possible to
make GUI but you can make in other way GUI may not be possible you enter the program in
screen and find out the results so that way also one can make it, right and when you will be
writing program it will be more clear to you how the programs are running, how the logics
are going to be developed and how you are applying a logic one by one to satisfy the design
criteria of all the things that will be clear, right. So with this I would like to conclude todays
lecture, thank you.
328
Lecture 25
Module 5
Design Calculation of Tension Members
Hello today I am going to solve a design example manually. In last class we have discussed
about the steps followed for design of tension also computer algorithm has been shown
Example:
A tension member 3 m long carries a factored tensile load of 200 kN. Design a suitable
single angle unequal section when connection is made with (i) 20 mm diameter bolts of
grade 4.6 and (ii) fillet weld. Assume longer leg to be connected with plate.
Solution:
Step 1:
P 200× 103
Approximate gross area required = A g= = = 880 mm2
f y / γ m 0 250/1.1
Let use ISA 75 × 50 × 10 with gross area, Ag as 1152 mm2

Anc = (75 - 10/2 - 22) × 10 = 480 mm2
Ago = (50 - 10/2) × 10 = 450 mm2
An = 480 + 450 = 930 mm2
329
Design strength due to yielding of gross section
f y × Ag 250 × 115 2
T dg= = = 261.8 × 103 N = 261.8 kN > 200 kN;
γ m0 1.1
so ok.
330
Step 2:
a) For bolt connection
Cross sectional area of 20 mm diameter bolt
= 0.78 × π/4 × 202 = 245 mm2.
f ub
(n A +n A )
Shear strength of M20 bolt in single shear = √ 3 n nb s sb =
γ mb
(400 / √ 3)×(1 ×245)

1.25
= 45.3 × 103 N = 45.3 kN
Bearing strength of bolts = 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb

Here, thickness of the angle is 10 mm;
Let the edge distance = 30 mm and pitch = 50 mm
Thus, kb = lesser of [30/(3 × 22), 50/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1] = 0.454
Bearing strength of bolt = 2.5 × 20 × 10 × 0.454 × 400/1.25 = 72.64 × 103 N = 72.64 kN
So bolt value = 45.3 kN
331
Step 3:
No. of bolts required = 200/45.3 = 4.4
Thus, use 5 bolts of 20 mm diameter in one line at pitch of 50 mm and edge distance of 30
mm.
Step 4:
Design strength governed by rupture of net section
Here, length of outstanding leg is: w = 50 mm and w1 = 40 mm.
332
So the shear lag width, bs = w + w1 – t = 50 + 40 – 10 = 80 mm.
Distance between end bolts , Lc = 4 × 50 = 200 mm.
bs w f y 8 0 50 250
β=1.4−0.076 × × ¿ 1.4−0.076 × × = 1.307
Lc t f u 200 10 410
f u γm 0
f y γm1
f u γ m 0 410 ×1.1
= =1.443
f y γ m 1 250 ×1.25
333
0.9 f u A nc βf y A go 0.9 × 410 × 480 1.307 ×250 × 450
T dn= + ¿ +
γ m1 γ m0 1.25 1.1
= 275.37× 103 N = 275.37 kN
α × An × f u 0.8 × 930 ×410

Also, T dn= ¿ = 244 × 103 N = 244 kN
γ m1 1.25
Design strength governed by block shear

Avg = 10 × (4 × 50 + 30) = 2300 mm2
Avn = 10 × (4 × 50 + 30 – 4.5 × 22) = 1310 mm2
Atg = 10 × 40 = 400 mm2
[assuming gauge g = 35 for 75 mm leg; p = 75 – 35 = 40]
Atn = 10 × (40 – 0.5 × 22) = 290 mm2
334
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 1310× 410 250× 400
T db1= + = + = 314.2 kN
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3× 1.25 1.1
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 2300 × 250 0.9 × 410× 290

T db2= + = + = 387.4 kN
√ 3 γ m0 γ m1 √3 × 1.1 1.25
So, Tdb = 314.2 kN

335
Thus, the design tensile strength of angle = 261.8 kN > 200 kN.
Hence, the selected angle is safe.
Again, the minimum radius of gyration (rmin) of the angle ISA 75×50×10 = 10.6 mm
The maximum slenderness ratio, λmax = Leff / rmin = 3 × 103 / 10.6 = 283 < 350.
So, the angle is safe.
Solution (Connected with fillet weld):

(a) Strength due to yielding of gross section
P 200× 1000
Approximate area required = A g= = = 880 mm2
f y / γ m0 250 /1.1
336
Use ISA 75 × 50 × 10 with Ag = 1152 mm2 and cx = 26 mm
Anc = (75 - 10/2) × 10 = 700 mm2
Ago = (50 - 10/2) × 10 = 450 mm2
f y × Ag 250 × 1152
T dg= = = 261.8 × 103 N = 261.8 kN > 200 kN;
γ m0 1.1
So, section is safe.
(b) Strength governed by rupture of net section

Here, shear lag width, bs = 50 mm. Assuming average weld length, Lw as 165 mm
337
bs w f y 50 50 250
β=1.4−0.076 × × ¿ 1.4−0.076 × × = 1.329
Lc t f u 165 10 410
0.9 f u A nc βf y A go 0.9 × 410 ×700 1.32 9 ×250 × 450

T dn= + ¿ + =342.56 kN
γ m1 γ m0 1.25 1.1
An = Anc + Ago = 700 + 450 = 1150 mm2
α × An × f u 0.8 × 1150 × 410

Also, T dn= ¿ = 301.8 kN
γ m1 1.25
(c) Strength governed by block shear
338
Avg = 10 × 165 × 2 = 3300 mm2
Avn = 10 × 165 × 2 = 3300 mm2
Atg = 10 × 75 = 750 mm2
Atn = 10 × 75 = 750 mm2
0.9 A vn f u f y A tg 0.9× 410 ×3300 250× 750

T db1= + = +
√ 3 γm 1 γm 0 √ 3× 1.25 1.1
= 732.88 × 103 N = 732.88 kN
A vg f y 0.9 f u Atn 3300 × 250 0.9 × 410× 750

T db2= + = +
√ 3 γ m0 γ m1 √3 × 1.1 1.25
339
= 654.41 × 103 N = 654.41 kN
Thus, Tdb = 654.41 kN
Design tensile strength of angle = 261.36 kN > 200 kN, hence safe
Again, the minimum radius of gyration (rmin) of the angle ISA 75×50×10 = 10.6 mm
The maximum slenderness ratio, λmax = Leff / rmin = 3 × 103 / 10.6 = 283 < 350.
Therefore, the angle is safe.
That means the section which we have considered that is 75 × 50× 10 in case of bolt
connection as well as in case of weld connection it is safe, ok so this is how we can design a
section under tensile load. Now this is not the end of the design because in case of weld
connection, we have to calculate the weld length and we have to distribute the weld length
properly. We know that this section is ok but what should be the weld distribution, what
should be the weld length, we have to find out.
Weld distribution:
75−26
Force resisted by weld at lower side of angle P1 = 200 × = 130.7 kN
75
26
Force resisted by weld at upper side of angle P2 = 200 × = 69.3 kN
75
Let use 6 mm weld. So the throat thickness of the weld will be (te) = .707 × 6 = 4.24 mm
340
P1 1 30 .7 ×103
Length required at lower side Lw1 = te f u = 4.24 ×410 = 163 mm
√ 3 γ mw √3 × 1.25
P2 69.3 ×10
3
Length required at upper side Lw2 = te f u = 4.24 ×410 = 86 mm

√ 3 γ mw √3 × 1.25
Here, average length of weld = (163+86)/2 = 124.5 mm
bs w f y
Thus, a ctual β=1.4−0.076 × ×
Lc t f u
50 50 250
¿ 1.4−0.076 × × = 1.307
124.5 10 410
341
0.9 f u A nc βf y A go 0.9 × 410 ×700 1.307 × 250× 450
T dn= + ¿ + =340.31 kN
γ m1 γ m0 1.25 1.1
And T dn > T u =200 kN . So ok.
So, this is how we can design a member due to axial tensile force and when we are going to
design, at the end we have to draw a diagram showing the distribution of the bolt or
distribution of the weld length. The total length of the gusset plate, what we are using
according to the required pitch and edge distance should be shown in terms of diagram so that
it will be easier to understand by the site engineer, ok. So, with this I like to conclude todays
lecture thank you.
342
Lecture 26
Module 6
Design of Gusset Plate
Hello today I will restrict my lecture on design of gusset plate, gusset plate is a plate which is
used to connect several members meeting at a joint, gusset plates are provided when more
than one member, means, at least two members are joined.
Gusset plate if we see in the picture it looks like this, say for example in a truss member when
more than two or more than one member are joined, here four members are joined together.
Now in this figure we can see several aspects. First of all these are angle sections so its C g of
all the members should meet at a particular point so that the eccentricity does not generate, so
that we have to keep in mind.
The size of the gusset plate actually depends on the number of bolts used or weld length of
weld used to join the section. Say for example suppose for this case we are seeing that four
number of bolts are there, right so the length of gusset plate on this direction we have to
decide on the basis of the number of bolts and number of bolts are decided on the basis of the
nominal diameter of bolt & magnitude of the force.
343
While designing we have to keep in mind that the gusset plate length should be as less as
possible so that the material for gusset plate is minimized. Another point is that as I told that
gusset plate thickness of the gusset plate should be little more than the member itself.
So if I look back to the design criteria we can see first is the shape and size of a gusset plate is
decided on the basis of direction of members meeting at the joint. Then the plate size is
decided to meet specification of pitch and edge distance.
Another thing is, the gusset plates are designed actually to resist shear mainly shear and direct
and flexible stress acting on the critical section. So when we will be going for designing we
have to keep in mind that the gusset plates should not fail due to shear which are resisting
shear and the direct tensile forces coming into the gusset plate. And I told that it is a usual
practice to provide thickness of gusset plate equal to or higher than the members that have to
be connected by the gusset plate that also we have to keep in mind.
344
Example:
Design the gusset plate of thickness 12 mm at the joint O of a lower chord of truss as
shown in the figure below. Use M20 grade 4.6 bolts.
Solution:
Forces on members OA, OB, OC and OD are:
FOA = 300 kN
FOB = 140 kN
FOC = 180 kN
FOD = 200 kN
Shear strength of M20 bolts in single shear
f ub
(n A +n A ) (400 / √ 3)×(1 ×245)
= √ 3 n nb s sb =
1.25
= 45.3 kN
γ mb
Shear strength of M20 bolts in double shear = 45.3 × 2
= 90.6 kN.
Assume pitch as 60 mm and edge distance as 40 mm.
345
Member OB:
kb = 40/(3 × 22), 60/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1 = 0.606
Bearing strength of bolts on 8 mm thick angles,
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 20 × 8 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 77.57 × 103 N = 77.57 kN
346
Strength of angle per pitch length
0.9 × f u × An 0.9 × 410 ×[( 60−22 ) ×8]

¿ T dn= ¿
γ m1 1.25
= 89.74 kN
So the bolt value = 45.3 kN (lesser of 45.3, 77.57 and 89.74)
No. of bolt required = 140/45.3 = 3.1 ≈ 4
The length of gusset plate = 3 × 60 + 2 × 40 = 260 mm
347
Member OC:
Here, the value of kb will be same as derived for member OB as pitch and edge are same.
Bearing strength of bolts on 6 mm thick angles = 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 20 × 6 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 58.18 kN
Strength of angle per pitch length
0.9 × f u × An 0.9 × 410 ×[ ( 60−22 ) ×6]
= T dn= ¿
γ m1 1.25
= 67.31 × 103 N = 67.31 kN

348
So the bolt value = 45.3 kN (lesser of 45.3, 58.18 and 67.31)
No. of bolt required = 180/45.3 = 3.97 ≈ 4
Length of gusset plate = 3×60 + 2×40 = 260 mm
Member AD:
Net force in member AD = 300 – 200 = 100 kN
Bearing strength of bolts on 12 mm thick gusset plate
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
349
= 2.5 × 20 × 12 × 0.606 × 400/1.25 = 96.9 × 103 N = 116.4 kN
0.9 × f u × An 0.9 × 410 ×[ ( 60−22 ) ×16]

Strength of angle per pitch length = T dn= ¿ =
γ m1 1.25
179.5 × 103 N = 179.5 kN
So the bolt value = 90.6 kN (i.e., lesser of 90.6 kN, 116.4 kN and 179.5 kN)
No. of bolts required = 100/90.6 = 1.1 ≈ 2
Length of gusset plate = 60 + 2 × 40 = 140 mm
Bolt arrangements are shown in following figure.
350
We can see here, this will be the arrangement, here if you see we have considered 4 bolts
here, these are 4 bolts along member OB, this is O, this is B, this is A, this is C, this is D. So
if we see that for member OB we need 4 bolts, so we could find out the length accordingly.
Similarly, this length also will be 260 mm 260 mm, right because 4 bolts are required for
member OC. For member AD we need 2 bolts therefore this length we calculated as 140 mm,
right. So in this way the gusset plate dimensions have been decided.
So length of the gusset plate in different directions can be reduced by increasing the bolt
diameter and if we increase the bolt diameter the number of bolts will be reduced and as a
result we can find out lesser length of the gusset plate towards that member. So this is how
one can find out the gusset plate dimensions.
351
Here before going to end again I am just giving importance that suppose this is a angle
section in this directions whose Cg is this and this is another angle sections whose Cg in this
direction. So what I wanted to tell that Cg of all the members should coincide at a particular
point, if it does not coincide then eccentricity will develop and as a result additional moment
will come into picture. To avoid that moment or eccentricity we have to make the alignment
in such a way, we have to place the angle sections in such a way that all the C g of the sections
are meeting a particular point, that we have to keep in mind.
And if gusset plate becomes larger that means if length of gusset plate become greater than
the weight of gusset plate will be more and if the weight of gusset plate become more then
the structure the dead load coming to the structure will be more and it will not be economic.
So the dead load due to the gusset plate can be reduced if we properly make use of number of
bolts. If we properly reduce the number of bolts so that the gusset plate size can be reduced
and if it is reduced then we can reduce the weight of the gusset plate and as a result the dead
weight of the structure will be less.
352
Lecture 27
Module 6
Lug Angles
Hello today I am going to discuss about Lug Angle. Lug Angle is an angle with short length
which is required to share the load of the main angle. Sometimes the main angle carries a
huge amount of load and to make connections of this type of angle section with the main
member, we need a large number of large number of bolts. So if we use a large number of
bolt or large length of weld then the size of the gusset plate become very high and if size of
the gusset plate become high material required for gusset plate will be large and it will be
uneconomic.
So to reduce the length of the joint or the size of the joint to a certain amount sometimes we
provide lug angles at the beginning of the joint to share the load from main angle to the
gusset plate. So basically lug angle is connected with the outstanding leg of the main angle
and some percentage of load main angle is transferred to the lug angle and then that load
again is transferred to the gusset plate through connected leg of the lug angle.
I can show a diagram, say suppose an angle sections are connected with a gusset plate, right
suppose this is an angle section. Now if this angle section carries a huge load then I need lots
353
of bolts and thus gusset plate size is increased. Now to save the material sometimes we may
be able to reduce this length by putting an additional angle connected with the main angle in
this directions.
Therefore, in place of sharing whole forces as it is sharing a percentage of load, so number of

bolts required for this section will be less and therefore we can reduce the length. However
sometimes it may not be possible because as we are providing extra angle, so some extra
materials we are going to use here and also eccentricity may generate because of the
connections. Therefore, it has certain disadvantages but sometimes we use.
354
So before going to design, I am going to provide the codal provisions. In clause 10.12, IS
800:2007, general procedure of design of lug angles are provided.. So when we will be going
for designing we have to keep in mind these codal provisions. It is two type one we can
provide angle section, another is we can provide channel section. The main member may be
angle or main member may be channel sections.
So if main member is angle section then it is told that lug angle is connected to the
outstanding leg of the main angle. Then when unequal angle is used the load gets distributed
in the ratio of gross areas of connected leg to the outstanding leg.
That means if an unequal sections are used say suppose this is 75 and this is 50, then load to
this leg will be in the ratio of 50 : 75. So less load will be shared by this angle and more load
will be shared by this angle. So with this ratio it will be shared, this is what codal provisions
say.
Then it says that lug angle and their connections to gusset or other supporting member shall
be capable of developing strength not less than 20 percent in excess of force in outstanding
leg of main members. So, whatever load is coming here excess to that 20 percent more load
has to be carried by this.
So when we are going to design a lug angle we have to take the load coming according to the
proportion plus 20 percent of that. The attachment of lug angle to the main angle shall be
capable of developing strength not less than 40 percent in excess of the force in outstanding
leg angle, this also we have to keep in mind.
355
If the main member is channel section, then we should remember that the lug angle, as far as
possible should be disposed symmetrically with respect to the section of the member. So lug
angle should be provided at the top and bottom in a symmetric way. Then lug angle and their
connection to gusset or other supporting member shall be capable of developing strength of
not less than 10 percent excess of the force in flange of the channel. And similarly attachment
of the lug angle to the members shall be capable of developing strength of not less than 20
percent in excess of that force. So this is what we have to keep in mind while designing the
lug angle.
356
And then other few criteria we have to remember that is in no case fewer than two bolts,
rivets or equivalent weld length be used for attaching lug angles to gusset plates or other
supporting member. That means when we are attaching the lug angle with the gusset plate or
any other supporting member at least two number of bolt or rivet has to be provided, right.
And the effective connections of the lug angles should as far as possible be terminated at the
end of the member connected. The fastening of lug angle to the member shall preferably start
in advance of direct connection of member to gusset or other supporting members, so these
things we have to keep in mind when we are going to design this lug angle.
357
Example
A tension member carrying a factored tensile load of 180 kN has to convert through a gusset
plate of 10 mm thick using 16 mm diameter of ordinary bolt of grade 4.6. The available
length of the gusset plate for making connection is 250 mm. Design the member & its
connection. Also design the lug angle if required.
Solution:
T 180 ×10
3
Gross area required ¿ ¿ =¿ 792 mm2
f y /γ m0 250 /1.1
Select angle ISA 75 × 75 × 6 with Ag = 866 mm2 and rmin = 14.6 mm
Anc = (75 - 6/2 - 18) × 6 = 324 mm2
Ago = (75 - 6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
An = 324 + 432 = 756 mm2
Strength governed due to rupture of net section

α × An × f u 0.8× 756 ×410
T dn= = =198.4 × 103 N = 198.4 kN > 180 kN
γ m1 1.25
Hence, the chosen section is safe.

End connection
Strength of M16 bolts in single shear,
358
fu
(n A +n A ) (400 /√ 3)×(1 ×157)
= √ 3 n nb s sb =
1.25
= 29 × 103 N = 29.0 kN
γ mb
359
kb = least of [30/(3 × 18), 40/(3 × 18) - 0.25, 400/410, 1]= 0.49
Bearing strength of bolts on 8 mm thick angles,
= 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb
= 2.5 × 16 × 6 × 0.49 × 400/1.25 = 37.63 × 103 N = 37.63 kN
Therefore, bolt value = 29.0 kN
360
Length of gusset plate = 6 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 300 mm > 250 mm, therefore lug angle should be
used.
Lug Angle
Gross area of connected leg, Agc = (75 - 6/2) × 6 = 432 mm2
Load on outstanding leg of main angle = 180 × 432/(432 + 432)
= 90 kN
361
Load on lug angle = 1.2×90 kN = 108 kN [Cl. 10.12.2, IS 800-2007]
T 108 ×10
3
Net area required for the lug angle =
f y /γ m 0 ¿ =¿ 475 mm2
250 /1.1
Select ISA 60 × 60 × 5 as lug angle with Ag = 575 mm2
Let assume that the section is weakened by one row of 16 mm diameter bolt.
So, the net area available = 575 – 16×5 = 495 mm2
Connection of lug angle with gusset plate
Length of gusset plate = 3 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 180 mm
362
Connection of lug angle to main angle

No. of bolts required to connect outstanding leg of two angles =1.4× 90/29.0 = 4.34 ≈ 5
Length of gusset plate = 4 × 40 + 2 × 30 = 220 mm.
The arrangement of bolts for connecting lug angle is shown in following Figure
363
364
Lecture 28
Module 6
Splices in Tension Members
Now I am going to discuss about splices with respect to tension member, in fact splices are
used if the available length is less than the required length of a tension member. When the
single pitch of tension member of requisite length is not available then we may have to
connect with another pitch of member with the use of splices.
So different type of tension members we have, so when we are joining those tensions member
with the use of splices we may face different type of problem like if we do not join two sides
properly then eccentricity of the joint will come into picture and because of eccentricity
moment will come into picture.
So we have to design the splices such a way that no eccentricity is developed, say for
example if we consider a member, we need to join this member with another member, right.
So if we want to join these two members, now if I provide a splice here, then it will not be
symmetric. So transfer of the load through splice to another member will not be done
properly means eccentricity will develop.
So to avoid that we always try to provide another splice in this direction, so that the
symmetricity is maintained, this is what we need to do. However this is a problem when one
365
angle is to be joined with another angle, right. So if we have unsymmetrical joint like this
then the forces will develop here and because of that eccentricity will come into picture, so
we have to keep in mind that eccentricity does not take place that how can we do, say for this
angle section say angle is like this right so if we see.
Now we can join a splice here in two section, right and to make the system concentric what
we can do, we can join a splice here and we can join another splice here. So this is the way if
we do then the problem can be avoided. So while making splice design we have to try to
make joint in such a way that eccentricity does not occur.
Another case can happen if two members of different thickness are joined. So in such cases
what we can do we can make a splice in this place but here we have to provide a packing
plate. So we have to provide a packing plate to fill up the gap and then we can provide a
splice like this.
So what I discussing let me tell in short once again that the strength of splice plate and the
bolt which are joining them should be able to develop strength equal to design load. That
means the strength of the plate whatever we are joining should be same to the strength of this
plate and this plate, right.
Then when tension members of dissimilar thickness are to be connected, packing or filler
plates are introduced what I discussed earlier that if thickness are different then we have to
use packing plate or filler plate. Now the design shear capacity of bolts carrying shear
through a packing or filler plate in excess of 6 mm shall be decreased by a factor as given by
366
βpkg = 1 – 0.0125tpk
Where, tpk = thickness of the packing plate in mm
Another thing is, as per IS specification, the splice connection should be designed for a force
of atleast 0.3 times the member design capacity in tension or design action whichever is
more.
Example: Design a tension splice to connect two tension member plates of size 200  10
and 220  12. The member is subjected to a factored tensile force of 280 kN. Use M20
grade 4.6 ordinary bolts for the connection.
Splice will be provided in both sides of the tension members. Therefore, bolt value needs to
be calculated for double shear.
Shear strength of M20 bolts in double shear
fu
(n A +n A ) (400 /√ 3)×(2 ×245)
= √ 3 n nb s sb =
1.25
= 90.6 × 103 N = 90.6 kN
γ mb
kb = 30/(3 × 22), 50/(3 × 22) - 0.25, 400/410, 1 = 0.454
367
Bearing strength of bolts on 10 mm thick plate = 2.5 × d × t × kb × fub/γmb = 2.5 × 20 × 10 ×

0.454 × 400/1.25 = 72.64 × 103 N
= 72.64 kN
So the bolt value = 72.64 kN
Thickness of packing required = 12 – 10 = 2 mm
368
Since the thickness of packing is less than 6 mm, no additional bolt will be necessary to
connect it with the plate.
Thus, 4 nos. of bolts will be required on the splice with a pitch of 50 mm as shown in the
figure below.
Check for strength at critical section:
Strength of main plate at critical section
0.9 × f u × An 0.9 × 410 ×[ ( 200−22× 2 ) × 10]

= T dn= ¿ = 460.5 × 103 N = 460.5 kN >
γ m1 1.25
280 kN
Thus the section is OK.
Design strength due to yielding of gross section:
f y × Ag 250 × 200× 10
T dg= = = 454.5 × 103 N = 454.5 kN > 280 kN.
γ m0 1.1
So the design tensile strength of the member will be 454.5 kN.
Thickness of splice plate:
Let the thickness of splice plate is t.
369
Thus the strength of splice plate will be:
0.9× 410 ×[( 200−22 ×2 ) ×t × 2]

=¿ 92.1024t × 103 N = 92.1024t kN
1.25
The splice will be designed for 0.3 × 454.5 kN = 136 kN or the factored tensile load of
280 kN which ever is more.
Thus the thickness of the splice plate will be:
280
t= = 3.04 mm
92.1024
Let use 4 mm thick splice plate on both side of the member.

370
Now it is interesting to note that the splice plate is provided in such a way that it is becoming
symmetric, so we are maintaining the symmetric of the section so that the eccentricity does
not develop in the member.
So this is all about the design of splice plate as well as I am completing today the design of
tension member. In case of tension member we have seen how to find out the design tensile
strength from different criteria like yielding of gross section, rupture of net section, block
shear failure. So from those three points of view we have to design the member, also we have
to consider the slenderness ratio value so that the it does not exceed the limiting value of the
slenderness ratio.
Also we have seen that when the required length is not available in case of tension member
then we have to join 2 members with the use of splice that also we have discussed today and
also we have discussed about the lug angle, how to provide lug angle that also we have
discussed. So with this I would like to conclude the tension member design, thank you.
371
Lecture 29
Module 6
Compression Members
This new module which will deal with compression member. A structure member when
subjected to axial force only then such type of structure member is called compression
member.
Now the different type of compression members is termed as different way like in case of
RCC building such type of compression member is called column, which is basically a
vertical member which carries the load from beam or from the floor and transferring from
upper floor to lower floor.
Similarly, in case of steel building this type of compression member is called stanchion, again
the compressive member in a roof truss or bracing is called strut. Similarly, the principal
compression in a crane is called boom. So what we could see that the same compression
member is termed in different names for different cases.
372
Now when we will go for calculation of strength of the compression member or when we will
go to design a compression member then we have to see that what are the types of failure
may come for a compression member, depending on the type of failure we have to find out
what is the strength can be carried by that particular member.
So in case of compression member, there are different type of failures occurs out of them one
is called squashing. Squashing basically happens when the length of the compression member
is quite less compared to its transverse direction cross section area. Say for example if a
member is short and under compression load then in such case, the crushing will come into
the picture and full strength will attain at its yield strength and therefore the failure load can
be calculated in strength into the cross sectional area. Failure load will be calculated simply
the yield strength into its cross sectional area. So in such cases, we could see that the member
fails due to crushing of the material that is what one type of failure we could observe.
Another failure is the local buckling and it happens due to its cross sectional configuration in
case of a steel building. Say, for example, we oftenly used the channel section, so in such
case what will happen that due to compression this web may buckle individually, this flange
may buckle individually or some other part of the member may buckle which is called local
buckling. So it has to be taken care while calculating the compressive strength of the member.
373
Then another type of failure will be that overall flexural buckling. When the member length
along its axis is quite high compared to its cross sectional dimension then such type of
buckling occurs which is called flexural buckling. Say for example we have a long column
means compared to its lateral dimension, so in such cases, it may buckle in this way. So
before going to fail due to crushing it may fail due to buckling.
So such type of buckling phenomena has to be taken care while considering the strength of
the compression member. Again if we see the cross section say for example if the cross
section is something like this then we can see it may buckle about this axis, it may buckle
about this axis. So we have it will buckle in which direction, it will buckle about the weaker
section.
374
So, in this case, it will buckle about this then another failure may come due to torsional
buckling. Torsional buckling failure occurs due to torsional moment, the member gets twisted
about the shear centre in the longitudinal axis. So torsional buckling may occur may be in
case of angle section or channel section depending on the type of load means acting in a
particular place means load will be compressive but where it is acting whether it is acting in
the member axis or it is Cg depending on that the torsion will come into the picture.
Another scope of buckling is called flexural-torsional buckling. This is nothing but the
buckling which occurs when the member bends and twists simultaneously, that means
member will bend again it will twist means it may twist like this may be like this. Such type
of failure happens generally in case of unsymmetrical cross section. So unsymmetrical cross
section means say for example channel section it is symmetrical in one direction but it is
unsymmetrical in another direction. So in which direction it is unsymmetrical depending on
that we have to consider whether it is an unsymmetrical cross section or symmetrical cross
section and accordingly the torsional buckling will come into the picture.
375
Now while calculating the compressive strength of a compression member we have to find
out means what type of effect is coming on a particular compressive member. This effect
depends in length of the compression member like one is called short compression member,
short compression member means what I told earlier that suppose a member is length is quite
short compared to its width and thickness means if its width and thickness is substantial with
respect to moment that means the L by R ratio is quite low in that case the failure stress will
be equal to the yield stress and there will be no buckling, buckling will not happen in this
case.
So here it will fail due to yielding of the material so this happens when short compression
members are means when the members have short compression.
And another type of member which is called long compression member. In this case, stress
will occur due to buckling due to the long length of the member and quite less cross section
area. So in this case buckling may happen before yielding of the stress that is why we need to
consider whether it is long compression member or not and accordingly we have to find out
what type of means stress is developing due to buckling or due to due to yielding accordingly
the compressive strength of the member will be consider.
Another case is an intermediate compression member. In case of intermediate compression,

member failure occur due to the combined effect of crushing and buckling. Intermediate
compression means in practise most of the members are considered as intermediate
compression member because in this case, the member will undergo both the stress, one is
376
due to crushing, due to compression of the member it will shorten its length and it will crush
and another is due to its length it will buckle something like this.
So buckling stress will come into picture as well as crushing stress will come into picture. So
both the effect we have to consider and we have to find out the failure strength of the member
and most of the cases the compression member acts as intermediate compression member
where both the effects will be will have to be taken care.
Now for finding out the compressive strength of a member as we see that one is the crushing
value we have to find out the yield strength of a particular material and accordingly the
strength of the compression member can be calculated.
Another case is it may buckle due to buckling then what will be the buckling force and what
will be the stress that we have to find out and for that Euler has considered an ideal column
and has found out a critical load for buckling that critical load which has been obtained due to
buckling are derived on the basis of this few assumptions. That is one is the material is
homogeneous and isotropic, that means the material along the throughout its length will be
homogeneous and isotropic, there will be no change of material properties.
Then another assumption is material is perfectly elastic that means upto elastic limit this
buckling theory will be will be considered and this will be true for upto elastic limit. Then no
imperfection that means member will be perfectly straight as its initial state and there will be
no flaw of the geometry and material across the member.
377
Then there should not be any eccentricity of loading, in case of Euler theory the derivation
has been made considering the concentric loading that means there will be no eccentric
loading acting on the member. And another is column ends are hinged while developing this
theory it has been considering that column ends are hinged and column has no flaw.
With these assumptions, Euler has suggested a buckling theory which is given here that is if a
compressive load, P is acting along this member and if buckle happens like this then at a
distance of x the displacement will be y and the governing differential equation will be
That Pcr is the critical load which can be found from this governing differential equation and
from the governing differential equation the lowest value can be found as
Where l is the effective length and EI is the modulus of rigidity.
Now effective length will nothing but the length where the two moment contra flexures are
occurring distance between that two like in case of if it is fixed it will buckle like this, so
effective length will be l.
Therefore the critical stress can be found as
378
Where A is the cross sectional area of the column
Further,
Where r is the radius of gyration and λ is nothing but the slenderness ratio.
The radius of gyration means the minimum radius of gyration. In two direction radius of
gyration will occur and about minimum radius of gyration, it will fail first that is why the
minimum radius of gyration will be considered.
Thus, the critical stress is inversely proportional to the slenderness ratio (�). So critical stress
will be increasing if the value of λ is less or reversely I can say the critical stress will be less
if the slenderness ratio will be more. So the critical stress using Euler buckling theory can be
found from this, which will be used for deriving the compressive strength of the column.
Now for an ideal strut, the strength curve of a column can be derived if the strut is axially
loaded and initially straight with pin-ended then this can be derived in this way where x axis
will be the slenderness ratio that is l/r and y axis will be the compressive strength of the of the
material. So here we see the path is varying from A to C and then C to B, right. So column
379
fails when the compressive strength is greater than or equal to the values defined by ACB that
means this is the path defined and if column stress is coming somewhere here or here that
means it is failed.
So if the column stress is going to be greater than the stress defined by this path ACB then I
can say that column is going to fail and this AC is basically failure by yielding and if we
consider low slenderness ratio then failure may happen due to yielding and failure may
happen due to buckling for high slenderness ratio and you see failure will happen due to
buckling if λ is greater than λc.
Now plastic yield defined by f c =f y and this is defined by the elastic buckling stress.
f c =σ cr =f y =250 MPa
λc =π
√ E
fy
=88.85
This constant is for a particular value of E and fy.
So what we could see from this curve that if the slenderness ratio value becomes more than
88.85 then it will fail by elastic buckling and if it is less than that it will fail by plastic yield.
380
Now the same can be written in a non-dimensional form as well, which is shown here where
in y axis it is fc/fy and it will be 1 because f c and fy will be equal here and λ c will be 1 here
1 /2
fy
means λ́ will be 1 and in the x direction λ́=
( )
σ cr
have been plotted.
So the non-linear curve will be elastic buckling and the linear curve will be plastic yield. So
this is how the strength curve for an ideal strut can be developed by Euler’s theory.
But this cannot be applied for a practical case because there are certain parameters which will
effect on the compressive strength of the member. Therefore we will consider a different
381
formula however this formula is based on the Euler buckling theory as well as some other
factor also has been included so that we will discuss later.
Now if we see the factors which are going to effect the strength of compressive member we
can see that first is the material property of the member. So the design compressive strength
fcd depends on fy.
Another factor is the length of the member because we have seen the Euler critical load is
inversely proportional to the radius of gyration and there by the length. So if the length is
more than definitely compressive load carrying capacity will be less.
Then another factor is cross sectional configuration means in case of RCC member there is
no problem because there will be no local buckling because generally in case of RCC
member either rectangular section, square section, or circular section we use in general. But
in case of steel member we use different type of built up section say for example built up
section or rolled section, this is a built up section we are using channel facing each other
channel face to face or we can make some I section also say I section also we can use. So
here what we can see that due to cross sectional configuration local buckling of the flange or
web may happen so that has to be taken into consideration.
382
Another factor is the support condition because in case of hinge support the effective length
(l) will be simply the overall length (L), but if both support is fixed support then its buckling
curve will be like this and we know that l will be basically L/2, right. So effective length is
going to reduce. So as the length of the member effects on the compressive strength in the
member, therefore, supports conditions also effects on that.
Next factor is the imperfection. Now imperfection means that material may not be isotropic
truly and homogeneous then geometric variation of the column may be there, that means
cross sectional cross section throughout the length of the column may not be same exactly
then eccentricity may not have exactly eccentricity. So these imperfections also effect on the
strength of the member therefore that has to be also taken care in our design.
Another is the residual stress, if residual stresses are there in the member then the
compressive strength is going to be different so that aspects also have to keep in mind.
383
Now coming to the cross section of the member if we see that in case of column or
compression member different type of steel rolled sections which are available in the market
can be used for compression member, like we can use single angle section however while
using single angle section if the load act on a leg of a member then the eccentricity will
develop and therefore the torsional buckling will come into picture. So we have to take care
the strength of the member accordingly.
Similarly for double angle also we can use in this way or T sections can be used for
compressive member, most popularly used compressive member is channel section which we
oftenly used for compressive member. The hollow circular section also we use, rectangular
hollow sections also are used. So these are few steel rolled section which is commonly used
for compressive member.
384
Then some built-up sections are also used, like channel face to face this is one type of built-
up section we use, then channel back to back this also use. So now suppose channel face to
face or back to back if we use say for example this, now we cannot use simple like this
because if we see in the elevation it will be something like this, right. So unless we tie then
unless we provide some lacing then it will not act as a monolithic. Therefore we have to
provide some joint means in terms of batten plate or some lacing has to be provided, so that
throughout the length it acts as a monolithic member. So this has to be taken care.
And another is built-up box section means with four plates one can make built-up box
section. Then plated I section, then built-up I section like this some of the commonly used
built-up compression members are there.
385
Then we will come to the effective length factor, effective length factor means here we see
the le as we have written the effective length is equal to K×L, where K is the effective length
factor. Now this K depends on the restrained condition of the member, as I have told that in
case of say suppose fixed-fixed column it will buckle like as shown in the above figure, so
two points of contra-flexure will be developed as shown in the figure, the point of contra-
flexure means where the moment is becoming 0.
Now the distance between two points of contra-flexure becoming as effective length le, right
where capital L is the total length of the member, right. So what will be the value of K, so
here theoretically we got K value as half, that means le is equal to L/2.
386
However in IS code, this is considered as 0.65 because it will not be perfectly fixed and it
will not be perfectly 0.5, theoretically, though we are getting 0.5 we are going to consider as
0.65 with a certain conservative factor of safety, right. Similarly when columns with both
ends are pinned we are considering K value as 1 that means l e is equal to L. Again columns
with one end fixed and other end pinned in this case theoretical value though it is coming 0.7,
in codal provision, it is 0.8.
Again column with one end fixed and other end free means like cantilever column theoretical
value is 2 also we are considering 2, means in IS code also it is considering 2. Columns
partially restrained at each end will be 1, however, it is considered as 1.2. Similarly columns
with one end unrestrained and other end rotation partially restrained, it is 2.
387
So when we are going to consider the effective length of a member we have to go to table 11
of IS 800:2007 and as per table 11 of IS 2007, we have to find out the effective length of the
member. This snapshot of the code of table 11 of IS 800:2007 has been shown here, the
effective length factor has been given here.
Now another thing we will discuss here that is the effective length of column in the frame
because in practical cases we have to calculate the effective length in a frame and it is not a
separate member column member is not a separate or compressive member is not separate, it
is inside the frame. So what should be the effective length of the column in a frame that we
have to know and that is given in annexure D of the IS 800:2007 in clause 7.2.
388
For non-sway frames (braced frames):
K=
[ 1+ 0.145 ( β1 + β 2 )−0.265 β 1 β 2
2−0.364 ( β 1+ β 2 ) −0.247 β 1 β 2 ] (D-1 IS 800:2007)
For sway frames (moment – resisting frames):
0.5
K=
[ 1 – 0.2 ( β 1+ β2 ) −0.12 β 1 β2
1−0.8 ( β 1 + β 2 )+ 0.6 β 1 β 2 ] (D-1 IS 800:2007)
So this is how we have to find out the effective stiffness of the beam and column connecting
at that point. Then we have to find out β1 and β 2 , right so once we find β1 and
β 2 we can find the value of K. So this is how effective length of column in frame whether
it is sway or non-sway based on that we can find out the effective length of column, right.
So this is what in today’s lecture I would like to discuss I wanted to discuss so in short again I
am repeating the gist of today’s lecture that in a compression member the compressive
strength depends on different factors like length, restrained condition, imperfection, residual
stress, then material properties. So all these considerations have to be done also the cross
sectional configuration is an important part which comes into picture for considering the
strength of the member. So again the slenderness ratio which depends on the length effective
length and the radius of gyration.
So as per the means slenderness ratio, the compressive strength will vary, we have seen that it
is inversely varying with slenderness ratio. So those are some parameters which have to be
taken care and then while finding out the slenderness ratio we need to know the effective
length and effective length for different restrained condition that has been given in the code.
So as per codal provision, we have to find out the effective length of a particular member and
also in case of the frame depending on the basis on sway or non-sway the K value the
effective length factor can be found. So this is how we can decide the effective length of a
column or a compression member which will be required for calculating the column strength
or compression member strength. In the next class we will try to find out the compressive
strength of a compression member, thank you.
389
Lecture 30
Module 6
Design Strength of Compressive Member
Hello, today I am going to discuss the calculation of the compressive strength of a

compression member. So in last lecture we have seen the strength calculation formula of the
compression member as per the IS code and we have seen this strength depends on three
main factors one is the yield stress of the material that means the material properties, then the
length of the member from which we can find out the slenderness ratio and because of
buckling the reduction of the strength occurs and then another is imperfection factor which
depends on the buckling class of the member.
So three factors are introduced in the design strength calculation of the compressive member,
these three factors are the slenderness ratio, then buckling class and the material properties
that is yield strength. So based on that the formula has been derived which is basically similar
to the British code. And today I am going to solve a workout example through which we will
understand that the formulas that are used in the IS code, how to make use of those while
calculating the compressive strength of a compression member.
390
Example: Determine the design axial load on the column section ISMB 400, given that the
height of the column is 3.5 m and that it is pin-ended. Also assume the following:
�� = 250 N/mm2, �� = 410 N/mm2; E = 2×105 N/mm2
Solution:
That means from this what we could see that ISMB 400 members are used. So from this we
can find out what is the buckling class where ISMB 400 we know the thickness of the
member that means thickness of the flange, width of the flange and the depth of the cross
section those things we know, so from this we can find out the buckling class then another
thing we can find out that is the slenderness ratio, slenderness ratio here the length is given
3.5 meter.
So we know the radius of gyration of the section ISMB 400, so from that, we can find out
slenderness ratio ofcourse the slenderness ratio to find out slenderness ratio we have to know
the effective length. So effective length depends on the end connections, here ends are
connected by pin-end joint, so effective length here will be will not be reduced that will be 1
into 3.5 because here K will be 1 as per the IS code, right.
So one is buckling class then slenderness ratio and grade of steel fu means fe250. So fy value
is 250 it was given. So based on these three we can find out the value of fcd.
391
Properties of ISMB 400 [Table I SP: 6(1)-1964]
Depth of section, h = 400 mm
Flange thickness, �� = 16 mm
Thickness of web, �� = 8.9 mm
Flange width, b = 140 mm
Cross-sectional area, A = 7846 mm2
�� = 161.5 mm, �� = 28.2 mm
392
a) Buckling curve classification (Table 10, IS 800 :2007):
h 400
= =2.86>1.2 ; t f =16 mm<40 mm
b 140
Hence, we should use buckling curve ‘a’ about z-z axis and ‘b’ about y-y axis.
So z-z axis means if this is the I section this is called z-z, this is z-z and this is y-y, right. So
about z-z axis, it is class a, about y-y axis it is class b, as per the table 10 definition. The
buckling curve classification has been defined in table 10 from which we can take the class a
or class b.
b) Effective length:
Since both ends are pinned effective length, K L y =K Lz=3.5 m
c) Non-dimensional slenderness ratio:(7.1.2.1 of IS 800 :2007)
About z-z axis: α =0.21 [Table 7, IS 800:2007]
√(
λ z= √ f y /f cc = f y
K Lz 2 2
rz ) /(π E)
√
2
3500
¿ 250 ×
( 161.5 )
2
π ×2× 10 5
¿ 0.2439
393
ϕ=0.5 [ 1+α ( λ−0.2 )+ λ ]

2
¿ 0.5 [ 1+ 0.21 ( 0.2439−0.2 ) +0.24392 ]=¿ 0.534
f y /γ m0
f cd =
ϕ+[ ϕ2 −λ2 ]0.5
250/1.1
¿ =225.2 N/mm2
0.534 +[0.534 2−0.24392 ]0.5
About y-y axis: � = 0.34 [Table 7, IS 800:2007]
394
√(
λY = √ f y /f cc = f y
K Ly 2 2
ry ) /(π E)
√
¿ 250×
3500 2 2
(
28.2 )
/(π ×2 ×10 5)
¿ 1.3968
ϕ=0.5 [ 1+α ( λ−0.2 )+ λ2 ]
¿ 0.5 [ 1+ 0.34 ( 1.3968−0.2 )+1.3968 2 ]=¿ 1.679
395
f y /γ m0
f cd = 2 2 0.5
ϕ+[ ϕ −λ ]
250
1.1
¿ 0.5
1.679+ [ 1.6792 −1.39682 ]
¿ 87.06 N/mm2
So the design compressive stress will be taken as 87.06 because it will fail about y-y axis
first.
The same may be obtained by using Table 9b of IS 800:2007.
K L y 3500
Thus, for = =124.11 and f y =¿ 250 Mpa, from Table 9b,
ry 28.2
91.7−81
We get f cd =91.7− × 4.11=87.3 N/mm2
10
The design strength,
−3
Pd =7846 ×87.06 ×10
¿ 683.07 kN
396
So this is how we can find out the design compressive strength of the member, right.
So using the formula we can find out the design compressive strength of the member of the
given member and we could see that about y-y axis it is going to fail first that means y-y axis
is the weaker section and the same can be made by the use of table 9, means in place of
calculation of all these by fcd we simply can find out using table 9 from where fcd we can
get.
Example: Calculate the compressive strength of a compound column consisting of ISHB 250
@ 54.7 kg/m with one cover plate of 300×16 mm on each flange (as shown in the figure) and
397
having a length of 4 m. Assume that the bottom of the column is fixed and the top is hinged
and �� = 250 N/mm2
y Cover plate-300×16
ISHB 250
z z
125 mm
16 mm
y
So here the cover plate of 300 by 16 are used in both the flange, right, and the columns cross
sections is ISHB 250 at 54.7.
Solution:
Properties of ISHB 250 @ 54.7 kg/m [Table I SP:6(1)-1964]

C/S area, A = 6971 mm2
398
I zz =¿ 7983.9 ×104 mm4
I yy =¿ 2011.7 ×104 mm4
t f =9.7 mm
a) Determination the radii of gyration for the compound section:
I z for plates ¿ 2 [ I a + A p y 21 ]
¿2 [ 300 ×16 3
12
+300 ×16 × (125+8 )
2
]
¿ 17001.92×10 4 mm4
Total I z=7983.9 ×10 4+17001.92× 104
¿ 24985.82× 104 mm4
399
Area of the built-up section ¿ 6971+2× 300× 16
¿ 16571 mm2
r z=
√ √
Iz
A
=
24985.82× 104
16571
=122.79 mm
3
I y of plates ¿ 2× 16 × 300 =7200× 104 mm4
12
Total I y =2011.7 ×10 4 +7200 ×104 =9211.7 × 104 mm4
r y=
√ √
Iy
A
=
9211.7 ×10 4
16571
=74.56 mm
∴r min =74.56 mm
400
b) Buckling curve classification:
From Table 10 of IS 800:2007, for built up section buckling class, is ‘c’ about any axis.
c) Design strength:
The effective length of the column (Table 11 of IS 800:2007)
3
¿ 0.8 L=0.8 × 4 ×10 =3200 mm
KL 3200
∴ λ= = =42.92
r min 74.56
From table 9c of IS 800:2007, for f y =¿ 250 MPa and λ=¿ 42.92
198−183
f cd =198− ×2.92=193.62 N/mm2
10
Hence, design strength ¿ 193.62× 16571×10−3
¿ 3208.48 kN
Therefore we do not need to calculate f cd value for both the direction, because the buckling
class is the same for both the direction. So we will consider r minimum in which direction it
is coming, the r minimum will be the failure criteria. So we will straight calculate the r
minimum value and then we will find out λ and then according to buckling class we will find
out the fcd value and once we get f cd value we can find out the value of compressive force
which can be carried by that particular member.
401
So this is how we can calculate the compressive strength and compressive force of a
compression member using IS 800:2007, ok this is all about the calculation of compressive
strength of the member, thank you.
402
Lecture 31
Module 7
Compressive Strength
Hello, now I am going to discuss about the design strength of compression member, in last
class I have discussed different factors effecting compressive strength in a compression
member. So from the earlier discussions we have seen the main three parameters which are
effecting on the on the compressive strength of a member, one is the material strength of the
member that means what is the yield strength of the member depending on that the
compressive strength will vary.
So while calculating the compressive strength or while developing the expression for
compressive strength we need to consider the material strength that is yield strength.
Next factor is the slenderness ratio, we have seen from the Euler’s critical load and Euler’s
buckling formula that the compressive strength varies inversely with the slenderness ratio. So
while developing the compressive strength formula means the expression for compressive
strength we need to incorporate the slenderness ratio in that also, so this has to be taken care.
Another aspects which are of the importance we have to give that is the local buckling
because one is crushing, another is overall buckling, and another is local buckling. So
because of the configuration of the member cross section of the member the local buckling of
the flange or web may happen. So that aspects has to also be taken care in the derivation of
the expression for compressive strength.
So these three aspects has to be considered and we have to develop a reasonable accurate
formula and that formula should be capable of reflecting the actual behaviour.
403
So let us see how people have started developing formula and what we are adapting. So four
different approaches have been considered for finding the design column formula. So one is
the formula based on the maximum strength, this is one approach in which people have tried.
Another is formula based on the yield limit, which is called Perry-Robertson formula and
basically this approach is considered by our Indian Code the IS 800:2007 has also adapted the
multiple column curves based on the Perry Robertson formula and this is basically similar to
the British code BS 5950 (part-1) 2000.
This the formula which have been derived is similar to the British code and the formula was
prescribed by Perry-Robertson who has proposed. So this has been adapted but we will
discuss about this in details and another two formula are also adapted to establish column
design formula that is formula based on tangent modulus theory and Empirical formula such
as Merchant-Rankine formula. So these four basic approach are observed to establish column
design formula and we may recall the earlier code that is IS 800:1984, which was established
as per Merchant-Rankine formula.
So before going to this new version we will shortly discuss about the Merchant-Rankine
formula, how the earlier code was adapted and then we will come to this formula.
404
So in IS 800:1984 Merchant-Rankine formula was adapted where we know the basic formula
is as follows:
1 1 1
= n+
( f ) ( f e) ( f y) n
n
Where, fe is the elastic stress and fy is the yield stress. So considering two stress, one is elastic
stress and yield stress the equivalent stress f can be related as this formula.
So from this we can write
f e×f y
f= 1
( ( f e )n+ ( f y )n )n
π2 E
Here, f e is the elastic critical stress in compression = f cc = 2
λ
n is a factor as 1.4
So considering this the allowable compressive stress in IS code has proposed as follows:
f cc × f y
σ ac =0.6 1
n n n
(( f cc ) +( f y ) )
Now this 0.6 has been taken as a factor of safety and n we can consider as 1.4.
405
Here we can see that two things has been taken care, one is the material property which is the
yield strength as fy and another is the fcc that is elastic critical stress which comes from
buckling.
So global buckling and the squashing effect has been taken into consideration but another
important parameter which has not been considered is the geometrical configuration of the
cross section of the member.
So before crushing or global buckling due to local buckling the member may fail from which
it is not possible to capture this formula.
Therefore this formula we are no longer using, we are using the new developed formula
which is based on Perry-Robertson formula.
406
According to Perry-Robertson formula the multiple design curve has been adapted by the IS
code, in IS code figure 8 these column buckling curves are given and this is based on the
Perry-Robertson theory. According to Perry-Robertson theory three things has been
considered as I told one is the material strength fy, another is the elastic critical buckling fcc
and another is the local buckling and this local buckling has been considered in terms of this
class a, b, c, d. We can see here four type of graphs have been proposed depending on the
buckling class and in table 7 this buckling class have been defined. We can see here that
according to buckling class a, b, c, d that imperfection factor α has been introduced and this α
value is 0.21 in case of class a, 0.34 in class of b, 0.49 in case of class c and 0.76 in case of
class d.
So according to buckling class the imperfection factor has been proposed and according to
that imperfection factor the column buckling curve for class a, b, c, d have been derived. Here
you can see that along X direction it is λ́=

√ fy
f cr
, non-dimensional and along y direction
fcd/fy where fcd is the design compressive stress and fy is the yield stress and here fy is the yield
stress and fcr is the elastic critical stress, right.
So we could see here that based on Perry-Robertson theory we have considered three means
we have taken into consideration three effects one is due to material f y, another is due to
global buckling and other one is the new component which has been adapted in this code is
407
the class of the structure means buckling class a, b, c, d so according to buckling class this
has been changed, right.
Now coming to the buckling class of cross section we can see that which is given in table 10
of IS 800:2007. In table 10 of IS 800:2007 the different buckling class have been defined
according to the cross sectional dimension. Say for rolled I section, if h/b f is greater than 1.2
and where h is the total depth and bf is the flange width.
So if h/bf is greater than 1.2 and thickness of flange tf is less than or equal to 40, then about z-
z, buckling class will be a and about y-y, buckling class will be b. Here you see that buckling
class about y-y and about z-z is different.
So for the same member the buckling class will be different and therefore the value of α the
imperfection factor will be different for different direction and in case of I section if the
thickness of flange varying from 40 to 100, then about z-z it will be b and about y-y buckling
class will be c. Similarly if h b/bf is less than 1.2 and tf is less than or equal to 100, then
buckling class will be b about z-z axis and c about y-y axis.
And similarly if tf is greater than 100, then buckling class will be d about z-z axis and d about
y-y axis as well. So this is how the buckling class have been defined by the code and
according to that the imperfection factor has also been mentioned in the code, which will be
used while developing the design curve of the column, right.
408
Similarly for weld section weld I section, if t f is less than equal to 40, then buckling class will
be b about z-z axis, c about y-y axis and if tf is greater than equal to 40, this will be c and
about y-y will be d. Similarly for Hollow section for hot rolled about any axis it will be a and
for cold rolled cold formed section it will be b.
Now coming to weld box section, here also buckling class has been defined. Similarly I am
not going into details, we can find out in the code, in table 10. The only thing I want to
mention that when we are using channel section, angle section, T section or some solid
section, solid section means rectangular section or circular section then the buckling class
will be c about any direction about any direction, say for angle about y-y axis, about z-z axis
it will be c for both the direction.
Similarly for channel section also it will be c, for T section also it will be c and for built-up
member any direction the buckling class has also been considered as c.
409
So these are the thing we need to find out from table 10 of IS 800, for calculating the
imperfection factor α. Now this imperfection factor will be used in the formula given in the
clause 7.1.2 of IS 800:2007, where it is mentioned that P should be less than P d where P is the
external compressive load and Pd is the design compressive load, so design compressive load
should be greater than the external load. The design compressive load P d can be found from
the following formula:
Pd =A e f cd
Where Ae is the effective sectional area effective sectional area which is defined in clause
7.3.2.
Unlike tension member in case of compression member effective sectional area will be the
gross area in general. If generally we do not deduct the whole area because considering the
bolt or rivet whatever we provide are intact with the member. So the gross area will become
the effective sectional area. And fcd is the design compressive stress of axially loaded
compressive member. So we have to find out fcd the design compressive stress.
Now design compressive stress has been given in the code which is written as
f y /γ m 0 fy fy
f cd = 2 2 0.5
=χ ≤
ϕ+[ϕ −λ ] γ m 0 γm 0
χ is basically stress reduction factor which depends on the radius of gyration, length and
imperfection factor that means basically the slenderness ratio and imperfection factor, right.
410
So fcd value we can find out where phi can be calculated from the following formula,
ϕ=0.5 [1+ α ( λ−0.2 )+ λ2 ]
√
λ=√ f y / f cc= f y
KL 2 2
( )
r
/( π E)
Here K is the length factor to find out basically KL means the effective length and r is the
radius of gyration, fy is the yield strength of the member and E is the modulus of elasticity of
the material.
So from this I can find out the value of λ, right and once I find out the value of λ, I can find
out the value of ϕ with the help of imperfection factor α. So once we can find out ϕ ,
we can find out the value of fcd, right. So this is how one can find out the design compressive
strength of a member.
2
KL
2
Now fcc = Euler buckling stress ¿ π E / ( )
r
The strength of the member will be considered with respect to minimum radius of gyration.
Then α is the imperfection factor as given in table 7 of IS 800:2007 and this χ is the stress
factor for different buckling class, slenderness ratio and yield stress, right. So three things
have been taken into consider buckling class, slenderness ratio and yield stress.
411
Now this is a TDS process to find out the value of fcd, therefore in the IS code some values
are given in a tabular form so that we do not have to calculate the entire things again and
again.
So if we see the table 8a to table 8d of IS 800:2007 this is given for different yield stress f y
with different λ, say 10, 20, 30 like this, the value say this is 250, so different type of values
are given then the reduction factor value are given for different value of λ and f y, right. So
reduction factors are given. So say for example if we have λ in between 20 and 30 and f y as
250 then we can interpolate between these two to find out a particular value of reduction
factor with respect to particular value of slenderness ratio.
412
Say for example if λ is equal to 22 we can interpolate between these two to find out the χ
value with respect to 22, right. So this tables 8a to 8d one can find out the value of reduction
factor according to the buckling class a, b, c or d we can choose table 8a or 8b or 8c or 8d and
we can find out the value.
Similarly we can find out the design compressive stress in table 9 (a to d) for various
buckling class.
So in table 9 (a to d) we can see that for different value of λ and for different value of f y yield
stress, we can find out the value of f cd. Say for example say 10, 20, 30 like these λs are
413
varying and fy is say 200, 250, 300 like this it is varying. So for a particular value of λ we can
find out the value of fy and then from the table 9 a, b, c or d according to the buckling class
we can find out the value of fcd, say for example this is x1, this is x2 for 10 and 20.
Then for λ is equal to say 12, we can find out the value of f cd in between x1 and x2 means in
between x1 and x2 we can find out the value of fcd by interpolating the values, right. So very
quickly one can find out the fcd value by using table 9, table 9 have four tables a, b, c, d with
respect to buckling class a, b, c, d.
Now another thing we have to remember while designing the compressive member that is the
allowable slenderness ratio. So that has been defined in table 3 of IS 800:2007. The allowable
slenderness ratio for compressive member that is like carrying loads resulting from dead load
and superimposed load the limiting value is 180 that means the effective slenderness ratio KL
by r should not become more than 180 in case of dead load and live load or superimposed
load.
When carrying loads resulting from wind and seismic loads provided the deformation of such
a member does not adversely affect the stress in any part of the structure we can increase upto
250, so allowable slenderness ratio is 250 for such type of cases.
Now normally acting as a tie in a roof truss for a bracing member which is not considered
effective when subjected to reversal of stress resulting from acting wind or earthquake forces
that can be made as 350, so allowable slenderness ratio will become 350.
414
Similarly lacing bars in columns will be 145, when the built-up sections will be used then the
lacing bars has to be designed, so in such cases the slenderness ratio will should not be more
than 145.
And different elements or components in built-up section there it should be less than 50, so
different components in built-up section the allowable slenderness ratio should not exceeds
50. So this is how we have to follow this codal provision while designing the member, right.
So in today’s lecture what we could see that design column curve can be obtained from the
Perry-Robertson formula which takes care the material properties, material strength which
takes the slenderness ratio that means buckling and also the buckling class of the member that
means the configuration of the structure cross sections which effects as a local buckling.
So to take care these three effects the yielding, global buckling, and local buckling the
formula has been derived, right and it is observed from the literature that using such type of
formula the behaviour of the compression members are similar to this formula whatever we
are getting that means after numerous experimental verifications this formula has been
adapted by our code and we can now use this formula for finding out the design strength of
the compressive member and we can design accordingly.
So in next class we will see how to calculate the design strength of a compression member,
we will see how to calculate the design strength of a built-up compression member and then
we will go for design of compression members. So for today’s lecture we will we will like to
conclude here, thanks.
415
Lecture 32
Module 7
Compressive strength of angle struts
In this lecture we will be focused on compressive strength calculation of strut angles. We

know when a member is subjected to compressive force and used in a bracing system or in a
roof truss are called struts. This strut basically takes light load and the effective length will be
comparatively less. So for such cases we generally use angle section to take care the
compressive load.
Now this compressive load may act concentrically on the angle section or may act through its
one leg which will be eccentric and the strength calculation of such type of angle sections are
given in code in clause 7.5 of IS 800:2007. Now in clause 7.5.1 of IS 2007 it is told that the
compression in single angles may be transferred either concentrically to its centroid through
end gusset or eccentrically by one of its leg to a gusset or adjacent member.
416
That means an angle sections is loaded with the axial compression member and either the
compressive load will be transferred through this Cg of this angle section by the use of gusset
plate or it may be transferred through one of its leg may be through one of its leg.
So when the angle section is transferring the load through its one leg, then the eccentricity
will come into picture and because of this eccentricity three types of things will happen one is
torsional buckling, torsional buckling means basically flexural torsional buckling, another is
flexural buckling which comes for all the members which is common, and another is
torsional buckling.
So the combination of flexural torsional buckling can be calculated from a formula which is
given in the clause 7.5.
417
Now for concentric loading when the angle is concentrically loaded this can be calculated
through the clause 7.1.2 mean in case of concentrically loaded in compression the design
strength may be evaluated as per clause 7.1.2 of IS 800:2007. This clause 7.1.2 we have
discussed already that means it is a concentric loading what we have designed earlier in case
of compression member, which may be channel section, maybe I section, maybe other type of
section.
However if this is not concentric then we have to go for another clause which is given in
clause 7.5.1.2 when the angle section is loaded by the axial compressive load through its one
leg. So in clause 7.5.1.2 it is told that when the single angle is loaded concentrically through
418
one of the its leg the flexural torsional buckling strength may be evaluated using an
equivalent slenderness ratio, λe , which is given by
λe = √ k 1+ k 2 λ 2vv +k 3 λ 2ϕ
Where k 1 , k 2 , k 3=¿ constants depending upon the end condition as per Table 12 of IS 800-
2007. Depending upon end condition means whether it is fixed or it is hinged, whether it is
connected by one bolt, two bolt or welded depending on the end condition end fixity
condition the value of k1, k2, k3 is defined in table 12.
l /r vv
λ vv =
ε √ π E/250
2
( b1+ b2 )/2 t
λ ϕ=
ε √ π 2 E/250
Where, l = centre to centre length of the supporting member
r vv = radius of gyration about minor axis
b1 , b2 = width of two legs of the angle
t = thickness of the leg
ε = yield stress ratio, ε =√ 250/f y
Now for a particular grade of steel this π 2 E /250 is constant, so that can be calculated
because E is constant for a particular grade of steel, therefore ε is also constant. So if we
can calculate λ vv and λϕ and if we find out the value of k 1, k2, k3 from table 12 then I
can find out the equivalent slenderness ratio λe .
419
Now we have used r vv in the previous expression which is the radius of gyration about
minor axis, which will be the minimum radius of gyration about the minor.
So for a particular angle section we can find out the properties from the geometry, from SP: 6
we can find out the value of r vv for a particular angle section then we know what is the width
of the legs of the angle b1, b2 and thickness of the leg and also if we know the grade of steel
then we can find out the yield stress ratio ε that also we can find out.
And the constants k1, k2, k3 that can be found in table 12 of IS 800:2007. Now this value of k1,
k2, k3 depends on number of bolts at the end of the member as well as the connecting member
fixity that means gusset or connecting member fixity means what type of fixity is there
whether it is fixed, or hinged depending on that and whether number of bolts are more than or
equal to 2 or 1. So depending on that we can find out k1, k2, k3.
Say for example if I have a fixed connection, if fixity is there and if the number of bolts are 2
or more than 2 then I can take the value of k 1 as 0.2, value of k2 as 0.35 and value of k3 as 20.
So similarly I can consider different type of member fixity, if it is hinged then k 1, k2, k3 value
can be found, similarly if number of bolts are 1 at the end then depending upon the fixity I
can find out the value of k1, k2, k3.
420
Now the theory whatever we have discussed theory means the expression for finding out
λe value has been discussed, so for such type of members how to find out the design
strength that can be understood if I go through this example.
Example: An ISA 150×150×12 used as a strut has the effective length as 3 m. Calculate the
strength when it is connected by
a) One bolt at each end

b) Two bolts at each end
c) Welded at each end
Solution:
Basically what changes we will find out for different cases that is the equivalent λ which is
λe. So λe depend on k1, k2, k3 so that k1, k2, k3 can be found from table 12 and depending on
the type of fixity and number of bolts the k 1, k2, k3 value will change and accordingly the
strength will be going to change. So through this example we will try to understand.
For ISA 150×150×12, A = 3459 mm2, [Table III, SP:6(1)-1964]
rvv = 29.3 mm
For angle sections, Buckling curve ‘c’ is used. [Table 10, IS 800:2007]
Imperfection factor, α = 0.49 [Table 7, IS 800:2007]
421
a) Connected by one bolt at each end:
Assuming fixed conditions, for one bolt at each end,

k1 = 0.75, k2 = 0.35, k3 = 20 [Table 12, IS 800: 2007]
c/c length, l = 3000 mm
Yield stress ratio, ε =√ 250/f y =√250 /250=1 [cl.7.5.1.2 of IS 800: 2007]
l /r vv 3 000 /29.3
λ vv = = = 1.1523
ε √ π E/250 1× √ π 2 ×2 ×105 /250
2
422
150+150
( b1+ b2 )/2 t
λ ϕ= 2× 12 = 0.1407
ε √ π 2 E/250 ¿
1 × √ π × 2× 105 /250
2
423
Hence, λe = √ k 1+ k 2 λ 2vv +k 3 λ 2ϕ
¿ √ 0.75+0.35 ×1.15232 +20 ×0.1 407 2

= 1.2692
2
Now ϕ=0.5 [1+ α ( λ−0.2 )+ λ ]
¿ 0.5[1+0.49 × ( 1. 2692−0.2 ) +1.269 22 ]
= 1.5674
f y /γ m 0
Design compressive stress, f cd =
∅+[∅2 −λ2 ]0.5
424
f y /γ m 0
f cd =
∅+[∅2 −λ2 ]0.5
250/1.1
¿ 2 2 0.5
1.567 4+[1.567 4 −1.269 2 ]
= 91.38 N/mm2
Now
Pd =A e f cd = 3459×91.38 ×10−3 = 316.1 kN
425
b) Connected by two bolts at each end:
Now the same calculations will be done when the two sides are calculated by two bolt for the
same case and let us see how the strength is going to vary from earlier case.
Assuming fixed conditions, for two bolts at each end,
k1 = 0.2, k2 = 0.35, k3 = 20 [Table 12, IS 800:2007]
Effective length, l = 3000 mm ; ε =1
Therefore, λ vv=1.1523
λ ϕ =¿ 0.1407
λe = √ 0.2+0.35 ×1.1523 2+20 × 0 .1407 2
¿ 1.03
426
2
ϕ=0.5 [1+ α ( λ−0.2 )+ λ ]
¿ 0.5 [ 1+ 0.49× ( 1. 03−0.2 ) +1. 032 ]
¿ 1.2338
f y /γ m 0
f cd =
∅+[∅2 −λ2 ]0.5
250 /1.1
¿ 2 2 0.5 = 118.8 N/mm2
1.2338+[1.2338 −1. 03 ]
427
Pd =A e f cd = 3459×118.8 ×10−3 = 410.9 kN
c) Connected by weld at each end:
Now coming to third case when it is connected by weld at each end, so for this case what we
can consider that this will be similar to the earlier. So in case of weld connection we can
assume it will be fixed at both the end and as we have calculated the k1, k2, k3 value
considering two bolts for this case also will become same.
This case will be exactly similar to earlier case, i.e., Connected by two bolts at each end.
Therefore,
Pd =¿ 410.9 kN
So what we have seen here that Pd value for first case we got 316.1 kilonewton and for
second case we got Pd is equal to 410.9 kilonewton and in third case Pd value we got 410.9
kilonewton, that means when two bolts or weld connections are used the design strength is
becoming higher compared to the one bolt connections, right. So if we want to increase the
strength of the member we should choose for higher number of bolts means where one bolt is
sufficient we will choose two bolt with smaller diameter. So that we can accommodate more
strength on the member with same member size member size will be same but strength will
be more because λe is going to change, right.
428
Lecture 33
Module 7
Compressive strength of double angles
Now I will be discussing about the design compressive strength of a double angles section.
Now double angles section is oftenly used because many cases appear when the single angle
is not capable of taking that much load and also in case of single angle the radius of gyration
about the minor axis is very low compared to its X axis, or Y axis, or major axis. Therefore as
radius of gyration is quite low about in minor axis, so strength of the angle section is quite
low because it may buckle about its minor axis.
And if radius of gyration is low then slenderness ratio will be high and if the slenderness ratio
high then the design compressive stress will be less and therefore the design strength of the
member will be less. Therefore with the given load sometimes we go for double angle
section. Double angle section may be placed by back to back with gusset plate means two
sides of gusset plate two angle section can be provided or in the same side of gusset plate
angle sections can be provided. So this is how one can place the angle sections to make
double angle section.
429
Now to know the design strength of the angle section first we have to know the effective
length of the double angles which is given in clause 7.5.2. So the codal provision says that
depending on the degree of restraint provided the effective length will be consider as 0.7 to
0.85 times the distance between intersections and the effective length KL, in the plane
perpendicular to that of the end gusset shall be taken as equal to the distance between centre
of intersections. That means here K value will be 1, so this is what the codal provision says.
So when we will be going to calculate the strength of a double angle section we have to
follow this codal provision 7.5.2 to find out the effective length and thereafter the slenderness
ratio and then compressive stress, the allowable compressive stress. Therefore we have to
know the effective length of the double angle section means whether it is according to the
degree of restraint means whether the length is in the plane perpendicular to that of end
gusset or other one.
So angle sections may be provided like this, say suppose two angle sections I want to
provide. Now that may be possible if I use two angle section on the opposite side of gusset
plate, this is one way we can make, the other way we can provide like two angle section in
same side of the gusset plate.
Also the two angles can be provided like star formation also however it depends on the
requirement means what type of architectural requirement is there depending on that we can
provide such type of double angle section. And also we will see if I provide angle section
430
opposite side to the gusset plate or same side of the gusset plate then at which formation the
strength will be more and that can be check through one workout example.
Example: A discontinuous strut of length 4 m consists of two unequal angles ISA 100×75×8
and is connected to a 10 mm thick gusset plate by its longer leg. Determine the strength if it is
connected on the:
i) Opposite side of the gusset plate

ii) Same side of the gusset plate
Solution:
Properties of ISA 100×75×8 : [Table IV, SP:6(1)-1964]
A= 1336 mm2
rx = 31.4 mm ry = 21.8 mm
ru = 34.8 mm rv = 15.9 mm
Cx = 31.0 mm Cy = 18.7 mm
Ix = 131.6×104 mm4 Iy = 63.3×104 mm4
431
i) Angles placed on opposite sides of the gusset plate:
For double angle struts
A ' = 2×1336 = 2672 mm2
'
r x = 31.4 mm (same as for single angle)
I 'y =2 [ I y + A ( c y +t g /2 ) 2 ]
432
I 'y =2 [ I y + A ( c y +t g /2 ) 2 ]
¿ 2× [ 63.3× 10 4 +1336 × ( 18.7+10 /2 ) 2 ]
¿ 276.68× 10 4 mm 4
Therefore, r '
y =
√ I 'y
A'
=
√ 276.68 ×10 4
2672
=32.18 mm
' '
Hence, r min =min of ( r x ∧r y ) =31.4 mm
Now effective Length, l e =0.85 l=0.85 × 4=3.4 m [Cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800]
433
le
Slenderness Ratio, λ ¿
r min
3.4 × 1000
¿ =108.28<180 [Table 3, IS 800 2007]
31.4
Hence, the section is ok.
Buckling class for angle section – ‘c’ [Table 10, IS 800: 2007]
For f y=250 MPa and λ=108.28 and buckling class c, using Table 9(c) of IS 800:
2007, we have
( 107−94.6 )
f cd =107− × 8.28=96.73 MPa
10
Hence strength of the member ¿ 96.73 ×2672 ×10−3
¿ 258.46 k N
ii) Angle placed on the same side of the gusset plate
434
'
A = 2672 mm2
r 'y = 21.8 mm (same as for single angle)
I 'x =2 [ I x + A C x2 ]
¿ 2× [ 131.6×104 +1336 ×31 2 ]
¿ 519.98× 10 4 mm 4
Therefore r 'x =
√ I 'x
A'
=
√ 519.98 ×10 4
2672
=44. 11 mm
' '
Hence, r min =min of ( r x ∧r y ) =21.8 mm
435
Effective Length, l e =0.85 l=0.85 × 4=3.4 m [cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800: 2007]
le
Slenderness Ratio, λ ¿
r min
3.4 × 1000
¿ =155.96<180 [Table 3, IS 800: 2007]
21.8
Hence, the section is ok.
Buckling class for angle section – ‘c’ [table 10, IS 800: 2007]
For f y=250 MPa and λ=155.96 and buckling class c, using table 9(c) of IS 800:
2007, we have
(59.2−53.3 )
f cd =59.2− ×5.96=55.68 MPa
10
Hence strength of the member ¿ 55.68× 2672× 10−3
¿ 148.78 k N
436
Strength of the member when Angles placed on
(i) Opposite sides of the gusset plate: 258.46 k N
(ii) Same side of the gusset plate: 148.78 k N
So what we could see for the same angle if it is placed opposite side to the gusset plate its
strength is quite high compared to this that means we will try to prefer always the angles to
be placed opposite side of the gusset plate. So that the strength can be achieved more
compared to the earlier case means when angles are placed same side of the gusset plate.
437
Lecture 34
Module 7
Design of Compression Members
So far we have discussed about the design strength of compression member that means how
to calculate the strength of a compression member that we have understood. If the cross
sectional dimension of a member is given and the type of member is given then we can find
out the strength of that member. In this lecture I will discuss how to design a compression
member when the load is given and accordingly how to find out an appropriate section.
Now to find out appropriate section first we have to decide what type of sections we are
going to choose it may be I section, it may be channel section, it may be angle section or it
may be built-up section. So according to the requirement we have to choose a particular type
of section.
Now to design the section we have to follow an iterative process. If we see the design
strength (Pd) calculation, the design compressive force Pd can be calculated as follows
Pd =A e × f cd
438
Now we do not know Ae because we do not know the dimension of the section, so effective
area we do not know. Also we do not know the allowable compressive stress (f cd) of the
member because it depends on the slenderness ratio which is depends on the radius of
gyration. Now the radius of gyration will be depending on the dimension of the section. So
both the parameters are unknown and dependent on each other. Therefore there is no linear
process to find out simply the dimension of the section.
So what we need to do either we have to assume certain compressive stress f cd, then we can
find out the area required and then again we can go for the design. Now we can find out the
fcd directly where we generally consider f cd as 0.4fy to 0.6fy. However this is a trial process
means at the beginning we can start with this f cd and then we will be able to understand at the
end whether the member is fine or not, if it is not fine then either we have to increase or
decrease according to the results.
Also we can consider the lambda value or the radius of gyration. Now the radius of gyration
if we know then from table 9 we can find out the value of f cd. So either we can choose radius
of gyration or we can choose fcd directly then we have to go.
Now let us see what the steps we should follow are
1) Assume a suitable design compression stress ( f cd ) as 0.4fy to 0.6 fy.
439
Now if the slenderness ratio is less then we can consider little higher side, if the slenderness
ratio is high we can consider lower side but we do not know slenderness ratio but we know
the effective length, length of the member is known.
So if length of member is high then we have to choose a lower value and if effective length is
less then we can choose a higher value also.
Pd
2) Effective sectional area required is, A e=
f cd
3) A section is to be selected which gives effective area required and then calculate rmin.
4) Determine effective length, knowing the end conditions and by deciding the type of
connection.
5) Determine the slenderness ratio and hence design stress fcd and load carrying capacity Pd.
6) Modify the section if calculated Pd differs significantly from the design load.
Now another way to find out the lambda value means in place of f cd one can choose a lambda
which are given in this table. Approximately we can choose this set of slenderness ratio, like
in case of single angle section we can choose slenderness ratio as 100 to 150, in case of
channel section single channel section 90 to 150, in case of double angle 80 to 120, for
double channel the slenderness ratio value can be considered much less 40 to 80, similarly
single I-sections 80 to 150, double I-sections 30 to 60. So from this l/r value we can find out
440
and accordingly the fcd value from table 9 and then we can find out the particular section then
we can iterate.
Example: Design a compression member carrying an axial load of 250kN. The effective
length of the member is 3 m. Design the member with 2 equal angles in star orientation as
shown in the figure below.
441
v
v u
x x
y
442
10 mm
Solution:
Assuming f cd =0.5 f y=0.5 ×250=1 25 MPa
2 50 ×1000
Required area ¿ =20 00 mm2
1 25
Selecting 2 ISA 90×90×6 with the following properties [Table III, SP: 6(1)-1964]
2
A=1047 mm
c x =c y =24.2 mm r x =r y =27.7 mm
r u=35 mm r v =17.5 mm
Now I have to find out the property of the combined section.
443
So property of the combined section can be found as follows
A ' =2 ×1047=2094 mm 2
Assuming 10 mm gusset plate.
2
'
( ( )) t
We know , I =2 I x + A C x + g
x
2
So if we see the orientation of the angle it is something like this, so this thickness of the
gusset plate is 10 mm, right.
444
Therefore
√
2
t
r =r = r + c x + g
'
x
'
y x
2
2 ( )
√
¿ 27.72 +(24.2+
10 2
2
) =40.25 mm
√
2
tg
(
r 'v = r v 2+2 c y +
2 )
445
√
¿ 1 7.52 +2 ×(24.2+
10 2
2
) =44.85 mm
r 'u=r u=35 mm , Hence, r min =35 mm
'
r u=r u=35 mm , Hence, r min =35 mm
Effective Length, l e =0.85 l=0.85 ×3000 [cl. 7.5.2.1, IS 800]
¿ 2550 mm
l e 2550
So λ= = =72.86<180 hence safe.
r min 35
For f y=250 MPa and λ=72.86 and buckling class c, using table 9(c) of IS 800 :
2007, we have
(152−136 )
f cd =152− × 2.86=147.42 MPa
10
446
Hence strength of the member ¿ 147.42× 2094 ×10−3
¿ 308.7 k N >250 kN
Hence the member is safe.
So though member is safe theoretically what we should do we should decrease the member
size and we should see in which member it is going to be safe marginally, right. So once it is
done now suppose we are making safe this one and we are using this section.
Tack welding:
Tack welding should be provided along the length to avoid local buckling of each of the
elements
λ e ≤ 0.6 λ=0.6 ×72.86=43.716 or 40, whichever is less (clause 7.8.1)
447
So, λ e=S/r v=40
Hence, spacing between welds, S=40 ×rv (Min r of the individual member)
¿ 40 ×1 7.5=700 mm
Welding is designed to resist a transverse load (P) of 2.5% of axial load

¿ 2.5 ×250/100=6.25 kN
Using 5 mm weld size (shop weld)
P 6. 25 ×103
Hence length of weld = te f u = 0.7 ×5 × 410 = 9.43 mm
√ 3 γ mw √3 ×1.25
448
Hence provide a 5mm tack welding of 10 mm length at 700 mm spacing.
So we have seen here how to make tack welding and how to find out the weld distribution,
weld size and weld length for tack welding. Now in earlier case we have seen that the load is
coming 250 kN whereas we have done with the assume section here we got the load carrying
capacity as 308.7 kN. That means we have to repeat the design to get an economical section
because if we use this section it will not be economic.
So it is always better to make a program at our own and use that, if we make a program and
do it then we can find out the economic section, because in programming required amount of
iteration will be done automatically if we make the algorithm properly, so we do not have to
do anything means once we develop a program then we can find out an economic section. So
through iteration it will search which one will be the best section to carry out that much
external load.
So here I will just show a demonstration, here you see we have developed a program for
design of compression member using MATLAB environment and it is graphical user
interface based program. So there is a problem has been demonstrated as follows
Example: Design a single angle discontinuous strut to carry a factored load of 50 kN.
Assume that the distance between its joints is 2 m. Use f y =250 Mpa.
449
So this is the GUI of the program in first page it will show you the different option here we
have made three options only one is single angle section, another is double angle section on
same side and double angle section on opposite side, for these three cases we have developed
the program for other cases we have to develop. So those who want to develop they can make
450
the algorithm in such a way that the different type of orientation of the angle sections can be
used.
So for this case as it is told that single angle section, so we have to click on single angle
section then it will show this type of section and then if we enter the input values then it will
go to next page.
451
In next page you can see that factor load it was actually 50 kN and effective length of
compression member was given 2 meter which is 2000 millimetre, imperfection factor as per
table 7, then maximum effective slenderness ratio can be defined as per table 3, then the
gusset plate thickness if we are going to use, double angle section then we have to provide
gusset plate thickness otherwise we can provide 0 because we are not using any gusset plate.
Then we can opt whether it is equal angle section or unequal angle section, if unequal angle
section then again we have option that outstanding leg is larger or the connected leg is larger
means as we will be choosing according to that orientation will be done and calculation will
be made accordingly. Then according to table 5 the material strength means factor for
material strength γ m 0 that will be calculated if we click here, if we give the check box
automatically it will take the value, otherwise we can put our chosen value also.
Similarly as Fe410 grade of steel if u use then automatically its ultimate tensile strength and
yield strength will be shown otherwise u can provide at our own also. Then we have to go to
next.
452
So if we go to next then this type of page will come where the data whatever we have
provided has been shown means now if we see that if some data are mistakenly done means
by mistake if we have given some data then we can go to back and we can provide the proper
data, otherwise we can click on check a particular section means if we can click here it will
show different section available in SP: 6, so we can check a particular section for example
ISA 90 by 90 by 10.
453
Now if it is okay then it will show okay, otherwise it will show it is unsafe and if we click on
find economical section then it will start from the least one and it will go on increasing stage
by stage for each case it will check whether it is okay or not, if it is not okay then it will go
for next higher section and then again it will check. So in this way lot of iteration will happen
and finally it will find out the economic section, this is how the program runs.
454
So if we choose a particular section we can make then this is the output. Now if we u see here
that 75×75×6 section has been chosen and these are the inputs which has been given and in
output it is shown that design compressive strength is coming 59.43 whereas the external
force was 50 kN. So marginally higher value is coming and thus effective slenderness ratio
455
also coming 137 and allowable slenderness ratio was 180, so this is how one can find out the
values.
So from demonstration of this program what I wanted to say is writing a MATLAB code is
very easy if you know the design methodology, if you know how to calculate that design
strength of a compression member, then the same can be written in a program and then by
providing some loop we can try with different section and finally we can find out a suitable
section by trial and error method.
So once if we develop such type of program then next we can just simply we can do not have
to do anything else, otherwise every time if you do not have program at our hand then we
have to calculate every type means those who are design engineer, those who are working in
design firm for then every time they have to calculate for designing a particular member but
once we develop a customized program then we do not need to give that much effort for
every time.
So this is all about the design of compression member with respect to single compression
member or single angle section or double angle section this is what we will do.
456
Lecture 35
Module 7
Design of Built up Compression Member
In this lecture we are going to discuss about the design procedure of built up members. Built
up members comprises of two or more rolled steel section. When a compressive load is so
heavy that a single rolled section cannot withstand that much load because there is a
limitation of maximum size of the rolled section. Therefore when load becomes very high we
may have to go for built up section.
This is not only because of the high load but also sometimes we need equal radius of gyration
in both the direction because in rolled steel section we generally see that radius of gyration in
one direction is much higher than the other direction. Therefore the buckling will happen
about the weaker section first and as a result the load carrying capacity of the steel rolled
section member will be less about a particular direction, to arrest that generally we provide a
built up section where higher radius of gyration can be achieved in both the direction and
thereby we can increase the load carrying capacity by providing such type of built up
members.
457
Now coming to reason as I told that one is that the built up section provide large cross-
sectional area which cannot be furnished by single rolled steel section. Then built up section
provide special shape and depth. The special shape and depth facilitated connections between
different members. And another important thing is that the built up section provide sufficient
large radius of gyration in two directions. Therefore we generally prefer built up members in
case of long length of column and with higher load.
Say for example if we consider a channel section as a compression member as shown in the
figure, as we can see the Izz is much higher than Iyy, right or rzz is much higher than ryy.
Therefore the chances of buckling about y-y axis will be much earlier than about z-z axis. So
if we provide built up member then we can increase the radius of gyration by providing
another member and with a certain spacing.
So if we do that then we can see that the new I yy of the section will become much higher and
the built up member generally we provide in such a way that I zz become Iyy means we will
vary this spacing between two members to such an extent that when I zz become Iyy upto that
we will vary, or rzz become ryy. So in this way we provide the configuration of the built up
member.
458
Now examples of built-up member if we see, here we can see that we can use 4 angle section
to make a box type of cross section by the use of certain tie plate which is called generally
lacing or battening. So this is one example where we can use built up section to increase the
Ixx and Iyy of the section.
Another type of built-up members generally we used is that when two channel sections are
placed back to back, where built-up members are connected with the lacing or battening
member.
459
Next is channel section when facing face to face this way also we can provide a built-up
member.
Then I section with channel section at the top as per the requirement, sometimes we see the
requirement and according to that requirement we may have to provide that I section with a
channel section at the top.
460
Sometimes two I sections are provided to withstand the load as shown in the figure.
Sometimes in place of plate girder we generally see that I sections are provided with
additional plates. So number of plates are added as per the requirement and in this way we
increase the load carrying capacity of the member. Generally we provide I section with plates
when the bending moment of the member is becomes high. That means when a member is
under flexural action then because of bending stress may be the single I section is not capable
of taking that much load.
461
So in that case we may have to provide the additional plates as per requirement. So this is
another example of built-up member.
This is an another type of built-up member which is consisting of 4 angles which is called
star angle.
Now coming to design of built-up compression member, the following steps we have to
follow. In the first step for the design of built-up compression member we find out the
effective length. Therefore in step 1 we find out the effective length from the actual length
and end condition.
462
Then in 2nd step we generally assume certain value of slenderness ratio λ as 30 to 60 for built
up section. We generally consider less value of λ because of the built up section the radius of
gyration is quite high and therefore the slenderness ratio we can consider quite less means it
may be from 30 to 60 which will be sufficient.
Then in step 3 we find the compressive stress fcd from table 9c because the buckling class for
built-up member is c, therefore we can use table c and corresponding to table c for a
particular value of λ whatever we consider we can find out the fcd value for a given grade of
steel. So once we get the f cd value, in step-4 we can find out the required cross-sectional area
(A) which is P by fcd, where P is the axial compressive force which is acting on the member.
So once we get the area of the compressive member then in step-5 we can choose a built-up
section as per the requirement it may be channel section back to back, it may be channel
section face to face, it may be I section. As per the requirement we have to decide what type
of sections we are going to provide and what will be the arrangement. So accordingly we will
find out the area from that considered section and then we will arrange the section in such a
way may be if we use two channel section back to back, then we will arrange the section in
such a way that the Ixx or Izz become Iyy, so that we can find out the value of S, where S is the
spacing between two section.
So here our job is to find out the value of S in such a way that I zz will become Iyy. Once this S
is found we can find out the rmin value which will be practically more or less equal rzz and ryy.
463
So in step-6, from the minimum value of the radius of gyration we can calculate the λ, the
slenderness ratio which is le/r.
So from the slenderness ratio again we can go back to table 9c and in step-7 we can find out
the value of fcd corresponding to particular λ and grade of steel, right. So once we get f cd value
we can find out the design compressive strength P d which is Ae×fcd. So design compressive
strength we can find out and if we see the design compressive strength is more than the axial
compressive strength acting externally then it is okay, otherwise we can go for a higher
section and we can repeat from step 5 to step 7.
That means if we see the design strength is less than the actual load then we have to go for
next higher section and we have to repeat the steps so that we get P d as greater than P and
then we can stop. So this is how we can find out the section size of the member and then we
can find out the arrangement of the section that what will be the spacing between two
members. Then we have to design the lacing system or batten system as we provide because
lacing system or batten system along the length we provide to tie the compression members
in a proper way so that the built-up members become parallel to each other, also it has to be
equidistance throughout its length.
Now we will go through one example through which we will be able to understand how to
design a built up section.
464
Example: Design a laced column 10.5 m long to carry factored axial load of 1000 kN. The
column is restrained in position but not in direction at both the ends. Use 2 channel section
placed as back to back as shown in the figure below.
So what we need to do here is we have to find out what the section size of the channel is and
what will be the distance between these 2 channel section that is S and the design of lacing
we will do later.
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410:
f u =410 MPa, f y =250 MPa
Design of column:
P=1000 kN ¿ 1000× 10 3 N
Le =1.0 ×10.5=10.5 m
465
Now let the design axial compressive stress for the column be 150 MPa
1000 ×10 3
Required area ¿ =6666.67 mm2
150
Let us try two ISMC 250 @ 298.2 N/m.
Relevant properties of ISMC 250 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
A=3867 mm2, r zz =99.4 mm,

r yy =23.8 mm t f =14.1 mm
I zz =3816.8 ×10 4 mm4 I yy =219.1 ×10 4 mm4
466
c yy =23 mm b=80 mm
Area provided ¿ 2× 3867=7734 mm2
In the design of built-up column with two sections, the sections are so spaced that the least
radius of gyration of the built-up section becomes as large a value as possible. Therefore, the
radius of gyration about y-y axis is increased so that it becomes equal to or more than the
radius of gyration about z-z axis. This can be achieved by spacing the sections in such a way
that r zz becomes r min . Let us first check the safety of the section.
L 10.5× 103
Now = =105.63
r zz 99.4
467
As per clause 7.6.1.5 of IS 800:2007,
The effective slenderness ratio, ( KLr ) =1.05 ×105.63

e
¿ 110.91<180
For ( KLr ) =1 10.91,

e
f y =250 MPa and buckling class c, the design compressive stress
from Table 9c of IS 800: 2007
94.6−83.7
f cd =94.6− ×0.91=93.61 MPa
10
Therefore load carrying capacity ¿ A e f cd
¿ 7734 ×93.61 ×10−3

¿ 723.98 kN < 1000 kN
Which is not safe.

468
Try two ISMC 300 @ 351.2 N/m
Relevant properties of ISMC 300 [Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
A=4564 mm2, r zz =118.1 mm,

r yy =26.1 mm t f =13.6 mm
I zz =6362.6 ×10 4 mm4 I yy=310.8 ×10 4 mm4
c yy =23.6 mm b=90 mm
L 10.5× 103
= =88.91
r zz 118.1
As per clause 7.6.1.5 of IS 800:2007,
The effective slenderness ratio, ( KLr ) =1.05 × 88.91

e
¿ 93.35<180
So from slenderness ratio point of view the section chosen is okay.
469
For ( KLr ) =93.35 ,
e
121−107
f cd =121− × 3.35=116.31 Mpa
10
¿ 9128 ×116.31 ×10−3
¿ 1061.68 kN > 1000 kN
Which is safe.
Let us provide two channels (ISMC 300) back-to-back.
Now next question is that what will be the spacing of these two channel. As we have seen that
the spacing will be decided on the basis of the equal strength from each direction.
470
Spacing of channels:
[ ( )]
2
S
2 I zz =2 I yy+ A +C yy
2
[ )]
2
S
or 2× 6362.6 ×10 4=2 × 310.8× 10 4+ 4564 ( 2
+23.6
2
S
or ( 2 )
+23.6 =13259.86
⇒ S=183.1 mm
Let us keep the channels at a spacing of 184 mm

471
ISMC 300
S=184 mm
So the spacing between these two members will become 184 and ISMC 300 section will be
used. So in this lecture what we could see is that the design steps design procedure of built up
section and a work out example has been done to demonstrate the procedure for designing a
built up section. In this example we have restricted upto the calculation of the section size
that means what will be the section size and its spacing between two section.
472
Lecture 36
Module 8
Lacing Systems
In this lecture we are going to discuss about the lacing systems. Lacing systems are used
basically to keep the built up sections throughout its length and we need to tie them to make
them parallel and to make them equidistant and to make them act as a monolithically, so that
as a whole the built up section works.
So for that we may use lacing which are basically some inclined member between the two
vertical members. We can also use batten system instead of lacing system. Batten system is
basically it is a horizontal plate which are connected with the two main members. But in this
lecture we will be discussing about the lacing member which are basically the inclined
members and these lacing members are used when compressive loads are acts eccentrically.
Therefore especially for eccentric loading we generally prefer lacing system.
Now for lacing system the lacing members are generally flat plate, it may be angle section, it
may be light channel section, or may be circular section means tubular section, so in different
way we can provide.
473
Now in case of lacing member again we can consider two type of lacing member as shown in
the figure.
So we can provide as a single lacing or we can provide double lacing also. So in different
way we can connect the lacing members. So when we will be designing we have to first
decide whether we are going for single lacing or double lacing because accordingly the force
on lacing member will come into picture that has to be taken care.
Now when we will be going for designing of a lacing we need to know what the failure
modes of the lattice member are. So what type of failure may happen that we will first see
474
and accordingly we will try to develop a design methodology so that the failure can be
pretend. Built-up members may fail due to buckling of built up member as a whole. So in
case of buckling of built up member as a whole, if column is very slender and axial load is
much high then it may buckle as shown in the figure.
Another way it may fail that buckling of main component as shown in the figure. So what we
could see if the loading whatever it is coming for that if the member is not able to carry that
much load due to excessive buckling then the main component may fail. if we use channel
section as a main component then the minimum radius of gyration will be about y-y, so the
failure will happen about that section. So as a local failure this can arise buckling of main
component.
Then another way of failure is the distortion of the section. Say for example there is a built up
section as shown in the figure where lacing has been provided. Now if distortion happens it
will be something like this, so due to distortion the failure may happen which has to be taken
care.
Another failure is the failure of lacing member or batten member whatever we are providing
that has to be also taken care. Say for example if we provide two built up sections with the
lacing and its width is less compared to its length then it may buckle.
Now what we need to do is that we will design the lacing system in such a way that it will
arrest the failure of local buckling, it will arrest the failure of lacing system and it will take
care the failure of member as a whole means globally and also distortion.
475
Now L/rcmin, the slenderness ratio of the highlighted member as shown in the figure should be
limited otherwise it may fail. Therefore we should provide some restriction and to restrict the
slenderness ratio we have to restrict the length that means spacing between two lacing has to
be decided. So from failure of local buckling we can find out what should be the maximum
distance between two lacing L.
Again if the lacing cross section is not sufficient to take the load, lacing member may fail.
Therefore what should be the width of the lacing member, what should be the thickness of the
lacing member that has to be decided from which the slenderness ratio is calculated.
476
Now if we are providing two sections which will be connected by lacing or batten then to
prevent the global failure we need to take the section spacing in such a way that the
slenderness ratio of the built up section should not exceed the limiting value.
So now coming to the general requirements which has been given in the code. Clause 7.6 of
IS: 800-2007 says that the compression member comprising of two main components laced
and tied should where practicable, have a radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to
the plane of lacing not less than the radius of gyration about the axis in the plane of lacing. So
this has to be taken care. Therefore as far as practicable lacing system shall not be varied
throughout the length of the strut that means the lacing spacing and lacing dimension should
not be varied along its length.
477
Now coming to the single lacing system say for example we have a channel section toe to toe
and we have face A and face B then we can provide the lacings as in the prefer orientation as
shown in the figure. Whereas we cannot provide the lacing as not preferred orientation.
So this is also mentioned in the code, we can see here that the preferred lacing arrangement
where lacing on face A and lacing on face B has been made. So one is shadow of the others
and this is given in the IS: 800-2007 figure 10A and in figure 10B. In the figure 10A,
preferred arrangement for single lacing system is given. Whereas in figure 10B, preferred
arrangement for double lacing system is given.
478
Again in the figure 10C of that code, it is given that double lacing system and single lacing
system on opposite sides of the main components shall not be combined with cross members
perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the strut unless all forces resulting from deformation
of the strut members are calculated and provided for in the lacing and fastenings.
479
Now in design specification first it is told that the total transverse shear force V will be the
2.5 percent of the compressive force P, because in lacing when we are going to design a
lacing, lacing will be undergoing some compression or tension. Now the transverse shear
force is calculated from the axial compressive force.
Now if we can consider θ as the angle of inclination for a single lacing system of two parallel
faces then the force on each bar will be
V V
F= =
nsinθ 2 sinθ
480
Where n is the number of transverse system in parallel plane which is generally 2. Now for
double lacing the force will be
V
F=
4 sinθ
This force will be tensile in one lacing bar and compressive in other bar.
Now as I told the lacing member may buckle locally, so the code has provided certain
restriction which is given in tabular form here that what should be the effective length and
what should be the slenderness ratio. The slenderness ratio (le/r) of the lacing bar should not
481
exceed by 145 that means as per the codal provision we have to make the dimension of a
lacing system in such a way that the slenderness ratio should not become more than 145.
And to calculate the effective length it has been also discussed in the code that in case of
single lacing with bolted end, effective length, le will be the overall length,,l where l is the
length between inner end bolts of lacing bar. And for double lacing bolted at ends and
intersections, le will be 0.7l and for welding lacing also it will be 0.7l
Now if we use flat bars as lacings then the slenderness ratio is calculated as follows:
le l e √ 12
l l ¿ =
λ= e = e t
r √I / A
√ b t 3 /12
bt
l e √ 12
∴ λ lacing= <145
t
482
Now in riveted/bolted connection, the minimum width of lacing bars should be more than
three times the nominal diameter of the end connector. So if the width of lacing bar is b and
the nominal diameter of the end connector is d then b should be greater than or equal to 3d.
Then coming to thickness, thickness either we can find out from that the slenderness ratio
value or at the beginning we can find out the thickness from the following criteria
l
t> for single lacing
40
l
t> for double lacing
60
Where, l is the length between the inner end bolts or welds
So the minimum thickness of the lacing bar can be found from these criteria for single lacing
and as well as for double lacing.
483
Then another important thing we have to decide that is the angle of inclination (θ) of the
lacing bar. Lacing bars, whether in double or single systems, shall be inclined at an angle not
less than 400 nor more than 700 to the axis of the member. However from the experience it
has been seen that the lacing system will be effective if we consider θ in between 35 and 45.
Then the maximum spacing of lacing bars should be such that minimum slenderness ratio
will be,
L
=0.7 λ max or
r cmin
¿ 50
484
Whichever is minimum.
Where, λmax is the maximum slenderness ratio of the compression member as a whole
L = Distance between centers of connections of the lattice bars to each component
c
r min = Minimum radius of gyration of the component of compression members
485
Now we need to find out certain number of bolts or welding dimensions for attachment of
lacing to the main component and that is dependent on the force acting on lacing member or
if we use weld connection the length of weld connection, size of weld connection should be
decided.
So the codal provision says that the riveting, bolting or welding of the lacing bars to the main
member should be sufficient to transmit the load in the bar. Then in case of weld connection
it is told that where welded lacing bars overlap the main members, the amount of lap
measured along either edge of the lacing bar shall be not less than the four times the thickness
of the bar or the members whichever is less.
And the welding should be sufficient to transmit the load in the bar and shall in any case we
provided along each side of the bar for the full length of lap, so this is what we have to
remember in case of weld connection. And for bolt connection we have to find out the
strength and number of bolts.
486
So in case of such member means such type of connection where connections are made
separately then the number of bolts can be decided as
F
For first case, the numbers of bolt, n=
R
But for second case where both the members are acting on this bolt, we have to find out the
resultant force which will be 2Fcosθ and for this particular case
Resultant Force 2 Fcosθ

The numbers of bolt, n= =
Bolt Value R
Where, F = Force in lacing bar
θ = Inclination
So if we find out the force in lacing bar then we can find out the number of bolt required to
connect the lacing bar with the main plate and this depends on what type of connections we
are going to consider whether it is separately connecting or two lacings are overlapped and
acting as a double shear. So here also you can see that the bolt value of this case and bolt
value of this case will be different, because here the bolt value will be under single shear and
here the bolt value will be under double shear, so accordingly the bolt value has to be
calculated.
So these are the things we have to remember when we will be going to design a lacing
member so in short if we say that lacing members are designed or the entire built up sections
487
are designed on the basis of failure criteria, failure of the member as a whole. So we have to
restrict the radius of gyration so that failure does not occur and to restrict the failure due to
local buckling of the main member we have to provide the spacing for lacing in such a way
that the slenderness ratio should not exceed certain value.
Also we have to find out a suitable arrangement of bolt or weld connection for attaching the
lacing system into the main members if we use bolt connection then again we have to see
whether we are connecting the lacing member separately or we are overlapping accordingly
the forces will be calculated and then the number of bolts will be calculated and in fact if we
see the force on the lacing member is quite less and generally number of bolts become 1 to 2
in maximum case and sometimes we will see 2 that is sufficient. So through work out
example we will also confirm this.
488
Lecture 37
Module 8
Design of Lacing Systems
In this lecture I am going to discuss about the design of lacing system. Now in earlier lecture
we have shown what are the force coming on the lacing and what are the failure modes are
coming in lacing system for the built up member and how to calculate the number of bolts,
how to calculate the thickness of the lacing, width of the lacing and how to decide the spacing
of the lacing bar, what should be the length of the lacing bar all these things have been
discussed but for designing we have to make a systemic way so that step by step we can
design.
So first I will discuss the steps which can be used for design of a lacing system which is a
very lengthy process. So we should remember the steps chronologically so that we can design
systematically a lacing system entirely and after discussion of the steps we will discuss about
the one software which has been developed to design the lacing system.
So let us come to the design steps, so in first step we will choose a lacing system means either
we will choose a single lacing or double lacing that we have to first decide because the design
procedure will be entirely changed for single lacing and double lacing because depending on
489
the single lacing or double lacing the force acting on the member will be different and
accordingly the number of bolts and the dimension of the lacing system.
Similarly the radius of gyration and the slenderness ratio for single lacing and for double
lacing will different. So if we decide first the lacing system whether it is single lacing or
double lacing then it will be better to proceed further. Then we have to decide an angle of
inclination (θ) with the axis of the compression member,
So as we told earlier that theta should vary from 40 to 70 degree and generally we try to keep
theta from 40 to 45 degree to get maximum efficiency of the lacing system. Then once we
decide the lacing system and its angle of inclination then we can find out the gauge distance
(g). Now if the clear spacing between two sections is S as shown in the figure then Thus
according to the figure,
a = 2g + S
Now the distance between the bolt centres is calculated as follows
2a
L= For single lacing
tanθ
a
L ¿ For double lacing
tanθ
Also we have to decide what should be the spacing (S) so that Ixx and Iyy become same.
So that has already been decided and the size of the section has also been decided whether it
is channel section or I section and whether sections are arranged back to back or toe to toe
that has also been decided earlier.
490
Now we have to find out the length between two lacing which is calculated as follows
2a
L= For single lacing
tanθ
a
¿ For double lacing
tanθ
a
l= For both single and double lacing
sin θ
Next in step 3 we can find out the slenderness ratio of each component and check for
slenderness ratio. So slenderness ratio is calculated as minimum of the followings
491
L
=0.7 λ max
r cmin
L
=50
r cmin
So this is what we have to do so that the local buckling of the member can be arrested and
that can be taken care by providing this restriction.
In step 4, so once we find out the length of each lacing then I can find out the effective
length. Now effective length is calculated as follows
For single lacing system (bolted ends), le = l
Double lacing system (bolted ends), le = 0.7l
For welded lacing system, le = 0.7l
492
Now in step 5, we can find out the thickness of the lacing, so for lacing member we need to
know length, then thickness and width. These are the three things we need to know. Now
already we knew the spacing between lacing member and angle of inclination. So the
thickness can be found as follows
l
t> for single lacing
40
l
t> for double lacing
60
Now we have to check for slenderness ratio, so we can find out the maximum slenderness
ratio of the lacing system and generally in case of lacing system, lacing members are either
flat plate or may be angles or may be channel. In case of flat plate we have calculated already
in earlier classes which is as follows
l e √12
λlacing = <145
t
Now if it is not less than 145 we can increase the thickness of the lacing, if we increase the
thickness of the lacing, then λlacing will be reduced and we can make the λlacing below
145.
In step 7 we will calculate the compressive strength of the member. Then in step 8 we will
calculate transverse shear, V, which is calculated as follows
493
V = 0.025P
And then after finding out the transverse shear we can find out the force in lacing.
Now coming to step 9, we can find out the compressive stress and tensile stress of the lacing
system and we have to check that this compressive stress and tensile stress is less than the
permissible compressive and tensile stress. So we know permissible compressive stress of the
lacing member, fcd value for a particular slenderness ratio and for a particular grade of steel.
Now the compressive and tensile force developed in the lacing system should be less than the
permissible value.
If it is not less than that then we have to increase the section size, section size means either
we have to increase the thickness or width of the flat plate or if we use angle section then we
have to increase the section, right once it is done we can go for connection. So if we use bolt
connection then we have to choose a suitable bolt diameter and we have to find the minimum
width, b of the flat plate. This b should be more or equal to 3d, where d is the nominal
diameter of bolt. After selecting bolt diameter, d and minimum width, b of the lacing flats the
number of bolt required can be found from the following equation:
F
n=
R
Where F is the force on that lacing member and R is the bolt value. Therefore before finding
out the number of bolt we have to find out the bolt value R and depending on the spacing and
494
pitch distance and edge distance and whether it is single shear or double shear R will be
calculated so once R is calculated we can find out the number of bolt.
Now in step 11 we will design the end connections for the lacing system that means we will
check for the number of bolts whether it is sufficient or not to withstand the load and if we go
for weld connection we will check whether the length of weld connection is sufficient or not
to withstand that load and the weld length will be decided on the basis of weld strength and
the force acting on the lacing member. So this are the steps we have to follow to find out the
lacing dimensions and its configuration.
Now this is a sample software of root we have shown here, in fact one of my student has
developed this software where the lacing member can be designed. Now the most important
part of this is that how to make a GUI to take the input. I am showing an example to give an
idea about how to develop a GUI means how it should look and how user friendly. If one can
make a GUI then the user can make the design means they can easily find out the dimensions
of the lacings and its design details.
Now suppose first if we come to the type of column, where have been incorporated few
options in the program, one is column containing angle section and channel section. Channel
can be placed toe to toe or back to back. So these are the options we have.
Now if we click on column containing angle then we can find out a particular section and
their properties have been taken from SP: 6. The different section size has been taken and
495
their properties which have stored in the library of the software and then when we are
clicking a particular size of the section its properties will be taken.
Now the spacing has to be decided because spacing will be decided on the basis of I xx is equal
to Iyy on that basis we have to decide spacing, so the spacing will be provided here and we
have to provide yield stress of steel and then whether we are going for angle lacing or flat
plate that also we can decide. So these options also are incorporate in the software that we
can provide not only flat plate but also we can provide angle lacing.
And then another option we have created that is whether it is single lacing or double lacing
and accordingly, the calculation shall be done and if it is double lacing then its calculation
will be different. Then we have to go to the load what is the compressive load coming and
what will be the height of column that has to be defined.
And here you see we have given a help button, in help button if you click then will get the all
the design criteria means what are the design steps and how design has been done. And in
flowchart how step by step it has been progressed that has been shown in this flowchart. And
if we click in analyze then it will go for analysis of the system.
496
So here you see if we select the column containing channel then there are two options we
have the channel facing each other and channel opposite to each other, right. So that will be
taken care and others will be similarly we can consider say angle section or plate section for
lacing system then single lacing or double lacing all these things will be similar, only thing is
when column containing channel so all the properties of the channel sections as given in the
IS SP: 6 will be taken.
Here channel opposite to each other has been consider, here another option has been consider
that is if we consider double lacing system then how the orientation will be done that has
497
been shown here. So the program can take care the design of double lacing system as well,
right.
Now we will go through one example so the design steps whatever we have discussed will be
followed in this design example and in this design example the previous example from
lecture 35 have considered against a certain load and length of the column and then we have
considered that ISMC 300 section and back to back with 184 millimetre spacing that has been
decided, so on that basis we will try to find out the details of lacing.
column is restrained in position but not in direction at both the ends. Provide single lacing
system. Use 2 channel section placed as back to back. Assume steel of grade Fe 410 and bolts
of grade 4.6.
a) Design the lacing system with bolted connections
b) Design the lacing system with site welded connections.
498
So if we recall the design example provided in lecture 35 we can see that we obtained ISMC
300 channel section and having a spacing between these two as 184 and channels were placed
back to back. So this is what already we have calculated. Now we will calculate the forces
coming on lacing and the dimensions of lacing.
499
L0 /r yy should be < 0.7 × ( L/r ) of whole column [cl. 7.6.5.1 of IS 800 :2007]
L0 568
= =21.76 <0.7 ×93.35=65.34
r yy 26.1
( L/r ) = 93.35 has been calculated in lecture no. 35
Hence safe.
So for design of lacing we have consider this example that is a design of laced column of
10.5 meter long to carry a factor load of 1000 kN and the column is restrained in position but
500
not in direction at both ends. And provide single lacing system this has been told. And use 2
channel section placed as back to back. And assume the steel of grade Fe410 and bolts of
grade 4.6. And design the lacing system with bolted connections and design the lacing system
with welded connections, right. So basically this is the example which has been done earlier
in lecture 35.
So same example has been considered here and in lecture 35 we have seen that how to
calculate the spacing between two members and how to decide the section size that has been
discussed in lecture 35 and we have seen that ISMC 300 section is sufficient to take care the
load the given and 184 millimetre spacing is sufficient, so this is what earlier we have
calculated.
501
Now we will come to the design of lacing system, so coming to design of lacing first we have
to find out the angle of lacing.
Let use a single lacing system with inclination of lacing bar ¿ 45°
Assume gauge length = 50 mm

°
Spacing of lacing bar, L0=2 × ( 184+ 50+50 ) cot 45 =568 mm
L0 568
= =21.76 <0.7 ×93.35=65.34
r yy 26.1
502
Hence safe.
2.5
Maximum shear, V ¿ ×1000 ×10 3 (cl. 7.6.6.1 IS 800: 2007)
100
¿ 25000 N
V 25000
Transverse shear in each panel ¿ = =12500 N
N 2
503
Now
Compressive force in lacing bars (F) ¿ ( V / N ) cosec 45°
¿ 12500× 1.414
¿ 17675 N ¿ 17.67 kN
Lacing flats:
Now the size of lacing flat we can find out where we can choose lacing member as a flat
plate. If we choose that then we have to decide the thickness and width of the lacing member
as well as the length of the lacing member. So to find out the thickness of the lacing member
we have to find out the length and also to find out the width of the lacing member we know
that it should be dependent on the diameter of bolt.
Let us provide 16 mm diameter bolts

Minimum width of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.2 IS 800: 2007)
¿ 3 ×16=48 mm
Let us provide 50 mm wide flats.
Length of lacing flat (l) = ( 184+50+50 ) cosec 45° = 401.6=402 mm
Minimum thickness of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.3 IS 800: 2007)

1
¿ × length of flat between inner end bolts.
40
504
1
¿ × 402
40
¿ 10.05 mm
Provide 12 mm thick plate with a width of 50 mm.

t 12
Minimum radius of gyration, r= = =3.464 mm
√ 12 √ 12
402
l/r of lacing bar ¿ =11 6<145
3.464
Hence, ok
l
For =11 6 , f y =250 MPa and buckling class c, the design compressive stress from
r
Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
94.6−83.7
f cd =94.6− ×6=88. 06 MPa
10
Design compressive strength, Pd =A e f cd

−3
¿ ( 12× 50 ) × 88. 06× 10
¿ 52.8 4 kN > 17.67 kN
Hence ok.
505
The tensile strength of flat is minimum of (cl. 6.2 and 6.3.1 of IS 800: 2007)
( B−d h ) t f u (50−18)×12 × 410

i) 0.9 × =0.9 × ×10−3=113.36 kN
γ m1 1.25
and
A g f y (50 × 12) ×250

ii) = × 10−3=136.363 kN
γm 0 1.1
Hence, the tensile strength of the flat is (minimum of 113.36 kN and 136.36 kN) 113.36 kN >
17.67 kN
Hence, safe.
506
Lecture 38
Module 8
Connection Design of Lacing System
This lecture will be the continuation of previous lecture where we have gone through a design
example for designing of lacing system. So in last lecture we have discussed how to design a
lacing system, how to provide the length of the lacing, width of the lacing, thickness of the
lacing. Then what will be the spacing between two lacings, what will be the angle of
inclination so all the details of lacing has been discussed.
Today we will be going to discuss on the connection part, connection part means the
connection between the lacing and the main column. So as lacing is taking certain amount of
load, we need to design the lacing with the column in such a way that the connection between
these two can withstand the developed load, how to calculate developed load, we have
already discussed, today also we will calculate the developed load that means the transverse
shear which is 2.5 percent of the compressive load which is acting on the main compressive
member.
So from that we have to find out the value of the shear and then we can find out what will be
the connection details. Two type of connections are there, one is bolt connection another is
weld connections. So for bolt connection how we will be designing the bolt and weld those
things will be discussed today. So before going to do that first I will very quickly go through
the previous days example so that we can remind our earlier calculations which will be
required for calculating the design strength of bolt and number of bolt or weld length.
507
column is restrained in position but not in direction at both the ends. Provide single lacing
system. Use 2 channel section placed as back to back. Assume steel of grade Fe 410 and bolts
of grade 4.6.
a) Design the lacing system with bolted connections
b) Design the lacing system with site welded connections
Now we will try to find out the design of the lacing system with bolted connections and
design of the lacing system with welded connection where we will consider the weld as site
weld or shop weld, depending on that γ mw value will be decided.
508
So if we remind the earlier lecture we can see that we got already the solution of this that is
ISMC 300 back to back we have provided with a spacing of 184 millimetre, right.
L0 568
= =21.76 <0.7 ×93.35=65.34
r yy 26.1
Hence safe.
2.5
Maximum shear, V = × 1000× 103 (cl. 7.6.6.1 IS 800: 2007)
100
¿ 25000 N
V 25000
N 2
Compressive force in lacing bars ¿ ( V / N ) cosec 45°
¿ 12500× 1.414
¿ 17675 N ¿ 17.67 kN
509
Lacing flats:
Let us provide 16 mm diameter bolts
Minimum width of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.2 IS 800: 2007)
¿ 3 ×16=48 mm
Let us provide 50 mm wide flats.
Length of lacing flat = ( 184+50+50 ) cosec 45° = 401.6=402 mm
Minimum thickness of lacing flat (cl. 7.6.3 IS 800: 2007)

1
¿ × length of flat between inner end bolts.
40
1
¿ × 402
40
¿ 10.05 mm
Provide 12 mm thick plate with a width of 50 mm.
t 12
√ 12 √ 12
510
402
l/r of lacing bar ¿ =11 6<145
3.464
Hence, ok
l
For =11 6 , f y =250 MPa and buckling class c, the design compressive stress from
r
Table 9c of IS 800 :2007
94.6−83.7
f cd =94.6− ×6=88. 06 MPa
10
Design compressive strength, Pd =A e f cd
¿ ( 12× 50 ) × 88. 06× 10−3
¿ 52.8 4 kN > 17.67 kN
Hence OK.
In every case I have told that if the criteria is not satisfying then we have to increase either
the thickness of the plate or the width of the plate means case to case we have to check.
Sometimes we may have to reduce the length of the lacing plate by changing the angle of
inclination, so in this way we have to find out which dimensions and which orientation of
lacing will be provided so that the design of the lacing will be safe.
511
( B−d h ) t f u (50−18)×12 × 410

i) 0.9 × =0.9 × ×10−3=113.36 kN
γ m1 1.25
and
A g f y (50 × 12) ×250
ii) = × 10−3=136.363 kN
γm 0 1.1
Hence, the tensile strength of the flat is (minimum of 113.36 kN and 136.36 kN) 113.36 kN >
17.67 kN
Hence, safe.
512
Now we will come to now we will come to bolted connections. Now first is we are going to
consider the bolt connection when lacings are not overlapped each other.
a) Bolted connection (If lacings are not over lapped each other)
Assuming that the 16 mm bolts of grade 4.6 are connecting both the lacing flats with the
channel at one point and that the shear plane will not pass through the threaded portion of
bolt.
Strength of bolt in single shear ¿ A sb ( f u / √3 ) /γ mb
π × 162
¿ ( 4 )( )
×
400
√3
/1.25
¿ 37147 N
Minimum pitch,
513
Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 =1.5×18 = 27 mm
Provide p=50 mm and e= 30 mm
kb is smaller of 30/(3×18), 50/(3×18)-0.25, 400/410, 1
Kb = 0.56
Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 k b dt f u /γ mb

410
¿ 2.5 ×0. 56 ×16 ×12 × =88167 N
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 37147 N = 37 kN
No of bolts required = 17.67/37 = 0.5 ≈ 1
Hence, provide one bolt at each end.
514
This case if lacings are overlapped each other.
b) Bolted connection (If lacings are over lapped each other)

Assuming that the 16 mm bolts of grade 4.6 are connecting both the lacing flats with the
channel at one point and that the shear plane will not pass through the threaded portion of
bolt.
Strength of bolt in double shear ¿ 2× A sb ( f u / √ 3 ) / γ mb
¿ 74294 N
Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 k b dt f u /γ mb (l et k b as 0.49)

410
¿ 2.5 ×0. 56 ×16 ×12 × =88167 N
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 74294 N = 74.294 kN

515
No of bolts required = 2× ( V / N ) co t 45 ° = 2× 12500× cot45 ° =25/37 = 0.7 ≈ 1
Hence, provide one bolt at each end.

Tie plate (cl. 7.7.2.2 IS 800 :2007):
Tie plates are provided at the ends of the laced column.
Effective depth ¿ 184+2 ×C yy >2 b f
¿ 184+2 ×23.6=231.2 mm ¿ 2× 90=180
Which is all right.
Minimum edge distance for 16 mm diameter bolt
¿ 1.5× ( 16+2 )=27 mm, say 30 mm
Overall depth of tie plate ¿ 231.2+ 2× 30=291.2 mm
Provide a tie plate of 300 mm depth.
516
Length of the tie plate ¿ s +2 bf =184+2 × 90=364 mm
1
Thickness of the tie plate ¿ ( 184+2 ×50 ) =5.68 mm
50
Hence, provide a tie plate of 6 mm thickness.
Provide a tie plate of size 364×300×6 mm at both ends with 16 mm diameter bolts as shown
in the figure.
517
518
568 mm
364 mm
50 ISF 12 mm
ISMC 300
300 mm
184 mm
300 mm
519
Lacing flats and tie plates are connected by bolts (overlapped each other)
b) Welded connection:
Flange thickness of ISMC 300 = 13.6 mm
Minimum size of weld for 13.6 mm thick member = 5 mm [Table 21 IS 800: 2007]
410
Strength of weld/unit length ¿ 0.7 ×5 × =552.33 N/mm
√ 3× 1.5
1767 0
Required length of weld ¿ =32 mm
552.33
Adding extra length for ends, the weld length to be provided
¿ 32+ 2× ( 2× 5 )=52 mm
Provide 100 mm weld length at both ends.
520
Tie plate:
Overall depth ¿ 184+2 ×23.6=231.2 mm
Depth provided = 240 mm
Let length of the tie plate ¿ 18 4+ 2×50=28 4 mm
1
Thickness of tie plate ¿ ×28 4=5.68 mm
50
Provide a 8 mm plate to accommodate a 5 mm weld.

Provide a tie plate of size 283×240×8 mm size and connect it with 5 mm welds as shown in
the figure.
521
50 ISF 12 mm
ISMC 300
184 mm
283 mm
300 mm
Lacing flats and tie plates are connected by welding
So in this lecture we have demonstrated the connection between lacing member and the
compression member, two types of connections, one is weld connection, another is bolt
connection. Again for bolt connections we have shown that if the lacings are overlapped and
if lacings are not overlapped then how to calculated the forces for overlapping lacing and for
not overlapping lacing and then how to provide the number of bolt because the strength of the
bolt will be different for two cases.
And also we have found the dimension of the tie plate, how to find the dimensions of tie plate
that also has been demonstrated through the example and then again we have calculated the
same for weld connections like what will be the length of weld required we have calculated
and how to distribute also we have shown and how to calculate the length of weld based on
the size of the weld that also has been demonstrated, right. So I hope this example will make
you clear about the connections between compression member and lacing member.
522
Lecture 39
Module 8
Design of Double Lacing System
So far we have discussed about the single lacing system, the design criteria of single lacing
system in the earlier lecture. Today we will be discussing about the double lacing system and
we will see how to design the double lacing system. The design procedure will be more or
less similar like single lacing system except the certain configuration of the lacing like what
will be the spacing of the lacing. Double lacing system is used when we need less spacing
between two lacing systems and it is required when the main compression members are weak
in a certain direction means from radius of gyration point of view.
So if the slenderness ratio of a certain member is very weak in a direction then sometimes we
need to provide very fine spacing between two lacing systems and in that case we go for
double lacing system with lighter member. And in case of double lacing system also we can
use flat plate bar, angle sections, light channel section and tubular section.
Now first I will go through one example today with the basis of this double lacing system
where we will see that if the angle sections say four angle sections are connected, then how to
find out the sectional area of the angle, how to make the spacing of the angle and then the
lacing systems. So let us go through the example.
523
Example: Design a built-up double laced column with four angles to support an axial load of
800 kN. The column is 14 m long and both ends are fixed. Assume Fe 410 grade of steel.
Here we have to provide four column four equal angle section to make the built-up section
and this built-up sections has been shown here which will be making as a box section.
Now for designing first we have to know what should be the angle section size and what
should be the spacing between the two angles.
524
Solution:
P=800 ×10 3 N
Le =0.65 L=0.65 ×14=9.1 m
Assume a design stress of 150 MPa,
800 × 103
Required area ¿ =5333.33 mm2
150
Provide four angles ISA 90×90×8 mm.
The relevant properties of ISA 90×90×8 are (Table III, SP 6-1)
A=1379 mm2 C zz =C yy=25.1 mm
4
r zz =r yy =27.5 mm I zz =I yy =104.2 ×10 mm4
525
Area provided ¿ 4 × 1379=5516 mm2
800 ×10 3
For 5516 mm2, the required f cd = =145.03 MPa
5516
From Table 9c of IS 800: 2007, (for f y =250 MPa)
L
Now allowable =74.36
r
Effective length of the laced column ¿ 1.05× 9.1=9.5 m
9.5 ×103
Required r= =127.76 mm
74.36
526
Moment of inertia of required section,
I =A r 2 ¿ 5516 ×127.762=90.03× 106 mm4
Equating required and provided moment of inertia,
6 4 2
90.03 ×10 =4 × 104.2× 10 +5516 ź
ź=124.76 mm
Spacing of angles S=2 × ( ź +C zz )
¿ 2× ( 124.76+25.1 )=299.72 mm
Therefore, provide S=300 mm
527
2
300
4
Now, I zz =I yy=4 ×104.2 ×10 +5516 ( 2
−25.1 )
¿ 90.22× 106 mm4
r=
√ 90.22× 106
5516
=127.9 mm
L 9.5 ×103
= =74.28
r 127.9
L
Now From Table 9c of IS 800:2007, for =74.28 and f y =250 MPa
r
528
152−136
f cd =152− × 4.28=145.15 MPa
10
Capacity of the built-up column ¿ 5516 ×145.15 ×10−3
¿ 800.65 kN ¿ 800 kN
Hence, the column is safe.
Now I will go to the connecting system, so in first part what we have seen that we could find
the section size of the angle and then the spacing between two members and two angles in z
direction and y direction and spacing has been made in such a way that moment of inertia in
both the direction becomes same so that the equal resistance of the column can be achieved
and the spacing has been made in such a way that the strength of the member becomes more
than the actual one.
Connecting system:
Let us provide a double lacing system with the lacing flats inclined at 45° . Both are
provided at the centre of the leg of angle.
Spacing of lacing bar, L0=( 300−45−45 ) cot 45 °
¿ 210 mm
L0 210
= =7.64<50
r yy 27.5
529
It should also be less than 0.7 × ( L/ r ) =0.7 ×74.28
¿ 52>7.64
2.5 3
Shear force, V = × 800× 10 =20000 N
100
V 20000
N 2
As double lacing is provided,
Compressive force in lacing bar ¿ ( 2VN ) cosecθ

¿ ( 20000
2 ×2 )
cosec 45 °
¿ 7071.1 N
530
Section of lacing flat:
Let us provide 20 mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
Minimum width of flat ¿ 3 ×20=60 mm (cl. 7.6.2, IS 800:2007)
Length of lacing flat ¿ ( 300−45−45 ) cosec 45° =297 mm
1
Minimum thickness of the lacing flat ¿ ×297=4.95 mm
60
Provide a flat of size 60×6 mm.

t 6
√ 12 √ 12
L1 0.7 ×297
Slenderness ratio, = =120.2<145
r 1.73
Hence the flat is safe.
531
L1
For =120.2 and f y =250 MPa (Table 9c, IS 800:2007)
r
83.7−74.3
f cd =83.7− × 0.2=83.5 MPa
10
Capacity of lacing bar ¿ 83.5 ×60 ×6=30060 N ¿ 7071.1 N

Hence the lacing bar is safe.
( B−d h ) t f u (60−22)×6 × 410

i) T dn=0.9× =0.9 × × 10−3=67.3 kN
γm 1 1.25
and
A g f y (60 × 6)× 250
ii) T dg= = ×10−3 =81.82 kN
γm 0 1.1
Hence, tensile strength of lacing flat ¿ 67.3 kN > 7.07 kN

532
So tensile strength of lacing flat will become lesser of these two that means 67.3 kilonewton
and this 67.3 kilonewton is higher than the 7.071 kilonewton which was the force coming on
the lacing member. So from the force point of view the lacing member whatever we have
chosen is okay.
Connections:
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in double shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS 800:2007)
533
f ub
¿ 2×
A nb (√ )
3
=2 ×245 ×
( 400
√3 )
= 90528 N
γ mb 1.25
Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 k b dt f u /γ mb (cl. 10.3.4, IS 800:2007)
k b is smaller of
e 35
( =
3 d 0 3 ×22 )
=0.53 ,
p 50
(3d −0.25=
0 3 ×22
−0.25=0.51)
f ub 400
( =
f u 410
=0.98 )
and 1.0
Hence k b =0.51
534
410
∴ Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 ×0.51 ×20 ×6 × =50184 N
1.25
Hence, the strength of bolt ¿ 50184 N=50.18 kN
2 ×7071.1 ×cot 45°

Number of bolts ¿ =0.28
50184
Provide one 20 mm diameter bolt.
Tie plate:
Tie plates are to be provided at each end of the built-up column.
Effective depth of tie plate ¿ 300−2 ×25.1
¿ 249.8 mm > 2×90 mm
Overall depth of tie plate ¿ 249.8+2 ×e

¿ 249.8+2 ×35=319.8 mm
Length of tie plate ¿ 300 mm
1
Thickness of tie plate ¿ × ( 300−45−45 )
50
¿ 4.2 mm
Provide 300×320×6 mm tie plate and connect it with bolts as shown in figure.
535
So in this lecture we have understood how to find out the appropriate section of the angle to
withstand that given load then how to find out the distance between two angle that is spacing
in both the direction to withstand that much load and then how to design a lacing system
using double lacing. So this is all about the lacing system in next class we will discuss about
the batten system, thank you.
536
Lecture 40
Module 8
Batten Plates
In this lecture I am going to discuss about batten plates. Batten plates are used when the built-
up sections are carrying axially compression load. So batten plates unlike lacing, lacing plates
are placed in inclined way where the batten plates are placed perpendicular to the axis of the
column that means if columns are vertical then batten plates should be horizontally placed.
Now batten plates are generally placed in both the side with equal spacing and in both the
side at same position we provide batten plates and minimum number of batten plates along
the length of the column will be atleast three. So in the codal provision it is told, right and as I
told that batten plate will be generally used when the purely axial compressions are acting on
the built-up column. So for that case we generally use batten plates.
But when eccentricity comes into picture in the compression member then this does not work
efficiently, so in that case we have to go for lacing system. So in this lecture our discussions
will be on batten members. In case of batten member we have to know certain things like one
is what will be the length of batten member, what will be the depth of batten member and
what will be the thickness these three things we have to know. Then also we have to know the
spacing, spacing between two batten members, then the connection between batten member
and the and the main member.
So connections may be of two type bolt connections or weld connections. So what are the
forces coming on the joint that we have to calculate and then we have to find out what will be
the number of bolts, how bolts will be placed so all the details can be made, right.
537
So let us come to some general requirements which are given in code IS: 800-2007 in clause
7.7, which stated that compression members composed of two main components battened
should be preferably have their two main components of the same cross section and
symmetrically disposed about their major axis, right. Where ever practicable the compression
member should have a radius of gyration about the axis perpendicular to the plane of batten
not less than the radius of gyration about the axis in the plane of batten.
Let us provide two channel section back to back. Now this sections has to be provided in such
a way that ryy and rxx will be becoming mostly same or ryy should be little higher. So because
we cannot change the value of rxx, rxx will be same for all the cases but if we increase the
spacing between these two ryy value will be increased because Iyy value is going to increase.
So ryy has to be increased in such a way that the strength in both the axis become more or less
similar.
538
Now in next clause that is in 7.7.1.3 it is told that the batten shall be placed opposite to each
other at each end of the member and points where the member is stayed in its length and as
far as practicable, be spaced and proportioned uniformly throughout and number of battens
shall be such that the member is divided into not less than three bays within its actual length
from center to center of connection.
Another consider has to be remember that is the effective slenderness ratio, in case of batten
member the effective slenderness ratio of the column will be increased by 10 percent, you
have remember that what will be the increase of effective slenderness ratio for lacing
member. So in case of batten member it will be 10 percent, so these are some codal
provisions which we need to keep in mind.
539
Now in clause 7.7.2 we can see that the transverse shear to the batten is considered as 2.5
percent of the axial force, right so that also has to be consider. So similar to the lacing system
the transverse shear on batten member will come as 2.5 percent of the axial compressive
force. Next the longitudinal shear on the batten member say Vl, which can calculate as
VC
Longitudinal shear V l= along the column axis
NS
VC
And moment M= at each connection,
2N
Where,
C = Center to center distance of battens longitudinally
N = No of parallel planes of battens
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid of the bolt group/welding

connecting the batten to the main member
V = The transverse shear force
Now few things we have to remember while using batten members, one is batten plates are
has to be provided symmetrically as far as possible. And at both ends we should provide
batten, right batten plates should be provided both ends of the member or tie plate we can
provide.
540
And another thing again I am repeating that the number of battens should be such that the
member is divided into not less than three bays. So say suppose I am providing one batten
here, another batten here so atleast three bays I have to provide, right and they should be
spaced and proportioned uniformly throughout means this spacing should be uniformed, right
and minimum three battens has to be provided.
Now coming to the dimension of batten, so how to find out the batten thickness, batten length
and batten depth. So thickness when I am coming which is mentioned in clause 7.7.2.3 batten
minimum thickness tmin can be considered as
ai
t min >
50
Where, ai is the distance between the inner most connecting lines of rivet or bolt or weld
perpendicular to the main member.
Then we have to find out the batten depth of batten, so the effective depth should be
• d > 0.75a for intermediate battens
• d > a for end battens
• d > 2b for any battens
a = centroid distance of members
541
b = width of member in the plane of batten
Therefore, the batten depth should be higher at the end batten. However in any case d can be
greater than 2b, where b is the width of the member in the plane of batten.
Now let us come to the spacing of the batten, criteria for spacing between two batten is given
in clause 7.7.3, where it has beem mentioned that this spacing should be uniformed
throughout its length as far as possible.
The spacing of the battens (C) be such that the slenderness ratio of the lesser main component
over the distance is not greater than 50 or 0.7 times the slenderness ratio of the main member
as a whole, about the axis parallel to the batten.
C
<50∨0.7 λ
r cmin
Then the end condition end conditions are described in clause 7.7.4, right. Design the end
connections to resist the longitudinal shear force V1 and the moment M as calculated in earlier
step.
Similarly for bolt I will find out what is the forces or stresses coming in the bolt due to
moment and due to longitudinal shear and then we have to find out whether the number of
bolts we are going to provide is sufficient to carry that much load or not, right.
542
And in this clause it is told that for weld connections lap should be greater than 4t and the
total length of weld at edge of batten should be greater than D/2, right. Then length of weld at
each edge of batten should be less than one third of total length of weld required and return
weld along transverse axis of column should be less than 4t.
This is what I was discussing
Total length of weld at edge of batten >D/2
Length of weld at each edge of batten < 1/3 total length of weld required.
Return weld along transverse axis of column < 4t.
543
Now to summarize the things whatever I have discussed I will show few slides next, now
while going for design of batten member we will see what are the steps used to be carried out
systematically so that the batten members can be designed. So in fact when we are going to
design a batten member or we are going to do some workout example for designing of batten
member then we have to follow certain steps otherwise we will not be able to do the design
properly and we will be writing a computer program also step by step we have to go through.
Step 1:
2.5
Find the transverse shear V t = ×P
100
VtC
Calculate longitudinal shear along the column axis as V l= and
NS
VtC
Calculate moment at each connection as M = ,
2N
Step 2:
Calculate effective slenderness ratio (λe) as 1.1 × λ
Step 3: -
For a given shape, find out gauge distance g on each side & find the distance a between the
bolt
544
Step 4: -
Calculate spacing of the batten plates (C) from the following conditions:
C
<50∨0.7 λ
r cmin
Minimum 3 nos of batten should be provided along column length.
Step 5: - Size of end battens:

Effective depth ( d )=s+2 ×C yy and d >2b,
[b is width of member in the plane of batten]
Overall depth (D) = d+2e, e being edge distance
Length of batten ¿ S +2 b
Thickness of batten = a/50 where a is the distance between inner bolt/rivet/weld
545
Step 6: - Size of intermediate battens:
s +2 ×C yy
Effective depth 3 ) and d >2b,
( d )= ¿
4
[b is width of member in the plane of batten]
Overall depth (D) = d+2e, e being edge distance
Length of batten ¿ S +2 b
Thickness of batten = a/50 where a is the distance between inner bolt/rivet/weld
Step 7: -
Design the end connections for batten system to resist calculated V l and M.
So these are the steps which will be used to design a batten system, right. So in this lecture
what in summary if we discuss what we have learned that certain specifications in terms of
the dimension of the batten and its spacing has been calculated as per the codal provisions
and code has dictated certain guidelines as per the guidelines we have provided the steps and
also we have seen how to calculate the transverse shear, then longitudinal shear and moment
on the batten plate and then we need to design the end connections the connection using weld
or bolt to resist this moment and longitudinal shear, right.
And in next class we will go through one example through which it will be clear how to
design a batten, thank you.
546
Design of Steel Structures
Module 9
Lecture No 41
Design of Batten using Bolt Connection
So in last lecture we have discussed the design methodology of Batten system. So in Batten
system basically first we need to find out the spacing between 2 compression members for
build-up section. Batten plates will be provided at a certain distance, then this spacing
between two Batten members is to be found and then we need to find out the dimensions of
Batten member, means Batten depth, Batten thickness and Batten length, and whether we are
going for Bolt connection or Welded connection, depending on that we have to find out the
Batten dimensions. And once Batten dimension is done, we need to check whether the Batten
is capable of carrying that much load or not.
Once that is done, if the dimensions of the Batten is okay from the strength point of view,
then we will go for design of connection. Connection of Batten I mean. So connection as I
told, connection may be 2 type, one is weld connection and another is Bolt connection, so
depending on the type of connection we will try to find out what are the type of forces are
developing, what are the type of stresses are developing. In fact, stresses will be basically
sheared stress and bending stress and also we have to find out the combine stress like
equivalent stress and then we need to see whether design is ok or not. So these are the
methodology which we have discussed.
547
Today we will be discussing about the bolt connection details, so let us go through the
following example.
Example: A batten column of 10-m long is carrying a factored load of 1150 kN. The column
is restrained in position but not in direction at both ends. Design a built up column using
channel sections placed back to back. Design batten plates using bolt connection.
So first part I will go very quickly and it is known to us, but we have to go through this
because we have to know the dimensions of the Batten plates and the spacing between 2
members, compression member size, unless we know that we will not be able to find out the
dimensions of Batten plates. So to find out the dimensions of the Batten plates we need to
know this, so first we will go through the calculation of the Batten plates, column dimensions
and its spacing.
548
Solution:
Design of column:
P=1150 kN ¿ 1150 ×10 3 N
L=1.0 ×10 ×10 3=10000 mm
Let design axial compressive stress for the column be 125 MPa
1150 × 10 3
Required area ¿ =9200 mm2
125
Let us try two ISMC 350 @ 413 N/m
Relevant properties of ISMC 350 [Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
A=5366 mm2, r zz =136.6 mm, r yy =28.3 mm

t f =13.5 mm
I zz =10008 ×10 4 mm4 I yy =430.6× 10 4 mm4 c yy =24.4 mm

b=100 mm
549
L 10000
= =73.21
r zz 136.6

e
¿ 80.53<180 ; ok
For ( KLr ) =80.53 ,

e
136−121
f cd =136− ×0.53=135.2 MPa
10
¿ 10732× 135.2×10−3
¿ 1451 kN > 1200 kN, OK
550
[ ( )]
2
S
2
[ )]
2
S
or 2× 10008× 10 4=2 × 430.6 ×10 4 +5366 ( 2
+ 24.4
⇒ S=218.4 mm

Spacing of battens:
As per clause 7.7.3 of IS 800: 2007,
C
< 0.7 λ
r yy
¿ C<0.7 × λ ×r yy =0.7 × 80.53× 28.3=1595.3 mm
C
Also < ¿ 50 or C<50 × 28.3=1415 mm
r yy
Hence, provide battens at a spacing of 1400 mm.

551
Size of end battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800: 2007):
Provide 20 mm bolts.
Edge distance ¿ 1.5× hole diameter [Cl. 10.2.4.2 IS 800:2007]
¿ 1.5× ( 20+2 )=33 mm
Effective depth ¿ s +C yy
¿ 220+2 ×24.4=268.8 mm > 2× 100 mm

Hence, chosen effective depth is safe.
Overall depth ¿ 268.8+2 ×33=334.8 mm
1
Required thickness of batten ¿ × ( 220+2 ×50 ) =6.4 mm
50
Length of batten ¿ 220+2 ×100=420 mm

Provide 420×340×8 mm end batten plates.
552
Size of intermediate battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800: 2007):
3
Effective depth ¿ ×(220+ 2× C yy )
4
3
¿ ×(220+ 2× 24.4)=201.6 mm
4
> 2× 100 = 200 mm

Hence adopt an effective depth of 210 mm
Overall depth ¿ 210+2 ×33=276 mm
Therefore, provide a 420×300×8 mm batten plates @1400 mm c/c.
553
Design forces:
2.5 2.5 3
Transverse shear, V t= × P= × 1150×10
100 100
¿ 28750 N
VtC
Longitudinal shear V l=
NS
Spacing of battens, C = 1400 mm
N = No of parallel planes of battens = 2
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid of the bolt/weld group
¿ ( 220+2× 50 )=320 mm
554
28750 ×1400
∴ V l= =6289 1 N
2× 320
V t C 28750 ×1400
Moment, M= = =10.06 ×106 N-mm
2N 2 ×2
Check
i) For end battens

62891 250
Shear stress ¿ =23.12 MPa < =131.22 MPa
340 × 8 √3 ×1.1
6 M 6 ×10.06 ×106
Bending stress ¿ 2 = 2
td 8 ×340
250
¿ 65.27 MPa < =227.27 MPa
1.1
Hence safe.
555
b) For intermediate battens
62891
Shear stress ¿ =26.2 MPa < 131.22 MPa
300 × 8
6 × 10.06× 106
Bending stress ¿ =83.83 MPa < 227.27 MPa
8× 3002
Hence safe.
Connection:
The connection should be designed to transmit both shear and bending moment.
Assuming 20 mm diameter bolts.
Strength of bolt in single shear

2
¿
A nb × f ub
√ 3 × γ mb ¿
0.78 × (π × 20
4 )
×400
−3
×10 =45.27
kN
√3 ×1.25
Minimum pitch, p = 2.5d=2.5×20=50 mm
Minimum end distance, e = 1.5 d0 =1.5×22=33 mm
Provide p = 60 mm and e = 35 mm
kb is smaller of 35/(3×22), 60/(3×22)-0.25, 400/410, 1
Kb = 0.53
556
Strength of bolt in bearing ¿ 2.5 k b dt f u /γ mb
410
=2.5× 0.53 ×20 ×8 × ×10−3=69.5 kN
1.25
Hence, strength of bolt = 45.27 kN
6289 1
Number of bolts required ¿ 3
=1.39
45.27 × 10
Let us provide four bolts to take account the stresses due to bending moments as well.
Check for combined action: For end battens
6289 1
Force in each bolt due to shear ¿ =1572 3 N
4
Pitch provided = (D-2e)/3= (340-2 × 35)/3 = 90 mm.
557
Now ∑ r2 = 2[(90/2)2+(90+90/2)2) = 2[452+1352] = 40500 mm2
6
Mr 10.06 ×10 ×135
Force due to moment ¿ = =3 3533 N
∑ r2 40500
Resultant force ¿ √ 157 23 2+33533 2
¿ 37036 N ¿ 37 kN ¿ 45.26 kN
Hence safe.
Check for combined action: For intermediate battens
558
6289 1
Force in each bolt due to shear ¿ =1572 3 N
4
Pitch provided = (D-2e)/3= (300-2 × 35)/3 = 77 mm.
∑ r2 = 2[(77/2)2+(77+77/2)2) = 2[38.52+115.52] = 29645 mm2
Mr 10.06 ×106 ×115.5

Force due to moment ¿ = =39195 N
∑ r2 29645
Resultant force ¿ √ 157 23 2+39195 2
¿ 4 2231N ¿ 4 2.23 kN ¿ 45.26 kN
Hence safe.
559
Okay, so if we see the diagram of the design of the Batten plates if we see, it will look like
this.
560
20 mm bolt
Intermediate batten
420 mm×300 mm×8 mm
End batten
420 mm×340 mm×8 mm
1400 mm
ISMC 350
220 561
mm
220 mm
350 mm
Channels back-to-back connected by bolts
562
Lecture-42.
Design of Batten Plates using Weld Connection.
Today’s lecture is basically the continuous of previous lecture, in previous lecture we have
gone through one example for design of Batten system using bolt connections. Now the same
example we will carried out using weld connections. Now in case of weld connections how
the batten depth is going to change that will be demonstrated and then how the weld length
will be distributed and how the weld size will be obtained those things will be discussed
through one example right.
563
Example: A batten column of 10-m long is carrying a factored load of 1150 kN. The column
is restrained in position but not in direction at both ends. Design a built up column using
channel sections placed back to back.
Design batten plates using weld connection.
Solution:
Design of column:
P=1150 kN ¿ 1150 ×10 3 N
3
L=1.0 ×10 ×10 =10000 mm
Let design axial compressive stress for the column be 125 MPa
1150 × 10 3
¿ =9200
Required area 125 mm2
Let us try two ISMC 350 @ 413 N/m
Relevant properties of ISMC 350 [ Table II SP 6 (1): 1964]
A=5366 r zz =136.6
mm2, mm,
r yy =28.3 mm t f =13.5 mm
I zz =10008 ×10 4 I yy =430.6× 10 4

mm4 mm4
564
c yy =24.4 mm b=100 mm
L 10000
= =73.21
r zz 136.6

e
¿ 80.53<180 ; ok
For ( KLr ) =80.53 ,

e
f y =250
MPa and buckling class c, the design compressive stress
136−121
f cd =136− ×0.53=135.2
10 MPa
¿ A e f cd
Therefore load carrying capacity
565
−3
¿ 10732× 135.2×10
¿ 1451 kN > 1200 kN, OK
566
[ ( )]
2
S
2
[ )]
2
S
or 2× 10008× 10 4=2 × 430.6 ×10 4 +5366 2 + 24.4 (
⇒ S=218.4 mm
Spacing of battens:
As per clause 7.7.3 of IS 800: 2007,
C
< 0.7 λ
r yy
¿ C<0.7 × λ ×r yy =0.7 × 80.53× 28.3=1595.3 mm
C
<¿ C<50 × 28.3=1415 mm
Also r yy 50 or
Hence, provide battens at a spacing of 1400 mm.
¿ 220+2 ×C yy
Overall depth of batten
¿ 220+2 ×24.4=268.8 ≈ 270 mm
567
¿ 220+2 ×C yy
Overall depth of batten
¿ 220+2 ×24.4=268.8 ≈ 270 mm
1
¿ ×220=4.4
Required thickness of batten 50 mm
Adopt battens with the thickness of 6-mm
Let provide a 70 mm overlap of battens on channel flange for welding.
[Overlap > 4 t = 4 × 6 = 24 mm] OK
Length of batten ¿ 220+2 ×70=360 mm
Provide 360×270×6 mm end batten plates.
568
Size of intermediate battens (cl. 7.7.2.3 of IS 800: 2007):
3
¿ ×(220+ 2× C yy )
Overall depth 4
3
¿ ×(220+ 2× 24.4)=201.6
4 mm
> 2× 100 = 200 mm
Hence adopt overall depth of 220 mm
Therefore, provide a 360×220×6 mm batten plates.
Design forces:
569
2.5 2.5
V t= × P= × 1150×103
Transverse shear, 100 100
¿ 28750 N
VtC
Longitudinal shear V l=
NS
Spacing of battens, C = 1400 mm
N = No of parallel planes of battens = 2
S = minimum transverse distance between the centroid of the bolt/weld group
¿ ( 220+2× 50 )=320 mm
28750 ×1400
∴ V l= =6289 1
N
2× 320
V t C 28750 ×1400
Moment, M= = =10.06 ×106 N-mm
2N 2 ×2
Check
i) For end battens.
570
62891 250
¿ =38.82 =131.22
Shear stress 270 × 6 MPa < √ 3 ×1.1 MPa
6
6 M 6 ×10.06 ×10
Bending stress ¿ t d 2 = 6 ×2702
250
¿ 138 MPa < =227.27
MPa
1.1
Hence safe.
b) For intermediate battens.
62891
=4 7 . 64
MPa < 131.22 MPa
¿
Shear stress 2 20 ×6
6 × 10.06× 106
Bending stress ¿ =2 07.85 MPa < 227.27 MPa
6 ×2 202
Hence safe.
Design of weld:
Welding is done on all the four sides as shown in the figure.
Let t=¿ throat thickness of weld.
571
[ ( )]
3 2 3
70 ×t 2 20 2× t × 220
I zz =2 × + ( 70 ×t ) × +
12 2 12
70 × t 3
Neglecting the term 2× 12 being insignificant.
4
Therefore, I zz =3 46 .87 × 10 t mm4
2 20× t 3 2
I yy=2 × [ t ×70 3
12 ]
+2 ×
12
+2× 2 20× t ×
70
2 ( )
3
2 20 ×t
Neglecting the term 2× 12 being insignificant.
Therefore, I yy =5 9 . 62× 104 t mm 4
4 4
I p =I zz + I yy=3 46 . 87 ×10 t+5 9 . 62× 10 t
¿ 406.49 ×10 4 t mm 4
r=
√( 2 20 2 70 2
2
+
2) ( )
=11 5 . 43 mm
572
35
cosθ= =0.3 0
115.43
Direct shear stress (cl. 10.5.9 of IS 800:2007)
62891 1 08.43
¿ =
( 2 ×70+2 ×2 20 ) t t N/mm2
10.06 ×10 6 × 11 5.43

Shear stress due to bending moment ¿ 406.49 ×10 4 t
285.67
¿
t N/mm2
573
Combined stress due to shear and bending
¿
√( 108.43 2 285.67 2
t )(+
t )
+2 ×
108.43
(t
×
285.67
)(
t
× 0.3 )
334.59 410
¿ < =189. 4
t √ 3 × 1.25
574
Combined stress due to shear and bending
¿
√( 108.43 2 285.67 2
t )(+
t )
+2 ×
108.43
(
t
×
285.67
t)( × 0.3 )
334.59 410
¿ < =189. 4
t √ 3 × 1.25
or t=1.77 mm
Size of weld ¿ 1.77/0.7=2.5 mm
The size of weld should not be less than 5 mm for 13.5 mm flange.
Hence provide a 5 mm weld to make the connection
575
576
5 mm weld
Intermediate batten
360 mm×220 mm×6 mm
1400 mm
End batten
360 mm×270 mm×6 mm
577
Channels back-to-back connected by welding:
578
Lecture-43.
Design of Column Splice.
Today we are going to discuss about the column splices and how to design the column
splices. Basically when a joint is provided in the length of member is called splice. When the
length of column is more than the available length of steel section, in such cases we use
splice joint. So in many cases we have seen the available length of rolled steel section in the
market is less than the required length of the column, so in that case we need to joint those
together concentrically so that the load is transferred from one section to another section.
Also in case of multi storey building where the columns are provided along its height we
have seen the columns section, size is required less because the load coming to the column
across the height is gradually increasing towards the ground.
Therefore we need to accommodate the column section size larger towards the ground level.
And as a result we need to change the section size across the height and so that the economic
design can be done, in such cases we have to provide splices between two floors to join two
unequal sections. So basically if a compressive member is loaded concentrically we should
not provide any splice, means theoretically we do not need to provide any splice but load is
never axial and truly it is not axial and real column has to resist the bending due to the
eccentricity of the load, therefore we have to provide the splice.
579
So now if we see the specification for design of splices we can see that when the ends of the
compression members are faced for complete bearing over the whole area, these should be
spliced to hold the connected members accurately in position and to resist any tension when
bending is present. Say for example these two columns are joined by the spliced, so basically
to hold the two members properly we need to connect these members through splice.
And when such members are not faced for complete bearing, splices should be designed to
transmit all forces to which these are subjected, means sometimes it may be faced complete
bearing or it may not be faced complete bearing. In case of complete bearing the whole area,
then it should be spliced just for to transfer the load from upper storey to lower storey right.
And spliced is designed just to connect the members accurately in position, so that in position
it may stay.
But in case of incomplete bearing we have to transfer the load so the splice has to be designed
in such a way the load transformation from one storey to another storey are done properly.
And splices are basically designed as a short column.
580
Now if we draw a column flange having complete bearing we can see from the front view
that two I sections are spliced. So here if load is concentrically acting then for complete
bearing the splice is provided just to hold the columns in position right. So we provide splice
in two sides of the flange. Basically column flange are having complete bearing and the front
view would look like as shown in the figure. Now maybe we have to provide certain bolt
connection here to connect the two section using splice.
So it is spliced in this position and if it is connected by bolt then maybe we can connect two
numbers of bolt at each phase of each splice right. This will be looking as side view and if
web has to be spliced for shear, then it should look like this (as in figure) if we splice the web
also then it will look like this (as in figure).
Where splice will be provided for shear we can provide bolt at the flange to make a complete
bearing, and also at web we can provide splicing. So this is web splice for shear. So these are
the columns flanges having complete bearing.
581
Now let us see what are the steps we need to follow so that we can design the splice properly.
Step-1:
For axial compressive load the splice plates are provided on the flanges of the two column
sections to be spliced.
If the column has machined ends, the splice is designed only to keep the columns in position
and to carry tension due to the bending moment to which it may be subjected. The splice
plate and the connection should be design to carry 50% of the axial load and tension.
If the ends are not machined, the splice and connections are design to resist the total axial
load and any tension, if present due to the bending moment.
582
• The load for the design of splice and connection due to axial load,
Pu
P u 1= (For machined ends)
4
Pu
P u 1= (For non machined ends)
2
Pu
Where, is the axial factored load.
• The load for the design of splice and connection due bending moment,
Mu
P u 2=
lever arm
Where, lever arm is the c/c distance of the two splice plates and
M u is the factored bending moment.
So then we will calculate total Pu on the splice plate, which will be Pu1 + Pu2.
583
Step-2:
Splice plates are assumed to act as short columns (with zero slenderness ratio). So these
fy
plates will be subjected to yield stress ( ).
Step-3:
The cross-sectional area of the splice plate is calculated by dividing the appropriate portion of
the factored load coming over the splice by the yield stress.
Pu 1 + Pu 2
c/s area required ¿ fy
Step-4:
The width of splice plate is usually kept equal to the width of the column flange.
¿ bf
Width of splice (width of flange)
The thickness of the splice plate can be found by dividing the c/s area of the plates with its
width.
Therefore the thickness of the splice plate can be found by dividing the cross sectional area
with its width. That means whatever area is coming area divided by width of flange will be
the thickness. So this is how we can find out the thickness of the splice plate.
584
Step-5:
Nominal diameter of bolts for connection is assumed and the strength of the bolt is computed.
Step-6:
In case of bearing plate is to be designed between two column sections, the length and width
of the plate are kept equal to the size of lower-storey column and the thickness is computed
by equating the ultimate moment due to the factored load to the moment of resistance of plate
section.
So in case of bearing plate if it is to be designed between two column sections then we have
to consider these aspects. So these are the steps which we need to remember. Now following
585
the steps we will go through this example and we will be able to understand how to design a
splice.
Example 5.12: A column ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m is to support a factored axial load of 500
kN, shear force of 120 kN and bending moment of 40 kNm. Design the splice plate and
connection using 4.6 grade bolts. Use steel of grade Fe 410.
So the example is like this a column of ISHB 300 at 576.8 Newton per metre is to support a
factor load of 500 kN. So Pu that P total factor load is 500 kN and shear force 120 kN and
bending moment 40 kN.
So three type of forces are there right factor load P is 500 kN and shear force is given 120 kN
and bending moment is coming 40 kN metre. Now design the splice plate connection using
4.6 grade bolts and let us use steel of grade as Fe 410. So if we use this this data then we will
see how to design the splice plate, due to this axial load and shear force and bending moment.
Solution:
f u =410 f y =250
For steel of grade Fe 410: MPa, Mpa
f ub =400
For bolts of grade 4.6: MPa
586
Partial safety factors for material: (Table 5 IS 800:2007)
γ m 0=1.10 γ mb=1.25
The relevant properties of ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m are (Table I, SP 6-1)
A=7485 b f =250
mm2 mm,
t f =10.6 mm t w =7.6 mm
Assume the ends of the column sections to be machined for complete bearing. As the column
ends are flush, it is assumed that 50% of the load is transferred directly and 50% is
transferred through the splice and fastenings. Therefore,
500
¿ 50% of ¿ 125 kN
The direct load on each splice plate 2
Mu 40 ×10
3
Load on splice due to moment ¿ = =130.72 kN

lever arm 300+ 6
(Assuming 6 mm thick splice plate, the lever arm ¿ 300+6 mm)
Ps=125+ 130.72=255.72
Total design load for splice, kN
587
P s 255.72 ×103
Sectional area of splice plate required ¿ =
fy 250
¿ 1022.9 mm2
588
Width of the splice plate should be kept equal to the width of the flange.
Here, the width of the splice plate ¿ 250 mm
1022.9
mm ≮6 mm
¿ =4.09
Hence, thickness of splice plate 250
Provide a 250×6 mm splice plate.
The length of the splice plate depends upon the number of bolts in vertical row.
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS 800:2007)
f ub
¿
A nb (√ )
3
=
245 ×
( 400
√3 ) −3
× 10 = 45.26 kN
γ mb 1.25
589
¿ 2.5 k b dt f u /γ mb
Strength of bolt in bearing (cl. 10.3.4, IS 800:2007)
For 20 mm diameter bolts the minimum edge distance,
e=1.5 ×d 0 =1.5× ( 20+2 )=33 mm
The minimum pitch, p=2.5 ×20=50 mm
Let us provide an edge distance (e) of 35 mm and pitch (p) of 60 mm.
kb is smaller of
e 35 p 60
( =
3 d 0 3 ×22
=0.53 , )(
3 d0
−0.25=
3 ×22
−0.25=0.66 ),
f ub 400
( =
f u 410
=0.98 ) and 1.0
k b =0.53
Hence
590
410
∴ Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 ×0.53 ×20 ×6 × ×10−3
1.25
¿ 52.15 kN
Hence, the strength of bolt (Bv) ¿ 45.26 kN
Ps 255.72
Number of bolts required, n= = =5.65≈ 6
B v 45.26
Provide 6 bolts for each splice.

So if we provide 6 number of bolts then we can find out the length of splice plate.
Length of the splice plate ¿ 2×(2 ×60+ 2×35)=380 mm
Provide a splice plate 380×250×6 mm on column flanges as shown in the figure.
591
Lecture-44.
Design of Column Splice due to Shear.
Now I am going to discuss about the design of splice plate due to shear. Today’s lecture will
be the continuation of previous lecture, in previous lecture we have discussed about the
design steps for splice plates. A splice plate may undergo due to axial compression and
moment and because of moment tension may come and also shear may come into picture. So
we have gone through one example and we have shown that how to design the splice plate
due to axial compression and moment.
And we have seen that due to axial compression certain compressive force will come into
splice plate and due to bending moment also certain amount of force will come into the
flange. And because of that we need to design the splice plate because of combined action.
And the splice plates are designed through the connection through its flange because the
bending and compressions are designed in the flange. And shear will be taken care by the
weld therefore we will be design a web splice for shear.
592
So if we recall the earlier diagram web splice for shear we can see that it is something like
this say the columns are spliced by bolt connections, so this are the column flanges which are
spliced due to complete bearing. So here we have provided a certain number of bolts to splice
them right. So this splice plate can take care the axial load as well as the moment, but the
shear force will be taken by the weld, because we know the shear force is generally taken by
the web of the plate.
So in case of web splice for shear we need to provide some plate here right. Now we need to
know what will be the dimension of the plate what will be the number of bolt required to join
to withstand certain shear force. So this is basically web splice for shear. So I will go through
one example and that example is nothing but the continuation of the previous example which
we have discussed in earlier lecture. So first part I will just give a brief summary of that,
means whatever we have done in earlier class we just go through that very quickly and then
to just remind these dimensions and other things right and then I will design a splice plate on
the web.
593
Example 5.12: A column ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m is to support a factored axial load of 500
kN, shear force of 120 kN and bending moment of 40 kNm. Design the splice plate and
connection using 4.6 grade bolts. Use steel of grade Fe 410.
Solution:
f u =410 f y =250
For steel of grade Fe 410: MPa, Mpa
f ub =400
For bolts of grade 4.6: MPa
Partial safety factors for material: (Table 5 IS 800:2007)
594
γ m 0=1.10 γ mb=1.25
The relevant properties of ISHB 300 @ 576.8 N/m are (Table I, SP 6-1)
A=7485 b f =250
mm2 mm,
t f =10.6 mm t w =7.6 mm
Assume the ends of the column sections to be machined for complete bearing. As the column
ends are flush, it is assumed that 50% of the load is transferred directly and 50% is
transferred through the splice and fastenings. Therefore,
595
500
¿ 50% of ¿ 125 kN
The direct load on each splice plate 2
Mu 40 ×10
3
Load on splice due to moment ¿ = =130.72 kN

lever arm 300+ 6
(Assuming 6 mm thick splice plate, the lever arm ¿ 300+6 mm)
Ps=125+ 130.72=255.72
Total design load for splice, kN
P s 255.72 ×103
Sectional area of splice plate required ¿ =
fy 250
¿ 1022.9 mm2
Width of the splice plate should be kept equal to the width of the flange.
Here, the width of the splice plate ¿ 250 mm
1022.9
mm ≮6 mm
¿ =4.09
Hence, thickness of splice plate 250
Provide a 250×6 mm splice plate.
The length of the splice plate depends upon the number of bolts in vertical row.
Strength of 20 mm diameter bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS 800:2007)
f ub
¿
A nb (√ )
3
=
245 ×
( 400
√3 )
× 10
−3
= 45.26 kN
γ mb 1.25
596
Strength of bolt in bearing (cl. 10.3.4, IS 800:2007)
e=1.5 ×d 0 =1.5× ( 20+2 )=33 mm
Let us provide an edge distance (e) of 35 mm and pitch (p) of 60 mm.
kb is smaller of
597
( 3ed = 3 ×22
0
35
=0.53 ) , (
p
3d
−0.25=
0
60
3 ×22
−0.25=0.66 ) ,
f ub 400
( =
f u 410
=0.98
) and 1.0
k b =0.53
Hence
410
∴ Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 ×0.53 ×20 ×6 × ×10−3
1.25
¿ 52.15 kN
Hence, the strength of bolt (Bv) ¿ 45.26 kN
Ps 255.72
Number of bolts required, n= B v = 45.26 =5.65≈ 6
Provide 6 bolts for each splice.
Length of the splice plate ¿ 2×(2 ×60+ 2×35)=380 mm
Provide a splice plate 380×250×6 mm on column flanges as shown in the figure.
598
Splice plates for shear:
The splice plate for the shear force is provided on the web. A pair of splice plate (one on each
side of web) are provided.
Strength of bolt in double shear ¿ 45.26 ×2=90.52 kN
Strength in bearing
k b =0.53
Where, (taking e=35 mm and p=60 mm),
t=7.6 mm (web thickness)
410
∴ Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5 ×0.53 ×20 ×7.6 × × 10−3=66.06
1.25 kN
Hence, strength of 20 mm bolt ¿ 66.06 kN
599
Shear force in the web, V =120 kN
120
¿ =1.8≈ 2
Number of bolts required 66.06
Provide 2, 20 mm diameter bolts on each side of the splice.
Length of the splice plate ¿ 4 × 35=140 mm
Width of the splice plate ¿ 60+2 ×35=130 mm
Design shear strength of splice plate (cl. 8.4, IS 800:2007),
fy
V d= × h ×t
√3 × γm 0
250
¿ × 130× ( 2 t s ) × 10−3
√3 ×1.1
¿ 34.12t s
kN
600
V d >V
Now,
34.12t s >120
or
Thickness of the splice plate required,
120
t s= =3.52 mm ≮6 mm
34.12
So provide a pair of 140×130×6 mm shear splice plates on each side of the web as shown in
the figure.
601
So we can provide a pair of 140×130×6 mm shear splice plate at each side of the web. So
now if we draw the total diagram to see the splice plate and its weld distribution then we can
see that in front view it will be like this (as shown in the figure).
35 35 60 35
60
60 20 mm
35 140 bolts
35
60
60
35
ISHB 300
Front view Side view
This is front view you can see this and in side view you can like this, so this is the place
where the columns are spliced. So the column and the spliced plates are these and we are
providing total six number of bolts in each splice ok. So this is 20 mm diameter of bolt right.
So in this lecture what we can see this is basically a continuation of the previous lecture in
which we have shown how to design the column splice when the column is subjected to not
only the axial force but also bending and shear. Now if only axial forces considered then we
do not need to provide web splice on the flange. But for shear we have to provide web splice
right. So through this typical example when three types of forces are acting then how to
design the splice plate considering its connection, connection means if we consider the bolt
connections how to find out the number of bolts and how the arrangements should be done,
what should be the plate thickness of the splice, those has been demonstrated through that
example. So I hope this will be made clear on the design of splice plates.
602
Lecture-45.
Introduction to Flexural Member.
Today I am going to start a new chapter on flexural member i.e. beam. At the beginning, I
will be giving a lecture on introduction to flexural member and beam is basically a structural
member which is subjected to transverse loading, that means the load is perpendicular to its
axis. And because of this transverse loading the members produces bending moment as well
as shear force. So we have to design a beam against bending moment and shear force.
Now in an anatomy of a structure we have seen that apart from compression member or
tension members beams also exist and beam is an important member in a structural system
which carries load which are basically transverse load and the loads from the super structure
which are coming to the column, mainly from the floor and floor to beam and then beam to
column. Therefore, we need to know how to design the beam against such type of forces like
bending moment and shear force.
In case of steel structure we will see the beam is not only failed due to bending or due to
shear but also failed due to lateral buckling, due to local buckling, due to torsional moment,
so many things will come into picture. Why we have not studied this since in case of RC
603
structure because in case of RC structure generally we provide rectangular section, where
such type of problems will not come. But in case of steel structure we provide certain rolled
section where the thickness of the member is quite less means say for example I section the
thickness of the flange the thickness web is quite less.
So there will be chances of local buckling of the flange, web which we need to take care, so
all these aspects will be discussed in this chapter. Beams are basically two types, primary
beam and secondary beam. So secondary beam are rested on the primary beam and in case of
bridge structure, we often use a term girder and this bridge structures are designed
considering beam as a plate girder, where the girder dimensions are decided on the basis of
the bending moment and other forces.
604
• JOIST: A closely spaced beams supporting floors or roofs of building but not
supporting the other beams.
• GIRDER: A large beam, used for supporting a number of joists.
• PURLIN: Purlins are used to carry roof loads in trusses.
• STRINGER: In building, beams supporting stair steps; in bridges a longitudinal

beam supporting deck floor & supported by floor beam.
• FLOOR BEAM: A major beam supporting other beams in a building; also the
transverse beam in bridge floors.
605
• SPANDREL BEAM: In a building, a beam on the outside perimeter of a floor,

supporting the exterior walls and outside edge of the floor
• GIRT: A horizontal beam spanning the wall columns of industrial buildings used to
support wall coverings is called a GIRT.
• RAFTER: A roof beam usually supported by purlins.
• LINTELS: This type of beams are used to support the loads from the masonry over
the openings .
606
Basically the nature of the force is transverse load and sections lie in the plane of symmetry
that means say suppose a I section is there, now when loads are coming across its cross
section it is considered that it is a symmetric loading. That means that there is no twisting and
it follows that such a beam will be primarily subjected to bending accompanied by shear in
the loading plane with no external torsion and axial force. Though in case of beam the axial
force may come into picture sometimes and sometimes torsion also will also be there because
of unsymmetrical loading.
Now the torsion cannot completely be avoided. If the beam section is symmetrical and load
also act in a plane of symmetry then also torsion may occur due to the instability of
compressive stress. The reason I am reading once again the reason is the instability caused by
the compressive stresses. So such instability is defined as Lateral Buckling right and when it
is involved only local components of a beam it is called Local Buckling. So while going for
design of a beam member we need to design for lateral buckling and local buckling and this
local buckling is a function of width to thickness ratio.
607
Primary modes of failure of beams are as follows:
1. Bending failure
2. Shear failure
3. Deflection failure
1. Bending failure: Bending failure generally occurs due to crushing of compression

flange or fracture of tension flange of the beam.
2. Shear failure: This occurs due to buckling of web of the beam near location of high
shear forces. The beam can fail locally due to crushing or buckling of the web near the
reaction of concentrated loads.
3. Deflection failure: A beam designed to have adequate strength may become
unsuitable if it is not able to support its load without excessive deflections.
608
So, in case of beam we may use different type of sections one is say solid section. We can use
different type of rolled section like channel section, we can provide, again thin walled open
section, I section can be provided, and sometime fabricated I sections are also provided. This
is used frequently to fulfil the requirements and sometimes we provide the thin walled close
section also. In addition, box section can be used sometimes, angle sections can be used, light
weight transverse load angle sections may be provided, however for this case asymmetric
load will come into picture which need to be taken care. Moreover, sometimes compounds
sections also we provide.
Compound sections means combination of two sections. Say for example this is a steel rolled
I section and along with that say if the compression is quite high compared to tension then we
609
may provide sometimes channel section at the top. So, this is called compound section which
is made of two different section.
Then also we use composite beam, composite beams mean made of steel and concrete say for
example this is one case, this is I section and over the I section we provide the RCC slab or
beam and connect with the shear connector. This has certain advantages in the sense we know
the concrete are good in compression and steel are in tension.
So when the beam members are subjected to gravity load/transverse load, then the
compression occurs at the top and tension occurs at the bottom. So if we use such type of
composite section, then compression will be taken care by the concrete section and tension
will be taken care by the steel. So we can make advantageous use of the concrete properties
and steel properties. Also sometimes we use encased beam, encased beams means we provide
certain I section, then at periphery of the I section, we cast with concrete so this is also
sometimes used.
Another section we can use that is suppose a cantilever beam is there having certain UDL
load bending moment will be maximum at the support and minimum at the free end. So we
provide a section of same depth throughout the length then it will be uneconomical. We have
to provide a particular section considering the maximum bending moment and throughout
the section we use which will be uneconomical. So to make economical we can provide
varying cross section.
610
So another section is called castellated beam. We take a I section and we cut through its web,
web in this way. So this is a cut right, if we displace the upper section in this way then we can
make a sections like this. So, the advantage of this kind of section is that if we slide these
two, then the depth of the cross sectional will increase. If the depth of the cross section is
increased then the moment of inertia will increase. If moment of inertia increase then we
know stress will be decreased. So this type of beam is called Castellated Beam right.
611
Another way of making castellated beam is to insert a plate here right, with a certain
thickness and depth right. So if we insert this then we can see the depth is becoming much
higher than the original one, so through this I can achieve the moment of inertia to a large
extent right and here we need to weld to make it monolithic. So this is one another example
of castellated beam.
Now we will find out some consideration for design of beams. When we are going to design a
beam we have to consider that beam should be proportional for strength in bending keeping
in view of the lateral and local stability of the compression flange. Now the selected shape
should have capacity to withstand the essential strength in shear and local bearing. So
whatever shape we will select because different type of shape we can select like I section,
channel section, some other section. That shape should have capacity to withstand essential
strength in shear because the shear will be taken by the web, so web thickness should be
sufficient enough to take care the shear force and local buckling. Then the beam dimension
should be suitably proportional to stiffness, keeping in mind their deflections and
deformations under service conditions.
612
Now another thing we have to see that different types of sections have certain limitations, like
angles and T sections are weak in bending. So unless transverse load is less, generally we do
not go for angle section or channel section or T sections. Then channels only be used under
light loads that means when the length of the member is quite high but load is less, then in
such case we can use channel section.
The rolled steel channels and angle section are used in those cases where they can be
designed and executed satisfactorily, so that has to be also keep in mind. Now, this is because
the loads is not likely to be in the plane, which removes torsional eccentricity. So while using
such type of section we have to keep in mind that torsional eccentricity may come into
picture. Also, it is complicated to calculate the lateral buckling characteristics of these type of
sections.
So, we have seen here certain demerits of using channel sections angle sections or T sections,
later we can see that in case of flexural member I sections will be the best one , because I
sections are symmetric and it can take both compression and tension equally.
So today, we will like to conclude here, next day we will see why I sections is better, and then
will see what are the failures may come into picture and then how to develop a design
methodology. Thank you.
613
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 10 Lecture 46
Failure Modes of Flexural Members
Now, I am going to discuss about different aspects of failure modes of the flexural members.
We know in case of RCC structure the failure modes are basically the failure due to bending,
due to shear and due to deflection, which is basically a serviceability criteria. However in
case of steel structure as the structural sections are mainly hot rolled sections, it is not like a
rectangular section or like a compact section. Therefore, some other type of failure may also
occur. The other types of failure are like local buckling of the cross section, local buckling of
the web and failure of the flange, because of low thickness compared to its width. Lateral
torsional buckling also come into picture. So such type of failures may arise in case of steel
structure.
Therefore, when we are going to design a flexural member, made of steel we have to consider
not only the bending shear or deflection, we have to consider other sort of failures and design
criteria has to be satisfied from those points of view so that the local failure may be restricted.
614
So first kind of failure is excessive bending triggering collapse. When load is too high or
span is too long then maximum Bending moment will be huge at mid span in general.
However, it may differ considering the support condition and loading condition as well. So,
because of the excessive bending moment the collapse may occur due to bending.
Bending failure is the basic failure mode and in this case, the beam is prevented from lateral
buckling and the component elements are list compact so that they do not buckle locally. So
such beams will collapse due to plastic deformation. Another type of failure is lateral
torsional buckling, which is an important failure criteria for steel flexural member. So lateral
torsional buckling comes in picture when the beam is quite long.
615
Say for example, if an I-section have long length then it may fail due to lateral torsional
buckling. So here, if load is acting in transverse direction and support conditions are there
then it may buckle laterally and this lateral buckling occurs due to combination of lateral
deflection and twist. The proportion of the beam support conditions and the load applied on it
are the certain factors, which affect the failure due to lateral torsional buckling. say for
example, if the load is not concentric twisting will occur because of the torsional moment
across the section and because of that lateral torsional buckling take place.
The next category is failure by local buckling i.e. failure of flange in compression, failure of
web due to shear and compression. These are the certain modes of failure, which come into
616
this category. Say for example, if we have a box section, then it may fail in its flange due to
compression. So, box sections may require flange stiffening to prevent premature collapse. In
addition, it may fail due to web under shear and compression.
If we have a member under concentrated load then at the point of application of concentrated
load the force is heavy, because load cannot disperse throughout it section. So therefore the
failure may occur due to compression. This can be overcome by the use of additional bearing
plate, which will disperse the load.
617
Under Category 4, the basic failure modes are shear yield of web, crushing of web and
buckling of thin flange.
So local crushing of web means if we have a section and if it is under concentrated load then
it may fail due to local crushing. Sometimes the flange width is quite high compares to its
thickness. Therefore, it may buckle due to the very thin flange width. However, this type of
failure may overcome, if we use additional plate at the flange by welding so that width to
thickness ratio increase.
618
While choosing the most suitable section for beam we have to see certain things, we have to
know what a stress diagram along the cross section is; say for example, if we see rectangular
section then we know initially bending stress will develop. If the load is going to increase
then after certain period the bending stress will reach to its yield stress. Therefore, after
further increase of the load, it will start formation of plastic hinge. So the sections will
undergoes under plastic deformation, right. So after certain time the section will become fully
plastic.
Now we know bending stress developed is calculated by (M/I )×y. So if we increase the I
value then the development of stress at the extreme fiber can be reduced. So from the
experiment we see that, if I section are provided then compared to its cross sectional area or
requirement of material, its moment of inertia is quite high. Therefore, with lightweight, we
can achieve high amount of moment of inertia and as a result, we can reduce a major amount
of stress. For this reason, I-section is the most suitable section.
Now another thing is that in case of I section, it is symmetry in but if we use channel section
or angle section then unsymmetric bending will come into picture for which, we have to
again consider the stress developed by unsymmetrical bending,. So, in case of high load or
large length if we use I section then, because of the high moment of inertia we can reduce the
deflection as well as stress due to bending. Therefore, we generally choose I section most
preferably.
619
Now coming to conventional use of various sections, we generally use channel or angle
section, in case of PURLIN. Generally, PURLINS are subjected to light load. So, for such
type of member we use either angle section or channel section. I sections are preferred in case
of LINTEL. Double angles, T sections or sometimes also ISJB sections are also used. For
large spans and light loads, where the deflection may come huge, we have to increase the I
value, so CASTELLATED BEAM is preferred in this type of situation.
620
There are few criteria’s we should follow to select a beam section. The first is the usual
method of selecting a beam section, by using a section modulus (Z) which is equal to I /Y,
because maximum bending stress is equal to (M/Z). The criterion of economy is weight rather
than section modulus, because sometimes, if the section modulus is high, weight may be less
or may be high also. So but if we consider to make section economical then lighter weight
section should be chosen however that may not be achieved always. Therefore, we have to
see the section modulus and sometimes deflection and occasionally shear may be the
necessary criteria for selection of section. This is very rare, when we have to consider the
deflection criteria where deflection is quite high and we have to arrest the deflection and for
such type cases we may have to go for castellated beams and sometimes shear may be the
guiding criteria, so for that also we have to consider corresponding section.
And, if we have a similar section modulus of different kind of section then among those
lighter section should be chosen.
Primarily design criteria is based on these three aspects, these are based on deflection, based
on stress due to bending and due to shear. However, other criteria has also to be fulfilled like
the torsional buckling, local buckling, web buckling, flange buckling. Then web crippling
also will come into picture, which has to be overcome by providing certain measurement.
Now the maximum deflection depends on the span length, moment of inertia of the section,
load distribution and modulus of elasticity and support condition. So these are the five factors
on which, the maximum deflection depends. So depending on that we will try to find out
621
what is the maximum deflection coming into the member and what is the limiting deflection,
depending on those we have to decide the section size.
(Refer slide time: 19:43)
In general the maximum deflection in beam is given by
W L3
δ=K
EI
Where,
W Total load on the span
L Effective span length
E Modulus of elasticity
I Moment of inertia of the section
K a coefficient depends upon the distribution of loading & end support of the beam
The value of the coefficient K for different loading conditions and support conditions are
listed below.
622
623
624
625
626
Limiting deflection is given in table 6 of IS 800-2007 and maximum deflection for different
support and loading condition should not exceed the limiting deflection. Effective length for
lateral torsional buckling can be found from table 15. Effective length for lateral torsional
buckling will be required for calculation of design bending moment.
627
So few of them are shown here, which are given in table 15 and in clause 8.3.1 of IS
So in today’s lecture, the last thing we like to discuss is about the design procedure. So design
procedure can be divided into 3 parts, one is structural; another is secondary effect and
practical limitations. So, basically the design of the member will be done due to bending
moment, due to shear force, due to deflection and due to stability. So first we will see, what is
the maximum bending moment coming into the member and for that what will be the size of
the section whether, it is capable of carrying, this much bending moment or not. Then we will
check whether the developed shear force can be carried by the section. If the design shear
628
force is more than the external shear force then it is fine otherwise we have to increase the
section size to withstand the shear force coming from the load.
Then the maximum deflection can be calculated for the given load and the support and we
will check whether the maximum deflection is exceeding the limiting deflection or not. If it is
exceeding the limiting deflection then we have to increase the section size and we have to
redo all the things, otherwise we can go ahead. Another thing is stability; lateral torsional
buckling may come into picture. So from that point of view also we have to consider whether
the structure is safe or not. So these are the structural aspects which has to be taken care for
design.
Another is the local buckling. So local buckling means buckling of the web, crippling of the
web or the buckling of the flange, because of thin flange, flange may also buckle. So these
are the some secondary effects, which has to be also taken care and we have to check whether
it is safe against local buckling, against secondary forces or not and also we have to check the
connections whether it is okay or not and then we will go to the practical limitations.
Practical limitations means we have to consider the durability, fabrication tolerances and
erection strategy. Erection strategy means we have to see that the given section which is
coming, is possible to be erected properly or not that we have to see and we have to make a
erection strategy so that the given sections can be erected properly in the site.
So in short, the main thing that we have discussed is the failure criteria of the member and
what are the type of failure may come into picture and because of that failure how to take
proper measurement, how to go through design that will be discussed in next class.
629
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 10 Lecture 47
Laterally Supported Beams
Today, I am going to discuss about the design procedure of the laterally supported beam. So,
beam can be designed on the basis of laterally supported or laterally unsupported. So today,
we will discuss only about the laterally supported beam where, its web is supported laterally
so that the lateral torsional buckling may be prevented.
The design criteria of such beam is given in clause 8.2.1 of IS 800-2007, the detail has been
discussed where the design bending strength can be calculated in two cases, one is for low
shear another is for high shear. When the shear force is less than the 0.6 times that design
shear strength then it is called low shear, that means if V d is the design shear strength of the
cross section and V is less than 0.6Vd then it is a case of low shear. So in case of low shear we
can find out the design bending strength simply by from this formula
Md = βbZpfy / ϒm0
630
To avoid irreversible deformation under serviceability loads, following conditions are to be

satisfied.
Md ≤ 1.2Zefy/ϒm0 for simply supported beams
Md ≤ 1.5Zefy/ϒm0 for cantilever beams;
Where,
βb = 1.0 for plastic and compact sections;
βb = Ze / Zp for semi-compact sections;
Zp , Ze = plastic and elastic section moduli of the
cross-section, respectively;
fy = yield stress of the material; and
ϒm0 = partial safety factor
631
So once we find the value of Md then we can go ahead for next; however if we see that the
shear force is more than the 0.6 times design shear strength of the beam section then we can
use this formula,
Md = Mdv
Where, Mdv is the design bending strength under high shear and it is calculated as,
(a) Plastic or compact section
Ze f y
M dv =M d−β ( M d −M fd ) ≤1.2
γ m0
Where,
2
V
(
β= 2 −1
Vd )
Vd = design shear strength as governed by web yielding or web buckling = Av f v
fv = design shear strength
Av = shear area = Dtw for rolled sections
= dtw for welded/built up sections
V = factored shear force
632
Md = plastic design moment of the whole section disregarding high shear force effect and
considering web buckling effects.
Mfd = plastic design strength of the area of the cross section excluding the shear area
d 2 tw
M fd = f for built up sections
4 y
D2 t w
M fd = fy for rolled sections
4
d=D−2t f
D is the overall depth and d is the effective depth.

633
So after designing for bending we will go for design for shear. Clause 8.4, IS 800:2007
describes the criteria. In clause 8.4, it says that the factored design shear force should satisfy,
Vn
V≤
γ m0
Where Vn = nominal shear strength of a section
A v f yw
V n=
√3
Where Av = shear area
fyw = yield strength of the web
Now shear areas (Av) can be calculated as given in clause 8.4.1.1, IS 800:2007 for different
types of section.
634
Next, in case of web buckling we can see that the web behaves like a column if placed under
concentrated load. If we have I-section say for example, a concentrated load, the web may
buckle depending on the type of member. So if the web is thin then it may buckle or
sometimes it may cripple also.
635
So for calculating web buckling, the effective depth for different cases has been given say for
example, when the web is restrained against lateral deflection and rotation, the effective depth
is considered as d1/2, right where d1 is a depth of the web; if it is restrained against lateral
deflection, but not against rotation then the effective depth will be 2/3d 1. If the retrained
against rotation, but not against lateral deflection then effective depth will be d 1 and if not
restrained against rotation and lateral deflection the effective depth will be 2d1. So this is
required to calculate the compressive stress of the web.
636
So for calculation of web buckling strength we need to find out how the bearing plate should
be provided to prevent the web buckling. Say for example, if a member is subjected to
concentrated load at certain point then also there is a chance of web buckling here and under
the support, because of the reaction at the support. Therefore, at support and the point where
concentrated load is applied we need to provide bearing plate. If we provide the bearing plate
then the load will be dispersed with 45-degree angle. This is the flange and if this is neutral
axis depth, then the width for which we have to calculate is B=b+2n 1 where n1 is the length
from dispersion at a 45 degree angle to the level of neutral axis, b is the width of the bearing
plate. At support the width for which the buckling load should be calculated is B1=b+n1.
So the web buckling strength can be calculated by,
F wb=B t w f cd
(below concentrated load)
F wb=B 1 t w f cd
(at support)
Where,
Fwb = web buckling strength at the support
B = b+ 2n1 , B1= b+n1
637
n1 = length from dispersion at 45° to the level of neutral axis
tw = thickness of the web
fcd = allowable compressive stress corresponding to assumed web strut according to buckling
curve c.
Now here the when we are going to calculate the design compressive stress f cd we need to
know what is the value of slenderness ratio.
638
Here, the effective length of strut will be le = 0.7d
l e 0.7 d
Thus, the slenderness ratio λ= =
ry ry
The radius of gyration, r y =

√ √
Iy
A
=
bt3
=
t
12× b ×t √ 12
0.7 d 0.7 d × √ 12 2.5 d

Hence, λ= = ≈
ry t t
Thus, the slenderness ratio of the idealized web-strut is taken as
2.5 d
λ=
t
Once the slenderness ratio is found and for bucking class C, for a particular grade of steel we
can find out the value of fy, we can find out the fcd value from this parameters.
Now we will discuss about the web crippling for which it may fail. Web crippling occur when
a member is under concentrated load, say for example, we have a support condition here we
have a support condition here, so it may fail at the root like this. So web crippling may occur
due to concentrated force at the support due to concentrated force, otherwise in other case
also, it may fail at the point of concentrated load.
Web crippling strength can be found as,
639
b1 t w f yw
F wc=
γ m0
Where
Fwc = web crippling strength
b1 = bearing length
= b+2n1 under concentrated load
= b+n1 under reactions at support
Minimum bearing length = 100 mm
n1 = dispersion through the flange to the flange-to-web connection at a slope of 1:2.5
to the plane of the flange i.e. n1=2.5 ( t f + R 1 )
fyw = design yield strength of the web
So, if this web crippling strength is more than the load coming into the member at that point
then it is fin otherwise we have to increase the section or increase the web width so that web
crippling can be avoided.
So today we have discussed that a beam is designed for bending moment then depending on
two cases; low shear and high shear. Once design bending strength is calculated we will go
for calculation of the shear strength. Then we should check the strength against web buckling
and web crippling. Of course we have not discussed about that deflection criteria, which also
need to be fulfilled that means we we will find out what is that maximum deflection coming
on the member due to the load and support condition avoiding limiting deflection and if the
criteria is satisfying then fine otherwise again we have redo.
640
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 10 Lecture 48
Design of Laterally Supported Beams
Now, I am going to discuss the design procedure of a laterally supported beam. So in last
lecture we have discussed how to calculate the design bending strength of a laterally
supported beam, design shear of a laterally supported beam. So in today’s lecture first, I will
go through very quickly the design steps for laterally supported beam and then I will go
through one workout example.
So in first step, we can find out the load acting on the beam and then we can calculate the
appropriate load by multiplying the partial load factor. In the second step, we can find out the
bending moment distribution and shear force along the beam length and from that we can
find out maximum bending moment at shear force, because I have to design the beam against
the maximum bending moment and maximum shear force.
In the third step, on that basis of max. BM we can find out a trial plastic section Zp,
Md
Z p=
f y /γ m 0
where Md is the maximum bending moment, which we have calculated, F y is the yield stress
of the material and γm0 is a material safety factor. So from this in the fourth step, we can find
641
out the trial plastic section and from the plastic section modulus we can find out a
corresponding section whether we are going for ISMB or ISLB depending on that we can
find out the section whose plastic section modulus is greater than the calculated plastic
section modulus.
Then in the 5th step, we can classify the section as plastic or compact or semi-compact from
table 2, IS 800: 2007. Once it is done then I can find out the design shear strength V d which is
calculated by
fy
V d= ht
√3 γ m 0 w
So design shear strength Vd can be calculated from this and then we should check whether it
is high shear or low shear. If the maximum shear force is less than 0.6V d then the beam is in
low shear and if it is more than 0.6Vd then beam is in high shear.
So considering high shear or low shear, the formula will be different for calculating design
bending strength. So if it is in low shear then I can find out Md as,
For low shear:
Md = βbZpfy / ϒm0
≤ 1.2Zefy/ϒm0 (for simply supported beams)
≤ 1.5Zefy/ϒm0 (for cantilever beams)
642
value as this that is beta b into Zp Fy by gamma m0, right. So now for a particular section we
know Zp value and depending on the type of section whether it is plastic, compact or semi-
compact, I can find out the βb value and γm0 value we know.
And for high shear, the design bending strength will be calculated from this formula,
Ze f y
M dv =M d−β ( M d −M fd ) ≤1.2
γ m0
(for plastic and compact section)
fy
M d v =Z e
γ m0
(For semi-compact section)
Now if we see that M is greater than M d then we have to increase the section size and repeat
from step 5, right. That means if the design bending strength is less than the actual moment
then I have to increase the section size and then I have to repeat from step 5 otherwise if it is
satisfying then we can go to step 9.
So from step 5 to 8 will be repeated till the design bending strength is more then the bending
moment developed bending. Once it is satisfied then we have to calculate the design shear
strength Vd and it should be greater than the maximum factored shear force developed due to
643
external load. So maximum factor shear V has been already calculated. If this is fine then we
can go to next step otherwise if V is greater than then Vd then we have to redesign the section
Next step is that we have to check for deflection, which is also another important aspect. The
beam has to be checked for deflection as per table 6, IS 800:2007. In table 6, the limiting
deflection criteria has been given and the maximum deflection can be calculated from the
given boundary conditions and the loading conditions. So from that we can find out the
maximum deflection and maximum deflection has to be less than the limiting deflection
given in table 6, if it is okay then fine otherwise we have to again increase the section.
d
Now we have to check for web buckling. If ≤ 67 ϵ for web without stiffeners, then the
tw
web is assumed to be safe in web buckling and we do not need to check. So the shear strength
of the web is governed by plastic share resistance. But the web should be checked for
buckling, in case of high shear even if this limit is satisfied and the web buckling strength can
be calculated by, fwb= Ab × fcd . Here, Ab = area of the web at the neutral axis of the beam =
Btw and fcd = design compressive stress which can be found from table 9C, as it is buckling
class C. The web buckling strength should be greater than the design shear force.
So if web buckling strength is greater than the design shear strength then fine otherwise we
have to increase the bearing plate length, either we have to increase the bearing plate length
or we have to increase the section size to increase the web buckling strength. So once it is
okay then we will go for checking web crippling. Web crippling strength can be calculated
644
b1 t w f yw
by, F wc= where b1 is the dispersion width and tw is the thickness of the web and
γ m0
Fyw is the yield strength of the web.
So web crippling strength Fwc can be found from this formula and it has to be more than the
shear force coming on that section. So if it is satisfying this criteria then fine otherwise again
we have to increase the section size or we have to increase the bearing length to make the
section safe from the web crippling. So these are the steps which we need to follow to design
a beam with laterally supported.
Example:
A cantilever beam of length 4.5 m supports a dead load (including self weight) of 18 kN/m
and a live load of 12 kN/m. Assume a bearing length of 100 mm. Design the beam.
Solution:
Step 1: Calculation of load
Dead load = 18 kN/m
Live load = 12 kN/m
Total load = (18 + 12) = 30 kN/m
Total factored load =1.5 (18 + 12) = 45 kN/m
645
Step 2: Calculation of BM and SF
2 2
w l 45× 4.5
BM = = = 456 kN-m
2 2
SF = w×l = 45×4.5 = 202.5 kN
Step 3: Choosing a trial section
M × γ m0 456 × 106 × 1.1

Z p , reqd = = = 2006.4×103 mm3
fy 250
Let us select the section ISLB 550 @ 0.846 kN/m

Zpz = 2228.16 × 103 mm3
Zez = 1933.2 × 103 mm3
h = 550 mm, bf = 190 mm, tf = 15 mm, tw = 9.9 mm, R = 18
d = 550 – 2×(15 + 18)
= 484 mm
Izz = 53161.6 × 104 mm4
Section classification
bf
d 484
2 95 < 9.4 = =48.9 < 84
= =6.33 t w 9.9
t f 15
646
Hence, the section is plastic
Step 4: Calculation of shear capacity of the section

fy 250
V d= × h ×t w = ×550 × 9.9
γ m 0 × √3 1.1× √ 3
¿ 714.47 kN
0.6 V d =0.6 ×714.47=428.68 kN > 202.5 kN
Hence, Low shear

647
648
Step 5: Design capacity of the section
Z p × f y 2228.16 ×103
M d= = × 250
γ m0 1.1
¿ 506.4 kNm > BM so, ok.
1.5 × Z e × f y 1.5 ×1933.2 ×103 ×250

≤ =
γ m0 1.1
¿ 659.04 kNm
Step 6: Check for deflection
w l4 30 × 45004
δ= = =1 4 .5 mm
8 EI 8 ×2 ×105 ×53 161.6 ×104
Allowable deflection = L/150 = 4500/150 = 30 mm
OK.
Step 7: Web buckling
Cross sectional area of web for buckling A b =( b1 +n1 ) t w
b1 = 100 mm
n1 = D/2=550/2 = 275 mm
649
Ab = (100 + 275) × 9.9
= 3712.5 mm2
Effective length of the web = 0.7 × d = 0.7 × 484= 338.8 mm
b× t 3w 1 0 0 ×9.93
I= = =8085.8 mm3
12 12
A = 100 × 9.9 = 990 mm2
Refer Slide Time: 24:51)
r min =
√ 8085.8
990
= 2.86 mm
l eff 338.8
λ= = =119
r min 2.85
Allowable stress fcd = 84.8 N/mm2

Capacity of the section = 84.8× 3712.5 = 314.8 kN > 202.5 kN
Hence, the section is safe against web buckling.
650
Step 8 : Check for web crippling
( b1 +n2 ) ×t w × f y
F w=
γ m0
n2 = 2.5 (R + tf) = 2.5(18 + 15) = 82.5 mm
( 1 0 0+82.5 ) × 9.9× 250

F w= =410.6 kN > 202.5 kN
1.1
So the section is safe against web crippling
651
So from this what we can see that we have to design the beam stage by stage. So the steps are
discussed earlier, so according to these steps, we have gone through and we have checked
every step that we found that the assumed section is safe against moment, against shear,
against deflection, against buckling and against crippling. So all the checks are satisfied, so
the sections which are assumed is okay.
652
Course on design of Steel Structures
Prof. Damodar Maity
Mod 10 Lecture 49
Laterally Supported Beams with High Shear
Today, I am going to discuss about the design strength calculation of laterally supported beam
with high shear. In last lecture we have discussed the design procedure for calculating the
section size of a laterally supported beam member due to low shear and we have seen how to
calculate the design bending strength due to low shear. Now in case of high shear, we have
seen that certain reduction will occur in the bending strength calculation, because of the high
shear.
Example: Design a laterally supported beam of effective span 5 m for the following data.
Grade of steel: Fe 410
Factored maximum B.M. = 180 kN-m
Factored maximum S. F. = 220 kN
Check for deflection is not required
653
Solution:
For Fe 410 grade of steel: fy = 250 MPa
Partial safety factor: m0 =1.1
Factored Max. B.M. = 180 kNm
Factored Max. S.F. = 220 kN
Plastic section modulus required,
M γ m 0 180 × 106 × 1.1

Z p , reqd = = =792×10 3 mm3
fy 250
Let us select a section, ISLB 350 @ 0.485 kN/m
Zpz = 851.11 × 103 mm3 Ixx = 13158 × 104
Zez = 751.9 × 103 mm3
h = 350 mm, bf = 165 mm, tw = 7.4 mm, tf = 11.4 mm
R1= 16 mm
d = D - 2(tf + R1) = 350 - 2(11.4 + 16) = 295.2 mm
654
Section classification:
bf
2 165 /2 < 9.4
= =7.23
tf 11.4
d 295.2
= =39.9 < 84
tw 7.4
Hence, the section is plastic.
Check for shear capacity:
Design shear strength of the section,
fy 250 −3
V d= D t w= ×350 ×7.4 ×10 =339.8 kN > V=220 kN
√3 γ m 0 √ 3 ×1.1
0.6Vd = 0.6 × 339.8 = 203.9 kN < V=220 kN
So, it is the case of high shear.
Check for design bending strength:
fy 250
M d=Z pz =851.11 ×10 3 × × 10−6=193.43 kN-m
γ m0 1.1
655
2 2
V 220
β= 2
( Vd ) (
−1 = 2
339.8 )
−1 =0.08 7
3 350
Z fd =Z pZ − A w Y w =851.11 ×10 −(350 ×7.4 )×
4
3
¿ 624.4 9 ×10 mm3
250
M fd =624.4 9× 103 × =141.93 kNm
1.1
656
fy
M dv =M d−β ( M d −M fd ) ≤1.2 Z e
γm 0
M dv =193.43−0.08 7 × ( 193.43−141.93 )=18 8.95 kNm
fy 250
≤1.2 Z e =1.2 ×751.9 ×103 × × 10−6=205.06 kNm
γm 0 1.1
Hence, M dv =18 8.95 kNm > Mu=180 kNm, OK
Check for web buckling (at support)

Web buckling check is not required in general as
d 295.2
= =39.9 < 67ϵ
tw 7.4
However, it is a case of high shear, web buckling check should be applied.

Assume a stiff bearing length, b = 100 mm
A b =B1 t w =( b+ n ) t w =( 100+350 /2 ) ×7.4=2035 mm2
Effective length of web, KL = 0.7d = 0.7×295.2 = 206.64 mm
b t 3w 100× 7.43
Ieff of web ¿ = =3376.8 7 mm4
12 12
Aeff of web = btw = 100 × 7.4 = 740 mm
r=
√ 3376.86
740
=2.136 mm
657
KL 206.64
Slenderness ratio, λ= = =96.74
r 2.136
For λ= 96.74, fyw = 250 N/mm2 , and buckling curve c , the design compressive stress from
Table 9(c), IS 800: 2007.
fcd = 111.56 N/mm2
Capacity of web section Fwb = Abfcd = 2035 × 111.56 × 10-3 = 227 kN
> 220 kN
Which is alright.
Check for web crippling:
658
f yw
F w =(b +n1 )t w
γ m0
n1=2.5 ( t f + R 1 )
= 2.5 ×(11.4 + 16) = 68.5 mm
Stiff bearing length has been assumed, b = 100 mm
Fw = (100 + 68.5)×7.4×250/1.1×10-3 = 283.4 kN
> 220 kN, OK
So today what we have seen an example, to find out a beam section, because of high shear.
So in case of high shear, we need to evaluate the reduction factor bending strength
calculation, right. That reduction factor will be calculated based on the full bending strength
for plastic section without shear area. So from those data we can finally find out the modified
bending strength of the whole section due to high shear. So this is how we calculate. So thank
you.
659
Prof. Damodar Maity
Module 10, Lecture 50
Laterally Unsupported Beams
This lecture we will focus on laterally unsupported beam. So design strength of laterally
unsupported beam will be calculated based on the codal provisions, which is given in clause
8.2.2 of IS 800-2007. Now in case of laterally unsupported beam, the lateral torsional
buckling will play an important role and because of lateral torsional buckling, the full
plasticity of the section will not be developed that means the member will fail before at any
it’s (())(0:59) full bending stress of the section, the it will fail due to laterally torsional
buckling and this lateral torsional buckling happens.
Unlike RCC section or the stocky section, their lateral torsional buckling does not come into
picture, but in case of steel rolled section where we have made economic design in terms of
the material, we face this type of lateral torsional buckling and if we do not provide lateral
support then such type of buckling will occur.
So this buckling occur, because of the cross sectional shape, support conditions and effective
length. So depending on all these bending strength of laterally unsupported beam will be
calculated.
660
The design bending strength for laterally unsupported beams is
M d= βb Z p f bd
Where,
Zp = Plastic section modulus of the cross-section
βb = 1.0 for compact & plastic sections
= Ze/Zp for semi-compact sections
fbd = design bending compressive stress given by,
Χ¿ f y
f bd =
γm 0
ΧLT = bending stress reduction factor to account for lateral torsion buckling
Now bending stress reduction factor to is calculated by,
1
Χ¿ = ≤1. 0
∅¿ + √ ∅2¿ −λ 2¿
Where, ∅¿ =0.5 [ 1+ α ¿ ( λ ¿−0.2 )+ λ2¿ ]
661
α LT = imperfection factor for lateral torsional buckling of beams
= 0.21 for rolled steel sections
= 0.49 for welded steel sections
Suppose, if we use plate to make a I section with the use of welding, then for such type of
section, we can use α LT as 0.49 otherwise for the rolled section we can α LT as 0.21
λLT = non-dimensional slenderness ratio given by,
λ¿ =
√ βb Zp f y
M cr √ Z f
≤ 1.2 e y
M cr
¿
√ fy
f cr , b
Where,
Mcr = elastic lateral buckling moment (Cl. 8.2.2.1) is given by,
M cr =
√{( )[
π2 E I y
2
( L¿ )
G It +
π2 E I w
( L¿ )
2
]}
¿ β b Z p f cr ,b
It = torsional constant ¿ ∑ bi t 3i /3 for open section
I w = warping constant
I y = moment of inertia about weaker axis
662
ry = radius of gyration about weaker axis
L¿ =effective length for lateral torsional buckling (Clause 8.3)
hf = centre-to-centre distance between flanges
tf = thickness of flange
G = shear modulus
fcr,b is the extreme fiber bending compressive stress and is given by,
fcr,b = extreme fiber bending compressive stress corresponding to elastic lateral buckling
moment and is given by
√
2
L¿
f cr , b=
( ) L¿
ry
2
1.1 π E
2
1+
()
1 ry
20 h f
tf
For different values of KL/ry & h f /tf corresponding values of fcr,b is given in Table 14, IS
800:2007. Values of fbd can also be found from Table 13(a) and 13(b), IS 800: 2007
corresponds to different values of fcr,b and fy
663
The following simplified equation may be used in case of prismatic members made of
standard rolled I-sections and welded doubly symmetric I-sections, for calculating the elastic
lateral buckling moment, M cr
√
2
L¿
()
2
π E I y hf 1 ry
M cr = 1+
2 L¿ 2 20 h f
tf
664
However, M cr for different beam sections, considering loading, support condition and non-
symmetric section, shall be more accurately calculated using the method given in Annex E of
IS: 800-2007.
So in today’s lecture what we can see that laterally unsupported length of the member, there
is a chance of lateral torsional buckling. Because of lateral torsional buckling before
developing the full bending stress, the member may fail and therefore, we have to find out
what is the lateral torsional buckling moment. So in next lecture, we will go through one
example, then the detail methodology of the design will be clear. Thank you.
665
Prof. Damodar Maity
Module 10 Lecture 51
Strength Calculation of Laterally Unsupported Beams
Based on the last lecture, now we will go to one work out example and we will see how to
calculate the design bending strength of a member which is laterally unsupported.
So before going to that example, first I will show the glimpse of the lecture what we have
discussed roughly. First we have to find out the X LT value, the bending stress reduction factor
XLT, if we can find out the value of bending reduction factor due to lateral torsional buckling then
I can find out the design bending compressive stress and once I find out the design bending
compressive stress then I can find out the design bending strength.
666
Refer Slide Time: 1:25)
I can find out XLT from this expression,

1
Χ¿ = ≤1. 0
∅¿ + √ ∅2¿ −λ 2¿
which we have shown earlier and to find out the value of X LT we need to find out value of ∅¿
and where the ∅¿ depends on the imperfection factor for laterally torsional buckling that is
α LT and it may be 0.21 for rolled section and 0.49 for welded steel sections and the λLT , the
non-dimensional slenderness ratio can be calculated from this formula,
λ¿ =
√ βb Zp f y
M cr √ Z f
≤ 1.2 e y
M cr
¿
√ fy
f cr , b
where we need to know again the value of Mcr, which is lateral torsional buckling moment.
667
So Mcr can be calculated from,
M cr =
√{( π2 E I y
2
( L¿ ) )[ G It +
π2 E I w
( L¿ )
2
]}
¿ β b Z p f cr ,b
Fcr,b value also can be found from this formula,
668
√
2
L¿
f cr , b=
2
1.1 π E
L¿ 2
( )
ry
1+
()
1 ry
20 h f
tf
otherwise as I told we can find out from table 14, in which we do not need to calculate in details
through these expressions. So once we find the value of Fcr,b we can find out Fbd correspondings
to Fy and Fcr,b. So once we find Fbd value then we can find out the M d, the design bending
strength.
Example: Calculate the design bending strength of ISLB 300 @ 0.369 kN/m considering the
beam to be
(a) Laterally supported
(b) Laterally unsupported
Assume the design force is less the design shear strength and is of low shear. The effective
length of the beam (LLT) is 4 m. Assume Fe410 grade of steel.
Solution:
The relevant properties of ISLB 300
D = 300 mm, bf = 150 mm, tw = 6.7 mm, tf = 9.4 mm,
R1 = 15.0 mm
669
rx = 124 mm, ry = 28 mm
Zpz = 554.32 × 103 mm3, Zez = 488.9 × 103 mm3,
Iz = 7333 × 104 mm4, Iy = 376 × 104 mm4
d = D – 2(tf + R1) = 300 – 2(9.4 + 15) = 251.2 mm
For rolled section: αLT = 0.21
For Fe 410 grade of steel: fy = 250 MPa
Partial safety factor: m0 = 1.10
b 150 /2
= =7.9 8 < 9.4
tf 9.4
d 251.2
= =37.49 < 84
tw 6.7
Hence, the section is plastic.
d 251.2
Since, = =37.49 < 67ϵ
tw 6.7
Shear buckling check of web will not be required.
(a) Laterally supported beam
For low shear,
fy 250
M d = βb Z p =1.0× 554.32× 103 × =125.98 kN-m
γ m0 1.1
670
fy 250
≤1.2 Z e =1.2 × 488.9× 103 × =133.3 4 kN-m
ym0 1.1
Hence, design bending strength = 125.98 kN
671
(b) Laterally unsupported beam
M cr =
√{(
LLT = 4000 mm
π2 E I y
2
( L¿ ) )[ G It +
π2 E I w
( L¿ )
2
]}
E 2× 105
G= = =76.92 ×103
2(1+ μ) 2 ×(1+ 0.3)
bi t 3i
Torsional constant, I t =∑
3
3
150 × 9.43 (300−2 × 9.4)× 6.7
¿ 2× +
3 3
4
¿ 11. 12 ×10 mm4
Warping constant, I w =( 1−β f ) β f I y h2f
❑ ❑
Here, h f = c/c distance between flanges =D - t f =300-9.4 = 290.6
I fc
βf = =0.5 [Since I fc=I ft ]
I fc + I ft
Thus, Iw ¿(1−0.5)× 0.5× 376 ×104 × 290.62
= 7.94 × 1010 mm6
672
673
{√ [ }
π 2 ×2 ×105 ×376 ×10 4
M cr =
( 40002 )
76.92 ×103 ×11.22 ×10 4 +
π 2 ×2 ×105 ×7.94 × 1010
40002 ]
= 92.45 kNm
Or,
2 0.5
[ ( )]
2
π E I y hf 1 L¿ / r y
M cr = 2
1+
2 L¿ 20 hf /t f
2 0.5
¿
π 2 ×2 ×105 ×376 ×10 4 × 290.6
2× 4000
2
1+ [ (
1 4000 /28
20 290.6/9.4 )]
= 96.92 kNm
674
λ¿ =
√ M cr √
β b Z pz f y
=
1× 554.32× 103 × 250
92.45 ×10
6
=¿ 1.22 > 0.4
So, the effect of lateral torsional buckling has to be considered.

∅¿ =0.5 [ 1+ α ¿ ( λ ¿−0.2 )+ λ2¿ ]
∅¿ =0.5 [ 1+0.21 ( 1.22−0.2 ) +1.222 ]
= 1.35
1
Χ¿ = ≤1. 0
∅¿ + √ ∅2¿ −λ 2¿
1
¿
1.35+ √ 1.352−1.222
= 0.52
675
Χ¿ f y
f bd =
γm 0
0.5 2 ×250
¿
1.1
= 118.2 N/mm2
M d=1 ×554.32 ×103 ×11 8.2 ×10−6 =¿ 65.52 kN-m
676
Using Table
hf 290.6
1. KL/ry = 4000/28 = 142.86, = =30.9
tf 9.4
For fy = 250 N/mm2, from Table 14, fcr,b = 155 N/mm2
√
2
L¿
L¿
ry
2
Using equations: f cr , b= 1.1 π 2E 1+ 1
ry
20 h f
( ) tf
()
√
2
4000
f cr , b=
1.1 π 2 ×2 ×105
( 4000 2
28 )
1+
1
( )
28
20 290.6
9.4
= 153 N/mm2
For, fcr,b = 155 N/mm2 and fy = 250 N/mm2 and αLT = 0.21 , from
Table 13(a), IS 800: 2007, fbd = 109.53 N/mm2
Md = 1 × 554.32 × 103 × 107.59 = 60.71 kN-m
M d=¿ 65.52 kN-m (Using expressions)
So the design bending strength of the member when lateral torsional buckling is considered is
65.52 kNm and earlier we found Md as 125.98kNm when the beam is laterally supported.
So we could see from this demonstration that the design bending strength of the member is
decreasing to a certain extent if the lateral torsional buckling effect is considered that means
when the section is laterally unsupported its bending strength is reduced. The reduction that will
depend on the section shape, the lateral torsional length of LLT and the support condition. In next
class, we will discuss about the design procedure and we will go through one example to see how
to find out a section size for a member when it is laterally unsupported.
677
Lecture 52
Module 11
Design of Laterally Unsupported Beams
Hello today I am going to discuss about the design steps for Laterally Unsupported Beams. In
fact in last lecture we have discussed how to calculate the Lateral Torsional Buckling moment
and what will be the lateral torsional buckling stress and then we have found how to calculate
the design bending strength. Today with the based on the last days lecture we will follow
certain design steps and after that we will go through one example.
Now in design steps basically we will try to find out first a appropriate section based on the
approximate section modulus and then we will check whether the assumed section is safe
against the bending forces coming on to the member then we will check for shear whether it
is safe or not, then we will go for checking deflection, web buckling and web crippling.
So coming to design steps first we will calculate what will be the service load acting on the
beam. So once we calculate the service load then we can find out the factored load. So after
calculation of factored load we can find out the factored maximum bending moment and
shear force.
678
After that we can start with a trial plastic section modulus means we can find out a plastic
Md
section modulus based on this formula that, Z p= . Remember this is considering
f y /γ m 0
the section to be laterally supported.
But in case of laterally unsupported beam a major amount of stress is reduced due to lateral
torsional buckling. So the section modulus whatever coming here will not be sufficient, we
have to increase substantially. So that the chosen section is safe against this bending moment
due to lateral torsional buckling. So what we can do we will choose a higher plastic section
modulus which is necessary to account for lateral torsional buckling. Actually we do not
know exactly what percentage of increase is required. So we can try with 40 percent or 50
percent increased value of plastic section modulus, however it is a trial and error process, so
finally we have to do the trial method and we have to find out the actual requirement. So after
finding an appropriate section modulus we can choose a suitable section, based on that plastic
section modulus.
And then with that section we will check whether the section is capable of taking that much
moment due to lateral torsional buckling or not, if that is fine then we can go to step 4, where
we have to check the beam for shear. So we will check for shear, if the design shear stress is
more than the shear force coming on to the beam then it is fine or we have to increase the
again we have to increase the section size to take care the shear.
679
In step 5, we will check for deflection as per Table 6 where the limiting deflection is given
and we know, what is the maximum deflection of that particular beam, based on the loading
condition and support condition. So based on the loading condition and support condition we
can find out the maximum deflection on that particular beam and we will check whether the
maximum deflection is exceeding the limit permissible limit or not. If maximum deflection is
exceeding the permissible limit then again we have to increase the section size to
accommodate this otherwise if it is not then the section is safe from serviceability point of
view then what you can do we can go for next step.
Next step is the web buckling, so we know the beam web may buckle due to the consistent
load acting on the member or at the support. So we have to check the web buckling and if the
buckling strength is more than the force coming on that particular place then it is fine
otherwise we have to increase the section size or we can increase the bearing length, if we
increase the bearing length then also we can increase the buckling strength and we can keep it
safe. Once it is done then we will go for web crippling. So this is the process which we have
to follow to design a laterally unsupported beam. So the process is basically a trial and error
process.
Example: Design a simply supported steel joist of 5 m effective span, carrying a uniformly
distributed load 12 kN/m if compression flange of the joist is laterally unrestrained.
Solution
Step-1: BM & SF on beam
680
Load on the beam = 12 kN/m
Factored load = 12 × 1.5 = 18 kN/m
Max. B. M. = 18 × 52/8 kN-m
= 56.25 kN-m
Max S. F. = 18 × 5/2
= 45 kN
Step-2: Selection of initial section,
M 56.25 ×10 6 3
Z p= = =247.5× 10 kNm
f y /γ m 0 250/ 1.1
Increasing 50%, the required Z p will be 1.5 ×247.5 ×103
= 371.25 ×103 kNm
Step-3 : Calculate bending strength of section,
Select ISHB 200 @ 40 kg/m
D = 200 mm ry = 44.2 mm Zpz = 414.23 × 103 mm3
681
bf = 200 mm R1 = 9 mm Zez = 372.2 × 103 mm3
tf = 9.0 mm tw = 7.8 mm d = 200 – 2×(9+9) = 164 mm
After calculation it is seen that the section is not adequate and need to increase the section
size to ISLB 325…
Select ISLB 325
D = 325 mm ry = 30.5 mm Zpz = 687.76 × 103 mm3
bf = 165 mm R1 = 16 mm Zez = 607.7 × 103 mm3
tf = 9.8 mm Ixx = 9870 × 104 mm4
682
tw = 7.0 mm Iyy = 510.8 × 104 mm4
d = 325 – 2×(9.8+16) = 273.4 mm
683
Section classification:
b/tf = 82.5/9.8 = 8.41 < 9.4
d/tw = 273.4/7.0 = 39 < 84
Hence, section is plastic.
Calculation of bending strength:
KL/ry = 5000/30.5 hf/tf = (325 – 9.8 )/9.8
= 164 = 32.16
From Table 14, IS 800: 2007
fcr,b = 122.82 N/mm2
From Table 13(a), IS 800: 2007,
fbd = 93.17 N/mm2
So, Md = 1×687.76×103×93.17
= 58.57 kN-m > 56.25 kN-m
OK.
684
Step-4: Check for shear:
Design shear strength of the section,
fy 250
V d= D t w= ×3 25 ×7 × 10−3=299 kN > V=45 kN
√ m0
3 γ √ 3 ×1.1
Step-5: Check for deflection:
5 w l4 5 ×1 2× 50004
δ= = =4.9 mm
384 EI 384 ×2 ×105 × 9870× 104
Allowable maximum deflection, L/300 = 5000/300 = 16.67 mm.
Hence, safe against deflection.
685
Step-6: Check for web buckling:
Assuming stiff bearing length 100 mm
n1 = D/2 = 325/2 = 162.5 mm
C/S area for web buckling Ab = (b + n1) × tw
686
= (100 + 162.5) × 7.0 = 1837.5 mm
Effective length of web, leff = 0.7 × 273.4 = 191.38 mm
I = 100 × 73/12 = 2858.33 mm3
A = b × tw = 100 × 7 = 700 mm2
rmin =
√ 2858.33
700
=2.02
λ = leff/rmin = 191.38/2.02 = 94.742
From Table 9(c), IS 800: 2007, fcd = 114.364 N/mm2
Capacity of the section, Ab × fcd = 1837.5 × 114.364 = 210 kN
> 45 kN
Hence, the section is safe against web buckling.
Step-7: Check for web crippling:
( b 1+ n2 ) ×t w × f y
Fcrip=
γ m0
n2=2.5 ( 16+ 9.8 )=64.5 mm
687
( 100+64.5 ) ×7 × 250
Fcrip= =261.70 kN > 45 kN
1.1
Hence, the section is safe against web crippling
Now I will go through a few slides that is the design of beam with GUI based MATLAB
algorithm. So here what we have seen that especially when the design has to be done for
unsupported beam we need to do lot of iteration. So manually to do all these things is very
688
hectic therefore what we suggest that if we can develop a GUI based algorithm then once it is
developed, it can be very useful. So my students has developed a software. I am
demonstrating here where the beam design is done for two cases, one is for laterally
supported beam and another one is laterally unsupported beam, right. So by choosing a
particular type we can go to the design of that case. So once we choose say for this case we
have chosen unsupported beam.
Then if we go to next then we can provide these requirement like the maximum factored
shear, maximum factored bending moment, the effective span etc. These are the input which
we need to take from the user and maximum deflection coming on the on the beam. So
maximum deflection we can calculate from the formula and this also can be done through
algorithm but that will be very complicated because in that case we have to find out what is
the support condition, what is the loading condition and because of loading and support
condition deflection we have to find out the deflection. Therefore we can calculate manually
for particular case and we can enter this value what is the maximum deflection.
Then we have to assign the properties of steel, like yield stress, we can give the command to
take the default value of grade Fe410 or we can insert the yield stress value manually. In a
similar way we can give the command to the input of partial safety factor and young’s
modulus.
689
So once we go to next it will show whatever data we have entered. Next there is two option
here one is design for economic section and check for a particular section. So if user want to
find out an economical section the program will find lowest size of the section which will be
safe under the given condition. In other option we can chose a particular section and we can
check whether that section is safe or not.
So after that if we click on proceed then it will show the results. So in the results we will see
that the software is giving ISJC 150 as economical section. So now if we click on output.doc
then the intermediate calculations are given in the file which can be seen and if one user want
to check the intermediate calculations he can cross check from the output file.
690
And if the user want to redesign, that option is also there, he has to click on redesign then it
will go back to the first slide and it will ask for data. So the option of redesign is there which
can be used. We can check for a particular section also. So for that we have to click on
particular section and then we will see whether it is okay or not, say for this case the selected
beam was not okay so that is shown and there also the user can redesign and can find out
some other section which may be safe.
So this is how one can develop the logic and make a flow chart and then can find out
algorithm. So I would suggest the viewers to make their own algorithm according to their
own logic, and write a program whatever language they are comfortable may be Python, may
be C, may be MATLB, may be Fortran and this way he can develop the software and that will
be customized software he can use forever.
So this is all about the design of beam. In next class we will discuss certain other things like
the how to calculate the plastic section modulus that we will see because that I have not
covered in this class also purlin and gantry girder will be taught in next few classes
691
Lecture 53
Module 11
Calculation of Plastic Section Modulus
Hello so far we have discussed about the design bending strength calculation of a flexural
member and we have seen when calculating the design bending strength we need to know the
plastic section modulus of the section. And in case of built-up sections we do not have the
plastic section modulus in the code so we need to calculate the plastic section modulus and to
know the plastic section modulus of a section we need to know what is the theory behind that
and that will be discussed today.
So first I will go through one workout example and I will show how to calculate the plastic
section modulus of a section. Suppose if load is very high on the beam and the member is
very long then bending moment is quite high. So the required section modulus will be very
high. So when the required section modulus is comparatively high then the available section
then we have to go for built-up section. We have to use certain plates on the top and bottom
section to increase the section modulus and to take care that much load. So how to increase
the section modulus and how to decide the thickness and width of the plate to withstand the
required amount of load that will be demonstrated through an example, so today we will go
through these two examples.
692
Example: Determine the plastic section modulus of ISLB 300 @ 0.369 kN/m about the
strong and weak axis (neglecting the fillets)
Solution:
For symmetrical I-section the equal area axis zz and yy will pass through the centroid of the
section.
[{ ]
D
( D−t f ) ( 2
−t )f
Z pz=2 ( b f t f ) ×
2
+2 tw×
D
(
2
−t f )}
×
2
t w (D−2 t f )2
¿ b f t f ( D−t f ) +
4
Z py =4 ×
[( ) ] [ {
bf
2
b t t
×t f × f + 2× ( D−2 t f )× w × w
4 2 4 } ]
2 2
t b ( D−2t f ) t w
¿ f f+
2 4
693
The relevant properties of ISLB 300 @ 0.369 kN/m.

D = 300 mm, bf = 150 mm, tw = 6.7 mm, tf = 9.4 mm,
t w (D−2 t f )2
Z pz=bf t f ( D−t f ) +
4
2
6.7 ×(300−2× 9.4)
¿ 150× 9.4 × ( 300−9.4 ) +
4
= 542.2 × 103 mm3
t f b2f ( D−2 t f )t 2w
Z py = +
2 4
694
2
9.4 ×1502 (300−2 ×9.4 )× 6.7
¿ +
2 4
= 108.9 × 103 mm3
695
Example: Steel beams having a clear span of 8 m are resting on 200 mm wide end
bearings. The beams spacing is 3 m and the beams carry a dead load of 4.5 kN/m 2
including the weight of the section. The imposed load on the beam is 13.25 kN/m 2. The
beam depth is restricted to 500 mm and the yield strength of the steel is 250 N/mm 2 and is
laterally supported.
Solution:
Factored loads:
Total (Dead Load + Imposed load) = (4.5+ 13.25)=17.75 kN/m2
The beams are spaced at 3 m intervals, therefore the load per meter
= 17.75 × 3 = 53.25 kN/m2
Total factored load = 1.5× 53.25 = 80 kN/m
Eff. Span = 8 + 2×0.1 = 8.2 m
Mid span moment = 80 × 8.22/8 = 672.8 kN-m
Reactions at support = 8.2 × 80/2 = 328 kN
Selection of section:
Plastic section modulus required
696
M ×γ m 0 672.8× 106 ×1.1
Z p= = =2960.32× 103 mm3
fy 250
The section with largest plastic modulus under 500 mm depth restriction is ISHB 450 @
0.907 kN/m with plastic section modulus 2030.95 × 10 3 mm3 which is less than required
value. The section must be strengthened with additional plates to provide the required plastic
section modulus.
The stiffness required to be provided can be calculated as follows:
697
Max. deflection = Eff. span/360 = 8200/360 = 22.78 mm
So, required moment of inertia of the beam due to un-factored imposed load,
5 53.25 × 8200 4
I Z= × =68807 ×104 mm4
384 2 ×105 ×22.7 8
Additional plastic section modulus to be provided by the plate =
(2960.32×103 – 2030.95×103) = 929.37×103 mm3
Assume thickness of the plate is 14 mm

Thus, the total depth of the beam = 478 mm.
Distance between the c/c of the plates = 464 mm.
So, required area of plate = 929.37×103 /464 = 2003 mm2
So provide area of plate = 2200 mm2.
Thus the width of plate = 2200/14 = 158 mm
Thus let provide plate of size 200×14
698
Thus plastic section modulus of the built up section = 2030.95×10 3 +200×14×464/2×2 =

3330×103 mm3
This is greater than required plastic section modulus 2960.32× 103 . OK
Check for deflection:
Maximum Iz required is 68807 ×10 4 mm4
Iz provided by ISHB 450, 40349.9×104 mm4

Iz provided by plate = 2×200×14×(225+7)2 = 30141× 104 mm4
Total Iz provided = (40349.9×104 + 30141× 104 ) = 70490.9×104 mm4 greater than Iz required
(= 68807 ×10 4 ) OK
699
Moment capacity of the beam ISHB 450,

M = 2030.95 × 103 × 250/1.1 = 461.58 kN-m
At any point distance x from the support,
461.58×106 = 328×103x – 80x2/2
or, x = 6396.5 , 1803.05
Hence the theoretical cut off point is 1800 mm from either side.
700
Check for Shear:
Shear capacity of section,
fy 250
V d= × D ×t w = ×450 × 11.3=667.23 kN
γ m 0 × √3 1.1× √3
0.6Vd = 0.6×667.23 = 400.33 kN > 328 kN. Low shear OK
Okay that means the cut-off point I can make upto 1800 mm say upto this I can provide
simply I section and after that we have to provide the built up section, so in this way I can
make use of the steel economically, right. So in plate girder in fact this concept will be used
so that at a particular section we will provide the required amount of steel to withstand the
bending moment and we will be go on increasing or decreasing the section size according to
the requirement of the bending moment. So today let us conclude with this thank you.
701
Lecture 54
Module 11
Purlins
Purlins are basically a flexural member in which transverse load act, in case of purlins the
moments from both the axis occur as a result purlins are needed to be designed for biaxial
moment. So we need to check the bending moment carrying capacity against both the axis
and then we have to check the interaction formula so that the purlin is designed and these
purlins are basically connects the transverse members in the roof structure to support the roof
sheets and other materials and these purlins are placed on the rafter.
Let me show a picture through which we can see, that if this is a roof truss then trusses are
connected with this purlin member, these are the purlin members and these purlin members
are placed on the rafter. If you see these purlins are inclined and generally channel or angle
sections are used for purlins because the weight is very less. So how the channel sections are
placed as purlins, were discussed in lecture video and are shown in the following figure.
702
Now for purlin design we need to know what are the load coming into picture.
703
So if we see for an example say for channel section if we see here that load is basically two
type one is the wind load ( H ) which are acting perpendicular to the roof. Another load is
acting vertically downward i.e. self-weight ( P ). Codal provision says that we should design
purlin as an continuous beam because purlins are connected to the truss members in different
places.
So the moment can be calculated as,
M u=P ' L/10 and M v =H ' L/10
Mu = maximum bending moment about u-u axis.
Mv = maximum bending moment about v-v axis.
P’ = gravity loads acting along v-v axis, including sheeting, self-weight of purlins, LL &
snow loads = H + Pcos θ .
H’ = loads acting along u-u axis, including wind loads= Psin θ❑ L = span of the purlin, i.e.
c/c distance of adjacent trusses
Muu=( H+ Pcos θ ) L/1 0
Mvv= ( Psin θ ) L/1 0
704
For biaxial moment of channel and I-sections the interaction formula is given by
Mu M v
+ ≤ 1.0
M du M dv
Where,
Mdu = design bending moment about u-u axis
Mdv = design bending moment about v-v axis
Purlins are subjected to bi-axial bending. A trial section may be obtained arbitrarily or the
expression given by Gaylord et al. (1992) as follows:
M Z γm 0 M y γ m 0 d
Z p Z= + ×2.5 ×
fy fy bf
Where,
Zpz = required plastic section modulus
My = factored bending moment about y-y axis
Mz = factored bending moment about z-z axis
fy = Yield stress of the material
d = depth of the section
705
bf = width of the section
We have to assume certain d and b f value initially and on the basis of that we can find out Z pz
value and once we find out Z pz value we can find out a particular section say channel section,
or I section, or angle section.
So after knowing the actual d and b f we can again find out what is the actual requirement Z pz
and whether it is satisfying that or not,
Design procedures for channel/I section purlin:
1. The span of the purlin is taken as c/c distance of adjacent trusses
2. The gravity loads P and wind loads H are computed. The component of these loads in
the direction parallel & perpendicular to the sheeting are determined. These loads are
multiplied with partial safety factor for loads as per Table 4 of the code for various
load combinations
3. The maximum B.M. (Mz or Muu and My or Mvv) and S.F. (Fz and Fy) using the factored
loads are determined
706
4. The required value of plastic section modulus of the section
may be determined by using the following equation
M Z γm 0 M y γ m 0 d
Z p , reqd = + ×2.5 ×
fy fy bf
where
My = Factored bending moment about y-y axis
Mz = Factored bending moment about z-z axis
fy = Yield stress of steel
γm0 = Partial safety factor = 1.10
d = Depth of the trial section
bf = Width of the trial section
707
5. Check for the section classification as per Table 2: IS 800: 2007 .
6. Check for shear capacity of the section for both z and y axes taken as (Moris & Plum
1996)
fy fy
V dy = A and V dz= A
√3 γ m 0 vy √ 3 γ m 0 vz
A vz =D t w and A vy =2 bf t f
where
D = height of the section
bf = breadth of the flange
tf = thickness of the flange
708
7. Compute the design capacity of the section in both the axes using
Z pz f y Z f Z f Z f
M dz= ≤ 1.2 ez y M dy= py y ≤ 1.2 ey y
γ m0 γ m0 γ m0 γm 0
8. Check for local capacity using the interaction formula
MZ M y
+ ≤ 1.0
M dz M dy
9. Check whether deflection is under permissible limits (l/180) as per Table 6, IS 800:
2007.
709
Design of Angle Section Purlins:
The following procedure is adopted for the design :
1. The vertical and the wind loads are determined. These loads
are assumed to be normal to roof truss.
2. The maximum bending moment is computed.
w L2 W L
M u= ∨
10 10
where L = span of purlin
w = uniformly distributed load
W = concentrated load at centroid
710
3. The required section modulus is calculated by

M
Z p , reqd =
1.33 × 0.66 ×f y
4. Assuming the depth = 1/45 of the span and width = 1/60 of the span, a trial section of
angle purlins is arrived by.
The depth and width must not be less than the specified values to ensure the deflection
criteria.
5. A suitable section is then selected for the calculated value of leg lengths of angle section.
The modulus of section provided should be more than modulus of section calculated.
So for purlin we have seen that generally we use either channel section, I section or angle
section and most commonly we use channel or angle. So the design criteria for channel
sections are discussed, similarly the design criteria for angle section to use as a purlin
member are also discussed. In next class we will go through one example to understand how
to design the purlin section, thank you.
711
Lecture 55
Module 11
Design of Purlins
This lecture will cover a workout example on design of purlin, in last lecture we have
discussed about the design procedure of purlin members for both, channel or I sections and
angle sections. So here we will go through one example and we will try to understand how to
design a member using I sections.
Example: Design an I-section purlin, for an industrial building situated in the outskirt of
Kolkata, to support a galvanized iron sheet roof for the following data:
Slope of truss = 30o
Spacing of truss c/c = 5.0 m
Span of truss = 12.0 m
spacing of purlins c/c = 2 m
wind speed = 50 m/s
Weight of galvanized sheets = 120 N/m2
Grade of steel = Fe 410
712
Solution:
For steel of grade Fe 410: fy = 250 MPa
Weight of galvanized corrugated iron sheets = 120 × 2 = 240 N/m
Assume dead load of purlin = 100 N/m
Total dead load = 240 + 100 = 340 N/m
The dead load acts vertically downwards.
The component of dead load parallel to roof = 340sin30° = 170 N/m
The component of dead load normal to roof = 340cos30° = 294.5 N/m
Wind pressure = pz =0.6 V 2❑z =0.6 ×50 2=1500 N /m2
Wind load is assumed to act normal to the roof.
Wind load = 1500×2×1 = 3000 N/m
Total load on purlin normal to roof = 3000+294.5 = 3294.5 N/m
Factored load normal to roof,
P = 1.5×3294.5 = 4941.75 N/m
Factored load parallel to roof,
H = 1.5×170 = 255 N/m
713
Maximum moment,
Muu = Mz = PL/10 = (4941.75×5)×5×10-3 /10 =12.35 kNm
Mvv = My = HL/10 = (255×5)×5×10-3 /10 =0.6375 kNm
Let us try a section with flange width bf = 75 mm and depth, d = 125 mm.
Plastic section modulus required,
γm 0 γ m0
Z pz , reqd =M z
fy ( )(
+2.5
d
b
My
fy )
1.1 125 1.1
Z pz , reqd =12.35 × 106 ×
250
+2.5
75( )(
0.6375 ×106 ×
250 )
= 66 × 103 mm3
Select a section ISLB 150 with Zpz = 104.5 × 103 mm3
A= 1808 mm2, D = 150 mm, bf = 80 mm, tf = 6.8 mm, tw = 4.8 mm
R1 = 9.5 mm,
d = 150 – 2(6.8+9.5) = 117.4 mm
714
Iz = 688.2 × 104 mm4 , Iy = 55.2× 104 mm4

Zez = 91.8 × 103 mm3, Zey = 13.8 × 103 mm3
ϵ=
√ √
250
fy
=
250
250
=1
b/tf = 40/6.8 = 5.88 < 9.4

d/tw = 117.4/4.8 = 24.5 < 84
Hence the section is plastic.
Check for bending strength
fy 250
M dz=Z pz =104.5 × 103 × × 10−6=23.75 kN-m
γ m0 1.1
fy 250
< 1.2 Z ez =1.2 × 91.8× 103 × ×10−6 =25.04 kN-m
γ m0 1.1
Which is alright.
M dz=23.75 kN-m > M d = 12.35 kNm; OK
715
fy f
M dy =Z p y × ≤ γ f Z ey y
γ m0 γ m0
Z py =4 ×
[( ) ] [ {
bf
2
b t t
×t f × f + 2× ( D−2 t f )× w × w
4 2 4 } ]
t f b2f ( D−2 t f )t w 6.8 × 802❑ (150−2 ×6.8) 4.82❑
2
Z py = + = +
2 4 2 4
=22546 mm3
Mdy = 22546 × 250/1.1 × 10-6 = 5.12 kN-m
< 1.5 × 13.8 × 103 × 250/1.1 × 10-6 = 4.7 kN-m
(1.2 is replaced by γ f =1.5 since Zpy/Zey (=1.6)> 1.2)
Hence, Mdy = 4.7 kN-m > Md = 0.6375 kN-m; OK
716
Check for overall member strength (local capacity)

Mz M y
+ ≤1
M dz M dy
12.3 5 0.6375
+ =0.6 6<1 ; OK
23.75 4.7
Check for deflection

δall = 5000/180 = 27.78 mm
Δ = 1/384 × wl4/EI
= (3294.5 × 10-3 × 50004)/ (384 × 2 × 105 × 688.2 × 104)
= 4 mm < δall ; OK.
717
So deflection in both the directions also we have to check and in other direction deflection is
quite less because the load is very less so that will be also okay. So this is how one can design
the purlin by checking the deflection and prior to that checking the moment.
So in today’s lecture we could see that how to find out the section of a purlin member while
using I section and how to calculate the biaxial bending moment and check the biaxial
bending moment interaction formula. So using this we can design a purlin. Next we will
discuss about the Gantry Girders because Gantry Girder is nothing but one type of flexural
member. So how to design that Gantry Girder that will be discussed in next class, thank you.
718
Lecture 56
Introduction to Gantry Girders
Today we are going to discuss about Gantry Girders. Gantry Girders are used in mill and
heavy industrial buildings such as factories and workshops, where Gantry Girders are
supported by columns and carrying cranes. Gantry girders are utilised to transport the goods
and equipment from one place to another place in the workshop. Gantry Girders are typical
example for laterally unsupported beam in industrial buildings. Also Gantry Girders undergo
bending moment under both the direction. one is vertically and other is laterally. So biaxial
bending movement has to be also checked for design of Gantry Girders. Therefore the when
we will be going to design Gantry Girders we need to consider two things, one is the Gantry
Girders is a laterally unsupported beam, so we have to design the Gantry Girders considering
the lateral torsional buckling effect and also we have to consider the biaxial bending that
Md Md
 1
M dz M dy
means that interaction formula has to be checked.
And also in Gantry Girders, the loads are moving from one place to another place therefore
we need to know little about influence line diagram that means, we have to see the position of
load in which the maximum bending moment and maximum shear force is going to occur. So
as the wheel is moving from one place to another place, wheels are placed in such a way that
719
maximum shear force and the maximum bending moment can be achieved. The gantry girder
is designed against that maximum shear force and bending moment.
In gantry girder certain impact load will come into picture so some additional load has to be
added in the load calculation. It has been recommended in codal guidelines to add certain
percentage of additional load. Also certain percentage of load will be acting as a lateral load
for which lateral bending moment and lateral shear force will be produced and because of
that the lateral bending strength and shear strength should also be checked so that it is not
going to fail under this lateral load, right.
The overhead travelling crane running system consists few components like crane, then this
crane is compromising the crab or trolley, power transmitting device and the cap which
houses the control and operators and also the crane rails and their attachment, also the gantry
girder and column with brackets supporting gantry girder.
Gantry girder is placed on the column either with the support of a bracket or with the step
column. Above the step column packing plates are placed, then gantry girders are consisting
of I Section is placed above packing plate and at the top planes along with I section we
provide another channel section to take the heavy load coming from crane girder. Crane
girder is placed on top of the crane rails. A crab trolley is kept in the crane girder, with the
help of the trolley loads are being shifted from one place to another. A diaphragm is used to
keep the I section the gantry girder in position throughout its length. Gantry girder is
supported between two stepped columns in two sides.
720
The crab position should closest to the gantry girder to consider the maximum effect. Once
the crab position is located then depending on the clearance from gantry girder to the crab
wheel location loads coming to the girder can be calculated. So before finding the maximum
bending moment and shear force we have to see whatever load are going to be acting on the
girder.
The following imposed loads should be considered in the design.
721
1. Vertical loads from the cranes because crane will be carrying certain instruments,
certain heavy machines.
2. Impact loads from crane because during operation certain impact will come into
picture
3. Longitudinal horizontal force along the crane rail.
4. Lateral thrust across the crane rail
In calculating the above forces crane should be positioned such that it gives maximum design
forces in the girder.
Now according to codal provisions, for vertical load when it is an electric overhead crane
then 25 percent of the maximum static wheel load will be added as impact loads. whereas for
hand operated cranes it will be 10 percent of the maximum static load. For horizontal forces
transverse to rail, for electric overhead cranes it will be 10 percent of the weight of crab and
the weight of lifted on the crane, and for hand operated cranes it will be 5 percent of the
weight of crab and the weight lifted on the crane. The horizontal forces along rail will be 5
percent of the static wheel load that has to be considerd.
722
As the crane moves with the load, a lateral load (transverse to the rail) is developed due to
application of brakes or sudden acceleration of trolley. IS 875 recommends 10% of W for
EOT cranes as horizontal loads, where W is the total weight including lifted weight and the
trolley weight. As the crane moves longitudinally, loads parallel to the rails are caused due to
the braking (stopping) or acceleration and swing (starting of the crane). This load is called the
longitudinal load and is transferred at the rail level. The longitudinal load per wheel = 5% of
the wheel load, i.e., Wg = 5W/100
Permissible deflection has been given in table 6 of IS 800:2007.
723
Category Max. Deflection
a. Where manually operated cranes are operated and for similar L/500
loads.
b. Where electric overhead traveling cranes operate, up to 50t. L/750
c. Where electric overhead traveling cranes operate, over 50t L/1000
d. Other moving loads such as charging cars, etc. L/600
e. Lateral deflection 10 mm or
Relative between rails L/400
So, the maximum deflection is checked against permissible deflection from serviceability
point of view.
The maximum vertical load on gantry girder is the maximum reaction of crane girder. To get
this, crab should be placed as close to gantry girder as possible.
If , LC = Span of crane girder
L1 = Minimum approach of crane hook (distance between c.g. of gantry girder and trolley).
W = weight of trolley plus the weight lifted
w = weight of crane girder per unit length
724
W Lc W t ( Lc−L1 )
R A= +
2 Lc
So, once the wheel load is found, maximum bending moment and maximum shear force in
gantry girder can be obtained. Maximum bending moment occur when the mid span of the
gantry girder intersects the distance between C.G. of the wheels of and one of the wheel load.
Then, the maximum bending moment can be achieved at a position of the nearest wheel load
from the mid span.
Maximum shear force can be achieved by placing one of the wheel loads on the support.
725
Gantry girders cause moving loads that cause fatigue. Fatigue effects for light and medium
duty cranes need not to be checked, if normal and shear stress ranges,
27
f≤
γ mft
Or, if actual number of stress cycle,
3
27 /γ mft
N SC <5× 10
γm f
6
( )
For heavy duty crane, the gantry girder must be checked for fatigue.
γ mft = partial safety factor for strength (Table 25 of IS 800-2007)
f = actual fatigue stress range
γ m = partial safety factor for material = 1.10
For heavy duty crane the gantry girder must be checked for fatigue.
Normal stress range
3 6
f f =f f n √ 5 ×10 / N sc for N sc ≤5 ×10
6
and,
726
5 6 8
f f =f f n √ 5 ×10 / N sc for 5 ×10 ≤ N sc ≤10
6
Shear stress range
5 6
τ f =τ fn √ 5× 10 / N sc
Where, f f , τ f =¿design normal and shear fatigue stress range of the details , respectively for
life cycle of NSC
f fn , τ fn =¿ normal and shear fatigue strength of the details for 5 × 10 6 cycles for the detail
category.
727
Lecture 57
Module 11
Design of Gantry Girder
Today we are going to discuss about the design steps of a Gantry Girder. First, we will go
through the design steps which can be followed and then we will go through one example
following those steps.
First, we need to calculate the maximum wheel load. Maximum wheel load will come when
one wheel is close to the gantry girder. The wheel can move along crane girder, maximum
effect will occur when it will be closest to gantry girder.
In second step, maximum moment and shear force on gantry girder can be calculated after
suitable proportioning of crane. Contribution of impact load should be taken care of. Though
the maximum moment due to wheel load is slightly away from the centre of the girder (under
the wheel), it is just added to maximum moment due to UDL on girder for simplification and
design moment is found.
728
Then in 3rd step, we can find out the maximum shear force due to this vertical load and shear
force will be obtained maximum when one of the wheel is placed at the support of the gantry
girder. So similar way we can find out maximum bending moment and shear force due to
lateral load with similar positions.
729
In next step, we have to find out section modulus. Generally, an I-section with channel
section is chosen, though an I-section with a plate at the top flange may be used for light
cranes. ��=��/��.
When the gantry is not laterally supported, the following formula may be used to select a trial
section: Z p ( trial )=k Z p (k = 1.30 – 1.60)
Generally, the economic depth of a gantry girder is about (1/12)th of the span. The width of
the flange is chosen to be between (1/40)th and (1/30)th of the span to prevent excessive
lateral deflection. Next step, a suitable section is chosen and the properties IZZ , IYY and Zez ,
Zey, Zpy ,Zpz are found. Then the section is classified according to b/tf and d/tw ratios.
When lateral support is provided at the compression flange, the chosen section should be
checked for the moment capacity of the whole section:
M dz=β b Z p z f y /γ m 0 <1.2 Z e z f y /γ m 0
However, for laterally unsupported compression flange, the buckling resistance is to be

checked with design bending compressive stress fbd .Bending strength about yy axis is
calculated because of lateral loading:
M d y =β b Z p y f y /γ m 0<1.2 Z e z f y /γ m 0
Then, Combined local capacity of the flange is checked using the interaction equation
730
My Mz
( )( )
M dy
+
M dz
≤1
Then section is to be checked against shear and local buckling will be checked under wheel
load. The girder needs to be checked for bearing. Bearing stiffness will be provided if
necessary. The maximum deflection under working load must be checked and the girder is
checked for fatigue strength.
Next, we will go through one example following these steps.
Example:
Design a simply supported gantry girder to carry electric overhead travelling crane, given:
Span of gantry girder = 6 m
Span of crane girder = 15 m
Crane capacity = 200 kN
Self weight of trolley, hook, electric motor etc. = 40 kN
Self weight of crane girder excluding trolley = 200 kN
Minimum hook approach = 1.0 m
Distance between wheels = 3 m
Self weight of rails = 0.2 kN/m
731
In next lecture we will discuss this, thank you.
732
Lecture 58
Module 12
Worked Out Example for Gantry Girder
Now I will go through one worked out example on gantry girder. So in last lecture we have
discussed the design steps of a gantry girder and I have given an example for solution. So, I
hope many of you have done, now we will try to check the results means we will try to see
whatever the actual results are coming and you try to correct or modify your results, if you
have done something wrong.
Example:
Design a simply supported gantry girder to carry electric overhead travelling crane, given:
Span of gantry girder = 6 m
Span of crane girder = 15 m
Crane capacity = 200 kN
Self weight of trolley, hook, electric motor etc. = 40 kN
Self weight of crane girder excluding trolley = 200 kN
Minimum hook approach = 1.0 m
733
Distance between wheels = 3 m
Self weight of rails = 0.2 kN/m
Solution:
Maximum moment due to vertical force
Weight of trolley + lifted load = 40 + 200 = 240 kN
Self weight of crane girder = 200 kN
For maximum reaction on gantry girder, the moving load should be as close the gantry as
possible.
Figure below shows the load position
240 ×14 200

RA= + =324 kN
15 2
This load is transferred to gantry girder, through two wheels, the wheel base being 3 m.
So load on gantry girder from each wheel = 324/2 = 162 kN
Factored wheel load = 162 × 1.5 = 243 kN
734
Maximum moments due to moving loads occur under a wheel when the c.g. of wheel load
and the wheel are equidistant from the centre of girder. This is shown in figure:
243 ×(3−1.5−0.75)+243 ×(3+0.75)

R D= =182.25 kN
6
Max. moment ME = 182.25 × 2.25 = 410 kN-m
Moment due to impact = 0.25 × 410 = 102.5 kN-m
Assume self weight of girder = 2 kN/m
Dead load due to self weight + rails = 2 + 0.2 = 2.2 kN/m
735
Factored DL = 2.2 × 1.5 = 3.3 kN/m
Moment due to DL = 3.3 × 62/8 = 14.85 kN-m
Factored moment due to all vertical loads,
Mz = 410 + 102.5 + 14.85 = 527.35 kN-m
Maximum moment due to lateral force

Horizontal force transferred to rails = 10% of weight of trolley plus load lifted = (10/100) ×
(200 + 40) = 24 kN
This is distributed over 4 wheels.
So, horizontal force on each wheel = 24/4 = 6 kN
Factored horizontal force on each wheel = 1.5 × 6 = 9 kN
For maximum moment in gantry girder the position of loads is same as earlier except that it is
horizontal. Hence by proportioning we get,
My = (9/243) × 410 = 15.18 kN-m
Shear force
For maximum shear force on the girder, the trailing wheel should be just on the girder as
shown in figure below
Vertical shear due to wheel loads = 243 + (243 × 3)/6 = 364.5 kN
736
Vertical shear due to impact = 0.25 × 364.5 = 91.125 kN

Vertical shear due to self weight = (3.3 × 6)/2 = 9.9 kN
Total vertical shear = 364.5 + 91.125 + 9.9 = 465.52 kN
By proportioning lateral shear due to surge = (9/243) × 465.52 = 17.24 kN
737
Preliminary Section
Minimum economic depth, L/12 = 6000/12 = 500 mm
Width of the compression flange may be taken as (1/40) to (1/30)th of the span
So, flange width can be taken, L/40 = 6000/40 = 150 mm to L/30 = 6000/30 = 200 mm
Required Zp = 1.4 × M/fy = 1.4 × 527.35 × 106/250 = 2953.16 × 103 mm3
Let us try a ISMB 550 with ISMC 250 on compression flange.
738
Properties of ISMB 550 @ 1.02 kN/m Properties of ISMC 250 @ 0.3 kN/m
A = 13200 mm2 A = 3900 mm2
h = 550 mm h = 250 mm
b = 190 mm b = 80 mm
tf = 19.3 mm tf = 14.1 mm
tw = 11.2 mm tw = 7.2 mm
Izz = 64900 × 104 mm4 Izz = 3880 × 104 mm4
Iyy = 1830 × 104 mm4 Iyy = 211 × 104 mm4
R1 = 18 mm Cyy = 23 mm
Let the distance of N. A. from the tension flange be ý ,
13200× 275+3900 ×(550+7.2−23)

Then, ý= =334.11 mm
13200+3900
Izz = 64900 × 104 + 13200 × (334.11-275)2 + 211 × 104 + 3900 × (550+7.2-23-334.11)2 =

853.37 × 106 mm4
Zez = 853.37 × 106 /334.11 = 2554.15 × 103 mm3
For compression flange about y-y axis,
I = 3880 × 104 + 1/12 × 19.3 × 1903 = 4984.15 × 104 mm4
Zey for compression flange = 4983.15 × 104 / 125 = 398.73× 103 mm3
Total area of section = 13200 + 3900 = 17100 mm2
Let Plastic N.A. be at a distance Yp from tension flange. Then,
(Yp – 19.3)×11.2 + 190 × 19.3 = 17100/2
739
Or, Yp = 455.28 mm
Zpz = (190 × 19.3) ×(455.28-11.2/2)+(455.28-19.3)2/2 ×11.2+(550-455.28-19.3)2/2
×11.2+19.3 ×190 ×(550-455.28-19.3/2)+3900 ×(550-455.28+7.2-22.3)
= 3367.74 × 103 mm3
For top flange,
Zpy = 1/4 ×19.3 ×1902+1/4(250 - 2 ×14.1)2 ×7.8+2 ×80 × 14.1 ×(125-14.1/2)
= 536.203 × 103 mm3
b/t of flange of ISMB 550 = (190-11.2)/(2 ×19.3) = 4.63 < 9.4
d/t of web of ISMB 550 = (550-2 ×(19.3+18))/11.2 =42.44 < 84
And b/t of flange of channel = (80-7.2)/14.1 = 5.16 < 9.4
Hence the section is plastic.
Check for local moment capacity
Local moment capacity for bending in vertical plane:
Mdz = fyZp/1.1 = 250 × 3367.74 × 103 /1.1 = 765.31 kN-m
1.2Zezfy/1.1 = 1.2× 2554.15 × 103×250/1.1 = 696.58 kN-m
So, Mdz = 696.58 kN-m
For top flange,
Mdy = 250 × 536.203 × 103 /1.1 = 121.86 kN-m
1.2Zeyfy/1.1 = 1.2× 332.21× 103 × 250/1.1 = 90.6 kN-m
So for top flange Mdy = 90.6 kN-m
Check for combined local capacity
527.35/ 696.58 + 15.18/90.6 = 0.92 < 1
740
Check for buckling resistance
Md = bZpfbd
For plastic section b = 1
√
2
KL
f cr , b=
L¿
2
1.1 π E
( )
ry
2
1+
1 ry
20 h
tf
()
LLT = 6000 mm, E = 2 × 105 N/mm2
hf = 550 – (19.3/2) + (14.1/2) = 547.4 mm
Iy = 1830 ×104 + 3880 × 104 = 5710 ×104 mm4
A = 13200 + 3900 = 17100 mm2
ry = (Iy/A)1/2 = (5710 × 104/17100)1/2 = 57.78 mm
√
6000 2
f cr , b=
1.1 π 2 ×2 ×105
( 6000 2
57.78 )
1+
( )
1 57.78
20 547.4
19.3
2
=260.23 N/mm λ¿ =
√ 250
260.23
=0.98
φ¿ =0.5 [ 1+0.21 × ( 0.98−0.2 ) +0.98 2 ]=1.062
1
X ¿= =0.68 N/mm2 fbd = 0.733×250/1.1 = 164.11
{1.062+ ( 1.0622−0.98 2 ) 0.5 }
Mdz = 1.0×166.6× 3367.74 × 103 = 531.06 kN-m
Since lateral force is also acting, the beam must be checked for bi-axial bending.
So, Mdy = 250/1.1 × (1830 × 104 + 3880 × 104 )/125 = 103.81 kN-m
527.35 15.18
Hence, + =1.086
561.06 103.81
The section is unsafe against torsional buckling.
Check for shear
741
Vz = 465.52 kN
Av f yw 550 ×11.2 ×250

Shear capacity = = =808.29 kN > 465.52 kN
√ 3 ×1.1 √ 3 × 1.1
Now, 0.6 × 808.29 = 484.974 kN
So, it is a case of low shear.
Check for Web buckling
Assuming b1 = 150 mm
n1 = 225 + 7.6 = 232.6 mm
d = 550 - 2(19.3+18) = 475.4 mm, t = 11.2 mm
d 475.4
λ=2.42 =2.42 × =102.72
t 11.2
For buckling class a, from Table 9(a), Is 800: 2007
Fcd = 128.6 N/mm2
Buckling resistance = (150+232.6)×11.2×128.6 = 551.66 kN > 465.52 kN
Check for deflection at working load
(i) Vertical deflection
Serviceability vertical wheel load excluding impact = 162 kN
Deflection at mid-span
δ=Wl 3[ ( 43 aL )−( aL33 )]/(6 EI )

Where, a = (L - c)/2 = (6000-3000)/2 = 1500 mm
Combined Izz = 842.7 × 106 mm4
δ=162× 103 ×60003[ ( 3× 1500

4 ×3000 ) −(
1500 3
6000 3 )
]/(6 ×2 ×10 5 ×853.37× 10 6)
= 12.27 mm
742
(ii) Horizontal deflection
I = (Iz)ch + IF = 4983.15 × 104 mm4
δ=6 ×103 × 60003[ ( 34 ×1500 −

15003
× 3000 ) ( 60003 )
]/(6 × 2× 10 5× 4983.15 × 10 4)
= 7.788 mm
Deflection limit, L/750 = 6000/750 = 8 mm
So the section is unsafe in vertical direction.
Design for weld
The required shear capacity of the weld, q=VA ý /I z
V = 465.52 kN
A = 3900 mm2 (Area of the channel section)
ý = (550 - 334.11 + 14.1/2) = 222.94 mm
Izz = 853.37 × 106 mm4
q = 465.52 ×103×3900×222.94 /853.37×103 = 474.3 N/mm
So, (0.7s×410)/( √ 3 ×1.5) = 474.3
or, s = 4.29 mm
So use 5 mm fillet weld for the connection.
So, this is all about the gantry girder, if you go through some example given in the book then
it will be much more clear.
743
Lecture 59
Module 12
Slab Base
Today I am going to discuss a new module which is about column base. In case of RCC
structure we use to tell this as a footing or foundation and in case of steel structure we will
say this as a column base that means column is placed on certain base through which the load
from super structure is going to transferred to the soil through this sub structure. So column
base is basically consisting of column and base plate and an anchoring assembly.
So this column base are two types one is called slab base and other is called gusset base. So
in case of slab base when the load is coming concentrically and magnitude of load is
comparatively less in such cases generally we use this slab base. Whereas in case of gusset
base the load is generally eccentric in nature and magnitude of load is comparatively higher
so for such cases we generally prefer gusset base. So today we will discuss the first lecture
about the slab base.
Now in the column base the main function of the column base is to transfer the loads from
column to its foundation and for that we need a spreading area through which the
concentrated load from the column will be spread to the soil through some medium which is
called base plate that means column will be rested on the base plate so the concentrated load
coming from the column will be distributed over the base plate and then base plate again will
be rested on the concrete block that concrete block will be again rested on the soil. So stage
by stage the load will be distributed from super structure to the soil, right.
And the slab base is basically consist of a thick plate of steel material and this thick plate is
connected with the column through some angle which is called cleat angle and that
connections are made either by bolt or by weld connections. And slab base basically suitable
for light loaded column only and it will be economical if we use for light loaded column and
that base plate will be either welded to the stanchion or will be joint to the column through
cleat angle, right.
744
And design of column base plate requires consideration of bearing pressure on the supporting
material and bending of the plate.
Now let us see the general assembly of the slab base. So say for example an I section is
transferring concentric load from the super structure and it may transfer some moment as
well, then we provide a base plate of steel material and this base plate is connected with the
column with cleat angle, okay. So if it is concentrically loaded then the minimum number of
bolts are provided to connect the cleat angle with the column otherwise we have to design
and here we provide anchor bolts.
Now below the base plate the load is again spread to the concrete base which is called
concrete pedestal. So load coming from base plate is again transferred to the concrete
pedestal where different grade of concrete may be used depending on the magnitude of load
and requirement of the thickness and requirement of the dimension of the block and
dimension of the plate. Now anchor bolt will be provided to connect the base plate with the
concrete pedestal.
So anchor bolts also will be designed as per the requirement and if we see the same in top
view it will look like this (as shown in the figure) and if we see the plan of the base plate the
base plate will be like this (as shown in the figure).
So we can provide nominal number of cleat angle bolt which will connect the cleat angle with
the column. Then we need to know what will be the size of the base plate that means length,
width and thickness.
745
So length of the base plate we have to know and width can be found from the grade of
concrete means how much area we need for the base plate so that the area can be transferred
to the concrete pedestal without any failure. Again the dimension of the concrete pedestal
depends on the soil properties so we need to know the bearing pressure of the soil and
according to that we have to find out what will be the length and width of the concrete
pedestal, so that the load is distributed and transferred to the soil properly.
So this is how the system are made and in this way we have to design the base plate due to
this concentric load and moment and this moment is due to this uniform pressure from the
concrete to the base plate. So here also uniform pressure will come from the concrete to the
base plate because of the concentric load. So the maximum bending moment will be
occurring at the edge of the column. So at the edge maximum bending moment will occur, so
we need to know what will be the projection in both the direction.
Let us say a and b are the projection in both the axis and because of this projection the
bending stress will develop, bending moment will be developed at the edge and we have to
calculate the bending stress and then we have to find out its influence so that we can find out
the thickness of the plate accordingly.
So to find out the thickness of the plate what we can do we can find out what is the bending
moment coming so if we see the column is rested on the base plate and the base plate is
having uniformly distributed load coming from the concrete
746
Theoretical Considerations
Taking 1 unit length strip of slab projection along xx-axis
a
Maximum Bending Moment, M x =w ×1 ×a ×
2
w a2
¿ (1)
2
w is the intensity of bearing pressure from concrete below the base plate.
Taking 1 unit length strip of slab projection along yy-axis
b
Maximum Bending Moment, M y =w × 1× b ×
2
w b2
¿ (2)
2
If poison ratio (μ) is adopted as 0.3
w a2
2
wb
The effective moment along xx-axis ¿ −0.3
2 2
w 2
¿ ( a −0.3 b 2) (3)
2
The moment capacity of plate is,
M p=1.2 f y Z e
Where Z e =¿ elastic section modulus of the base plate.
747
2
t
¿ 1×
6
t=¿ thickness of the base plate.
t2 t2
∴ M p=1.2 × f y × 1× =1.2 f y (4)
6 6
From Eqs. (3) and (4) we get,
2
t w( 2
1.2 f y = a −0.3 b 2)
6 2
Applying partial safety factor,
f y t2 w 2 2
1.2 = ( a −0.3 b )
γ m0 6 2
γm 0
or t 2 =2.5 w ( a 2−0.3 b2 )
fy
Or
√
t= 2.5 w ( a2 −0.3 b2 )
γm 0
fy
So this thickness of the base plate also is available in the code. So this formula you can find
out in the IS: 800-2007. So this is how we can find out length and width of the base plate
from the pressure requirement means from total load we can find out what is the bearing
pressure of the concrete.
748
Now we will see what are the steps required to design a base plate.
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Considering uniform stress at the bottom of
plate, the bearing strength of concrete is determined as 0.45 f ck .
Step-2: The area of a slab base may be computed by
P
A=
0.45 f ck
Where P is the factored axial load on column.
Step-3: Select the size of base plate. For economy as far as possible keep the projections a
and b equal.
Now if this a and b are different than along the larger projection the maximum moment will
occur. So to make economy we will try to keep the projection length a and b as much as
possible equal, right.
Step-4: The intensity of pressure w, from the concrete pedestal is determined by
P
w=
Area of base plate provided
So from that we can find out the intensity of pressure from the concrete pedestal.
749
Step-5: The minimum thickness required as per cl. 7.4.3.1 IS 800:2007
√
t= 2.5 w ( a2 −0.3 b2 )
γm 0
fy f
>t
Where, t f =¿ flange thickness of compression member
When only the effective area of the base plate is used, c2 may be used in the above
equation instead of ( a2 −0.3 b2 )
750
Fig. 9 of IS 800-2007
So the thickness of the base plate atleast has to be greater than the thickness of flange of the
compression member that also we need to check, right.
Step-6: Provide nominal two or four 20-mm holding down bolts.
Step-7: Check the weld length connecting the base plate with the column (this check is
required only for fillet welds)
So this is how one can find out the detail of the base plate, right.
Now what grade of concrete we are going to provide depending on that we will find out the
length and breadth of base plate. So once we find the length and breadth of base plate then we
can find the thickness of the base plate and thickness of the base plate can be found on the
basis of the moment and that moment has been calculated from the projection. So we will see
what are the projection is there and at the column phase what is the maximum moment is
going to develop on that basis we will find out the minimum thickness of the base plate
required and that expression also is available in the code in 7.4.3.1 clause we can find out that
formula, okay.
751
So once dimension of the base plate is decided, after that we will provide the nominal number
of bolts to hold the column in position with the base plate through the cleat angle and cleat
angle size also will be nominal and then through anchor bolt also we will fix the base plate
with the concrete, right. So this is how step by step one can design a base plate. So in next
lecture we will go through one example to see how the base plate is designed, thank you.
752
Lecture 60
Module 12
Design of Slab Base
This lecture will be focused on design of a slab base. So in last lecture we have discussed
about the design procedure of the slab base where the load is transferred from the super
structure to sub structure and how to decide the dimension of the base plate that is the length,
width and the thickness of the base plate that has been discussed. So today we will first
discuss about the design steps means what are the steps we will follow to design a slab base
and then we will go through one example to understand it properly.
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Considering uniform stress at the bottom of
plate, the bearing strength of concrete is determined as 0.45 f ck .
P
A=
0.45 f ck
Where P is the factored axial load on column.
753
Step-3: Select the size of base plate. For economy as far as possible keep the projections a
and b equal.
P
w=
Step-5: The minimum thickness required as per cl. 7.4.3.1 IS 800:2007
√
t= 2.5 w ( a2 −0.3 b2 )
γm 0
fy f
>t
Where, t f =¿ flange thickness of compression member
754
Step-6: Provide nominal two or four 20-mm holding down bolts.
Step-7: Check the weld length connecting the base plate with the column (this check is
required only for fillet welds)
Examples: Design a slab base for a column ISHB 300 @ 618 N/m subjected to a factored
axial compressive load of 1200 kN for the following condition:
a) Load is transferred to the base plate by direct bearing of column flanges.
b) Load is transferred to the base plate by welded connections; the column end and the
base plate are not machined for bearing.
755
The base rests on concrete pedestal of grade M20.
Solution:
Assume Fe 410 grade of steel: f u =410 MPa, f y =250 MPa
For M20 grade of concrete:
Bearing strength of concrete ¿ 0.45 f ck =0.45 ×20=9 N/mm2
Partial safety factor: (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
γ m 0=1.1
γ mw =1.25 (for shop welding)
756
Properties of ISHB 300 @ 618 N/m: [Table 1, SP-6(1)-1964]
Thickness of flange, t f =10.6 mm
Thickness of web, t w =9.4 mm
Depth of section, D=300 mm
Width of flange, b f =250 mm

3
1200 ×10
Required area of slab base, A= =133333.3 mm2
9
Let us provide a rectangular base plate.
Let the sides of the base plate be L and B.
Assuming the overhangs of the base plate beyond column flanges to be a and b.
Let a=b
Area of the base plate ¿ ( D+2 a ) × ( b f +2 b )
Area of the base plate ¿ ( D+2 a ) × ( b f +2 b ) =133333.3
⇒ ( 300+2 a ) × ( 250+2 a )=133333.3
⇒ a=45.5 mm ≃50 mm
Length of the base plate, L=300+2 ×50=400 mm
Width of the base plate, B=250+2 ×50=350 mm
757
P
The bearing pressure of concrete, w=
L×B
1200 ×10 3
¿
400 ×350
¿ 8.57 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2
Hence ok.
Thickness of slab base, (cl. 7.4.3.1 IS 800:2007)
√
t= 2.5 w ( a2 −0.3 b2 )
γm 0
fy
√
¿ 2.5× 8.57 × ( 502 −0.3 ×502 ) ×
1.1
250
¿ 12.84 mm ¿ 10.6 mm
Hence, provide a base plate 400×350×14 mm in size.
758
a) The load is transferred to the base plate by direct bearing. This implies that the
column end and base plate have been machined for perfect bearing. Also, there is no
bending moment. Therefore, connection of column with base plate need not be
designed. However, to keep the column in position, two cleat angles of nominal size
55×55×8 mm may be provided connecting the column flanges with the base plate.
b) Column end and base plate have not been machined for perfect bearing. Therefore, the
load from the column will be transferred to the base plate through welded connection.
Length available for welding around column profile,
La=2 ×250+2 × ( 250−9.4 ) +2× ( 300−2 ×10.6 )
759
¿ 15 39 mm
Let us provide 8 mm fillet weld.
Number of total end returns = 12
Effective length of weld ¿ 15 39−12 × ( 2 ×8 ) =13 47 mm
Throat thickness, t t =0.7 × 8=5.6 mm
fu
Strength of weld/ mm length ¿ 1× t t ×
√ 3 × γ mw
410
¿ 1× 5.6 ×
√3 ×1.25
¿ 1060.48 N/mm
3
1200 ×10
Required length of weld ¿ =1131.56 mm < 1347 mm
1060.48
Hence ok.
Since the base is subjected to only axial compressive load and there is no bending moment,
the base is not subjected to tension in any of its part. Therefore, provide nominal 2, 20 mm
diameter bolts to keep the base in position.
760
So in this example what we could see that if a concentric load is applied on the column then
how to design the base plate that we have seen. In next lecture we will see when the column
is under eccentrically loaded.
761
Lecture 61
Module 12
Eccentrically Loaded Base Plate
In this lecture we will discuss about the eccentrically loaded base plate. So when the base
plates are loaded eccentrically or subjected to axial load as well as bending moment the
pressure distribution from the concrete does not remain uniform. So if concentric load is there
then only the uniform pressure from the concrete will act on the base plate, as P/A. But here if
the load is eccentrically acting or certain moment is acting then the stress in one side it will
be tension, in other side it will be compression.
So the stress development will be linearly varying about its neutral axis and the stress will be
M/Z where Z is the section modulus. Therefore the stress at two different extreme ends will
be different, somewhere it will be P/ A + M /Z , in other direction it will be P/ A−M / Z
. Therefore the magnitude of the stress in two direction in two points will be different,
therefore we have to find out the thickness of the base plate on the basis of maximum stress
developed on the on the base plate due to this not uniform pressure from the concrete block.
762
So if we see here that if the column is eccentrically loaded say if the load is P is with a
distance of e then the load distribution below the column will not be uniform.
Due to axial load P, the pressure distribution is uniform and stress diagram is rectangular.
P P
The direct stress ¿ =
A 1 LB
Where, A 1=¿ area of base plate provided.
L=¿ length of the base plate
B=¿ width of the base plate
Due to the bending moment the bending stress developed is
M
¿± y
I
M L 6M 6 Pe
¿± × =± =±
1 3 2 BL
2
BL
2
BL
12
The combined stress due to axial load and bending moment
P 6 Pe P 6e
f= ± =
LB B L LB
2
1±
L ( )
Depending upon the eccentricity and length of the base plate three cases are possible.
763
6e L
Case I when there is no tension, 1− =0 ⇒ e=
L 6
L L
Case II when the tension developed is small e= to
6 3
L
Case III When the tension developed is substantial e>
3
Case I (e < L6 )
The entire base plate is under compression. The maximum pressure from concrete must not
exceed the bearing strength of concrete ( 0.45 f ck ).
P 6e
1. Combined stresses, f =
LB (
1±
L )
L 2P
When e= , f= , 0 respectively.
6 LB
764
2. The combined stress should be less than or equal to 0.45 f ck .
2P 2P
≤ 0.45 f ck ⇒ B=
LB 0.45 L f ck
3. The thickness of base plate is computed by equating the moment capacity of the base plate
to the moment at the critical section, which is assumed to be at the outer edge of the column
flange.
L
e=
6
Case II
L
(¿ )
3
765
Most part of the base plate is in under compression, with little or negligible tension on the
remaining part.
1. Calculation of the length of the plate under compression (x):
x L
+e=
3 2
⇒ x=3 ( L2 −e )
2. Calculation of the width of the base plate:
Compressive force(C) in concrete = area of stress triangle × width
0.45 f ck x
C= × B=P
2
2P
⇒ B=
0.45 f ck x
2P
⇒ B=
0.45 f ck × 3 ( L2 −e)
flange.
766
Case III (e > L3 )
Part of the base will be in compression with substantial tension in the remaining part and will
be taken up by anchor bolts.
1. The size of the base plate (L×B) is determined as before or assumed.
2. From the equilibrium of forces,
P=0.45 f ck x B−F b
And M =0.45 f ck x B ( L2 − 2x )−F a

b
Where, P=¿ axial compressive force
Fb =¿ Tensile force in the bolt
a=¿ Distance of line of anchor bolts from c.g. of the column.
The value of x may be determined from the above force and moment equations,
0.5
[( ) { }]
2
L L ( M + Pa )
x= +a− +a − 2×
2 2 0.45 f ck B
767
The maximum moment is determined at the critical section.
x
(
M =0.45 f ck x B c 2−
2 )
Where, c 2=¿ outstand of base plate from the column flange.
flange.
4. Calculation of design tensile force in the bolt:
P=0.45 f ck x B−F b
⇒ Fb =0.45 f ck x B+ P
5. Welded connection is designed to join the column section with the base for the maximum
tension in the column flange due to the applied moment.
So this is whole about the eccentrically loaded base plate and the slab base with these three
lecture we have covered. In next lecture we will go to the gusset base where we will see when
the moment is also coming into picture then how to design the gusset base, one is design of
the base plate and another is the design of the angle which is connected to the base plate or
gusset base plate with the column.
768
Lecture 62
Module 12
Gusset Base
This lecture will focus on gusset base. So in last few lectures we have discussed about the
slab base. Now in case of gusset base the column is connected to the base plate through the
gusset plate. So here the load will be transferred from column to base plate not only directly
through bearing but also through the gusset plate, so the load is going to be distributed to the
base plate through bearing and through gusset plate and this gusset base is used when load is
heavy that means the compressive load which are coming into the column is heavy or if the
moment is acting on the column then gusset base will be suitable.
So it will be clear to us if we go through one diagram of the gusset base then we will be able
to know how it is connected and as I told the load is transferred to the base plate partly
through bearing and partly through the gusset plate. So if this is a column which are resting
on the base plate now in case of slab base we are resting the column directly to the base plate.
769
So here we are providing additional gusset plate on the column and this gusset plate is again
connected with the gusset angle. So the load whatever is coming whether it is load, or
moment, or both are transferred to the base plate through gusset plate and through bearing. So
in both the ways it is transferring the load and if we see here the because of the gusset and
stiffness bear the base slab against bending therefore a thinner base plate can be provided.
The base plate is undergoing the pressure coming from the concrete pedestal because of the
reaction. Now again this gusset angle is also connected to the column by the use of bolt, so
here we can provide certain number of bolts the height of the gusset plate should be sufficient
to take care the number of bolts because here number of bolts should be used because of the
load is used the concentrate load when it becomes use then only we use this type of gusset
base.
And the critical section at which the maximum moment will develop is the maximum
overhang portion, so this we can say C the maximum overhang portion. So now this column
may face for complete bearing or may face for incomplete bearing. If it is facing complete
bearing then generally 50 percent of the load are transferred to the base plate directly and 50
percent load are transferred through the gusset plate and if it is not complete bearing then we
assume that whole load is transferred through the gusset plate. So this is how we are going to
design.
Now if we see the side view then we can see how the gusset plates are connected. So here if
we see that we are basically seeing the side view so bolt will be connected here with the angle
in both the side and also bolt will be connected to the gusset plate which is connected here.
Say if we provide bolts in two rows then at each flange in this case we are providing 8
number of bolts in each flange. So basic objective of providing gusset plate is to carry the
load from the column to the base plate through this gusset plate that means the load is going
to disperse not only through the bearing of the system but also through the gusset plate we are
providing certain amount of load.
So here if we see the maximum moment whatever coming will be calculated in this position
and the thickness of the base plate can be found from the flexural strength of the base plate.
For unit width of plate, bending moment at the critical section
770
2
wc
M=
2
Where, w=¿ intensity of pressure from concrete under the slab base.
c=¿ The portion of the base plate acting as a cantilever
Now here another thing we have to remember that upto this portion the thickness is becoming
the thickness of base plate plus thickness of the gusset angle. So basically when we are going
to provide the gusset plate then the thickness of base plate is going to be reduced.
The design bending strength at the critical section
fy
M d =1.2 Z
γ m0 e
2
fy 1×t 2 f t
¿ 1.2×
γm0 ( )
×
6
=0.2 y
γm0
Now, M =M d
2
w c2 f t
⇒ =0.2 y
2 γm0
w γm0
⇒ t=c 2.5
√ fy
771
Where, t is the aggregate thickness of base plate and cleat angle for bolted gusset base and
thickness of the base plate for welded gusset base, at the critical section.
However this is true if we are going to provide gusset angle and gusset angle when it is bolted
connections but for welded connections we do not need to provide gusset angle.
Now we will go through step by step design procedure for the gusset base. So designing a
gusset base means we have to design the base plate base plate means the dimension of the
bases which includes thickness, length and breadth and once it is decided then we have to
decide what will be the number of bolts required for the connection of the gusset plate with
the column sections.
Another thing is that when we are going to provide a gusset plate we have to know what will
be the plate thickness, what will be the gusset plate thickness and what should be the gusset
plate size that means length and width. So these are the few things which we need to know.
So in the steps when we are going to discuss we will try to address all this issue. Then the
dimension of gusset angle and the number of bolts required for connecting the system or the
weld length for connecting the systems will be calculated.
Step-1: Assume a suitable grade of concrete. Depending upon the grade of concrete used, the
bearing strength of concrete is determined by 0.45 f ck.
P
A=
0.45 f ck
Where P is the factored load on column.
772
Step-3: The size of the gusset plate is assumed.
• The gusset plate should not be less than 16 mm in thickness for bolted gusset base.
• The gusset/cleat angle is chosen so as to accommodate two rows of bolts in the

vertical leg and one row of bolts in the horizontal leg. Therefore, an unequal angle
section is provided.
• The thickness of cleat angle is kept approximately equal to the thickness of gusset
plate.
• The length of the gusset material is normally kept equal to the length of the base plate,
parallel to the flange of the column.
• For welded gusset plate, cleat angles will not be required.
773
Step-4: The dimension of base plate parallel to the web
For bolted connection:
L=¿ depth of section + 2 (thickness of gusset plate + leg

length of angle + overhang)
For welded connection:
L=¿depth of section + 2× (thickness of gusset plate + overhang)
• The dimension of base plate parallel to flange,
A
B=
L
774
P
w=
Step-6: The thickness of the base plate is computed by flexural strength at the critical section.
Step-7: Holding down bolts 2 or 4 in numbers and of 20-mm diameter are usually provided.
775
The design bending strength at the critical section
fy
M d =1.2 Z
γ m0 e
2
fy 1×t 2 f t
¿ 1.2×
γm0 ( )
×
6
=0.2 y
γm0
Now, M =M d
2
w c2 f t
⇒ =0.2 y
2 γm0
w γm0
⇒ t=c 2.5
√ fy
Where, t is the aggregate thickness of base plate and cleat angle for bolted gusset base and
thickness of the base plate for welded gusset base, at the critical section.
Now following these steps we can go through this example, okay and this example will be
working out in next lecture. I hope you have understood the process means how to find out
the dimension of the base plate and the gusset plate and the cleat angle or the gusset angle. So
these are the main members which need to be designed for the gusset base. So this things will
be clear if we go through one example then it will be much more clear.
776
Lecture 63
Module 12
Design of Gusset Base
In this lecture I will be discussing about a design example of the gusset base. So in last
lecture we have discussed the design procedure of the gusset base and which includes the
determination of the gusset plate dimensions and the base plate dimensions and the number of
bolts. So how to find out step by step that will be clear if we go through this example.
Example. A column section ISHB 350 @ 710.2 N/m carries a factor axial compressive load
of 1700 kN and factored bending moment of 85 kN-m. Design the base plate and its
connections. Assume concrete pedestal of M-20 grade.
777
Solution:
Assume Fe 410 grade of steel: f u =410 MPa, f y=250 MPa
For M20 grade of concrete:
Bearing strength of concrete¿ 0.45 f ck =0.45 × 20=9 N/mm2
Partial safety factor: (Table 5, IS 800: 2007)
γ m0 =1.1 γ mb=1.25
Properties of ISHB 350 @ 710.2 N/m: [table 1, SP-6(1)-1964]
t f =11.6 mm t w =10.1 mm
D=350 mm bf =250 mm
A=9221 mm2
Design compressive load, P=1700 kN
Design bending moment, M =85 kN-m
6
M 85 ×10
Eccentricity, e= = =50 mm
P 1700 × 103
778
Let us provide 16 mm thick gusset plate, one on each side of the column flanges and two
cleat angles ISA 200×150×15 mm.
Provide a length of base plate, L=550 mm.
e 50 1 1
Now, = = <
L 550 11 6
Hence, the base plate is in compression throughout.
779
To limit the bearing pressure from concrete to 0.45 f ck, the width required,
3
2P 2 ×1700 ×10
B= = =686.87 mm ≃ 690 mm
L× 0.45 f ck 550 ×0.45 × 20
Projection of base plate beyond leg angle toe
690−( 350+2×16 +2×150 )

¿ =4 mm
2
Let us provide a base plate 690×550 mm in size.
3
Area provided, A=690× 550=379.5× 10 mm2
Section modulus of the base plate,
2
550 ×690 6
Ze = =43.64 ×10 mm3
6
780
Maximum pressure,
3 6
P M 1700 × 10 85 ×10
f max = + = 3+
A Z e 379.5 ×10 43.64 ×10 6
¿ 6.43 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2
Minimum pressure,
781
3 6
P M 1700 ×10 85 ×10
f min = − = −
A Z e 379.5×10 3 43.64 ×10 6
¿ 2.53 N/mm2 < 9 N/mm2
350
x
551 x
2.53
5.64 6.43
690
Calculation for the thickness of base plate:
Base pressure at section x-x,
551
¿ 2.53+ ( 6.43−2.53 ) × =5.64 N/mm2
690
Moment at critical section x-x,
139 1 2
¿ 5.64 ×139 × + ×139 × ( 6.43−5.64 ) × ×139
2 2 3 ( )
¿ 59573.1 N-mm
782
Moment capacity of base plate,
fy
M d =1.2 Z
γ m0 e
250 1
¿ 1.2×
1.1 6 ( )
× ×1×t 2a =45.45t 2a N-mm
2
⇒ 45.45t a =59573.1
⇒ t a =36.2 mm (aggregate thickness of base plate and cleat angle)
Therefore, thickness of base plate,
t b =36.2−15=21.2 mm ≃ 22 mm > 11.6 mm
Provide a base plate 690×550×22 mm in size.
Bolted connection:
Provide 24-mm diameter bolts of grade 4.6.
The bolts will be in single shear.
Strength bolt in single shear (cl. 10.3.3, IS 800:2007)
f ub π ×24 2 400
¿
A nb ( )(
√3
=
0.78 ×
4 )( )
×
√3
×10−3= 65.2 kN
γ mb 1.25
783
Strength of bolt in bearing ¿ 2.5k b dt f u /γ mb (cl. 10.3.4, IS 800:2007)
e=1.5× d0 =1.5× ( 24+2 ) =39 mm
Let us provide an edge distance of 40 mm and pitch of 65 mm.
k b is smaller of
( 3ed = 3×4026 =0.51) ,( 3 pd −0.25= 3×26

0 0
65
)
−0.25=0.58 ,
f ub 400
( =
f u 410 )
=0.98 and 1.0
Hence k b =0.51
410
∴ Strength in bearing ¿ 2.5×0.51 ×24 ×11.6 × ×10−3
1.25
¿ 116.43 kN
Hence, the strength of bolt ¿ 65.2 kN
Assuming column end and gusset material to have complete bearing, 50% of the load will be
assumed to pass directly and 50% of the load will pass through the connections.
784
Number of bolts required to connect column flanges with gusset plates,
0.5 ×1700
n1 = =13.03≃ 16
65.2
Provide 8, 24 mm diameter bolts on each flange in two rows as shown in the figure.
The number of bolts required to connect the cleat angle with gusset plate will be the same.
Dimension of gusset plate:
Height of gusset plate ¿ 200+2 ×40 +65=345 mm
Length of gusset plate ¿ length of base plate ¿ 550 mm
Provide gusset plate 550×345×16 mm in size.
785
250
Gusset plate
550×345×16 mm
Cleat angle
200×150×15 mm
550
Fig. Gusseted base with bolted connections
So this is how one can design a gusset plate when the column is under compression and
moment, okay. So this is all about the todays lecture and before going to finish this entire
lecture I would like to suggest one thing that please go through the IS code 800-2007 IS: 800-
2007, this is not a mathematical course or some structural analysis course that everything you
will be understanding through logic, here logic is definitely there but numerical equations are
there expressions are there which is derived from some experimental observations like some
coefficients are obtained from experimental observations, right.
So and those are given in tabulated form which will be to remember few of them or we have
to go through that code and then we can find out. so when you will be going through my
lecture I would suggest you take a code and try to follow that code with this lecture then it
786
will be easier and you do not have to remember all the expressions many big expressions are
given where many numerical expressions means are given which is difficult to remember its
coefficients are difficult to remember so those things you can follow from the code, okay.
So whenever you will go through the lecture please sit with the code as well and revise the
things along with code and try to find out in which page or which clause these codal
provisions are there so that you can remember, right. And through this lecture you will not
understand everything unless you go through some workout example, okay and if you go
through workout example then it will be clear and when you will be going through workout
example please refer the code so that how the coefficients are obtaining, how the equations
we are going to get that you can find out and accordingly you can design the thing.
So through this lecture means entire lecture means I hope that you will get a concept of
design of limit state method for steel structure. So how to design a steel member using limit
state method that concepts I hope it will be clear however it will be much clear if you work
out some example then the concept will be much clear, I thank for your patients and I hope
you will enjoy this lecture, thank you.
787

105105162

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

105105162

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DESIGN OF STEEL STRUCTURES

Prof. Damodar Maiti

S.No. Topic Page No.

6 Design of Ordinary Black Bolts 76

11 Design of Butt welds 154

Eccentric Connection (Load Lying Perpendicular to

21 Design Strength of Tension Member 274

26 Design of Gusset Plate 343

31 Compressive Strength 403

41 Design of Batten using Bolt Connection 547

46 Failure Modes of Flexural Members 614

52 Design of Laterally Unsupported Beams 678

58 Worked Out Example for Gantry Girder 733

(Refer Slide Time: 5:44)

(Refer Slide Time: 9:08)

(Refer Slide Time: 11:38)

(Refer Slide Time: 13:24)

(Refer Slide Time: 16:17)

(Refer Slide Time: 21:29)

(Refer Slide Time: 25:10)

(Refer Slide Time: 27:26)

(Refer Slide Time: 28:23)

(Refer Slide Time: 29:52)

(Refer Slide Time: 30:42)

(Refer Slide Time: 31:30)

(Refer Slide Time: 1:50)

(Refer Slide Time: 6:50)

(Refer Slide Time: 9:47)

Carbon Equivalent = (C+Mn)/6 + (Cr+Mo+V)/5 + (Ni+Cu)/15

(Refer Slide Time: 14:43)

In addition, another is resistance against corrosion. In presence of moisture, corrosion of steel

(Refer Slide Time: 0:54)

(Refer Slide Time: 2:45)

Types of stress Notation Permissible stress (Mpa) Factor of safety

Axial tension σat 0.6fy 1.67

Axial compression σac 0.6fy 1.67

Bending tension σbt 0.66fy 1.515

Bending compression σbc 0.66fy 1.515

Average shear stress τva 0.4fy 2.5

Bearing stress σp 0.75fy 1.33

(Refer Slide Time: 9:43)

(Refer Slide Time: 10:23)

(Refer Slide Time: 11:07)

(Refer Slide Time: 11:42)

(Refer Slide Time: 13:18)

(Refer Slide Time: 14:34)

So in table 4 of IS 800: 2007 this partial safety factors are given.

(Refer Slide Time: 15:23)

Where, = Partial safety factor for material as given in Table 5.

= Ultimate strength of the material, = Design strength of the material.

(Refer Slide Time: 18:37)

(Refer Slide Time: 22:02)

(Refer Slide Time: 22:46)

(Refer Slide Time: 24:00)

(Refer Slide Time: 34:51)

The wind pressure at any height of a structure depends on following.

 Velocity and density of the air

Where,Cf =Force coefficient of the building

(Refer Slide Time: 38:23)

[cl. 6.2.1 of IS 875 part-3]

Where, Cpe =External pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.2 of IS 875 part-3)

Cpi=Internal pressure coefficient (cl. 6.2.3 of IS 875 part-3)

A = Surface area of structural element

(Refer Slide Time: 1:07)